Web Catalogue 2014 - 15

Speed Graphic
CATALOGUE / 201415
PRICES IN THIS CATALOGUE WERE VALID AT TIME
OF PUBLICATION (OCTOBER 2014) BUT ARE
SUBJECT TO CHANGE.
Please check current prices on our website (you can
enter a product code in the search box).
Small print
Contacting us
hours
Guarantee of satisfaction
You may buy with confidence from Speed
Graphic. If you are unhappy with any
purchase, return the item in the condition
as supplied with proof of purchase within
14 days for an exchange or refund (sorry
this does not apply to books, DVDs,
chemistry or special order items).
All products are guaranteed for 12
months from date of purchase unless
otherwise specified.
Prices in this catalogue

are correct at the time of going to press,
and with the exception of books, which
are free of tax, include VAT at 20%.
However, we reserve the right to change
these in response to supplier increases or
market forces, so please check our
website before ordering. If you do not
have internet access, our staff will be
happy to confirm prices by phone.
Special orders
We can get hold of many items not featured
in this catalogue, usually within a few days
if in stock at the supplier. Please note that,
unless the item is faulty, we are unable to
refund any special order item. Items may be
returned at our discretion, but will be subject
to a 15% handling charge.
Charging policy
With the exception of large value cheques
which we may need to clear first, and
internet orders paid via Paypal, you are
not charged until goods are despatched.
Same day despatch

If your order is received before 4pm and
goods are in stock, we guarantee to
despatch that day. Orders may be held for
up to 3 working days if we know that
goods are arriving to complete the order.
Do let us know if you have a deadline!
Whilst every effort has been made to ensure that
information is correct at the time of printing, we
cannot accept responsibility for any errors or omissions. Speed Graphic Mail Order Limited shall not
be liable for any injury, loss or damage resulting
from defects in equipment supplied. None of this
affects your statutory rights in any way.
E & OE. October 2014
phone
fax
email
web
mail
01420 560066
01420 563942
sales@speedgraphic.co.uk
www.speedgraphic.co.uk
Unit 4 Woodlea Park, Station Approach, Four Marks,
Alton, Hampshire GU34 5AZ
sales desk open 08301730 MondayFriday
twitter.com/Speed_Tweets
Speed Graphic first opened its phone lines in October 1994, and
the launch of this catalogue is a modest celebration of us
reaching that milestone. Our first catalogue was published in
early 1995 and ran to a compact 36 pages, in a rather inky A5
Pocketbook format. As usual, these opening pages highlight
some of our new products arriving, but this time to evoke
either nostalgia, incredulity or light relief were contrasting
them with an equivalent product from that first issue.
Form follows function or not
Archivally permanent
INDEX & ORDER FORM
One of the most gratifying statistics for

the photo retailer over the year is the
percentage of tripods sold v. cameras, a
figure which remains, even today, higher
than you would think. Bags even more so.
Back in 1994, Manfrotto were doughty
Italian engineers making substantial if at
times slightly agricultural supports of one
kind and another. Their standard 055
Triminor tripod was a professional
favourite, and has been through several
incarnations in the last 20 years. The
MT055XPRO3 model is todays equivalent
and like the 3-way XPRO head which tops
it, shows the hand of the stylist as well as
the engineer. New materials have been
developed by Manfrotto, in particular the
Adapto compound which can replace
aluminium to reduce size and weight, as
on the new XPRO Geared Head below
which is designed for the latest generation CSC cameras. See pages 3234.
INSIDE BACK COVER
CARRYING SOLUTIONS
CAMERA SUPPORTS
Something for the weekend, Sir

Photo backpacks
were something
of a novelty in
1995, and so our
first sales success
was the Hama
Classic (the
saving of 25
probably had
something to do
with it as well).
For rather less
money in real terms, heres the new Manfrotto
Advanced Travel Backpack, which has easy rapid access to gear, takes a small tripod inside
or a bigger one on the front, a laptop and is lighter. More on page 10.
Lovely meters Rita made?

The good Weston Master meter, renamed
the Euromaster II, was just about to disappear from the market. UK made, at double
the price it was 10 years earlier there were
few prepared to pay that for old technology.
Interestingly, in 2014 we still stock the
Sekonic L-398A meter, which uses the same
selenium cell system. The new kid on the
meter block was the Sekonic L-308B which
was easy to use, light, compact and would
meter flash as well as ambient light for under
200. The lightly revised L-308S is still our
best-selling meter, and standard issue for
college students, but 20 years later its
nearly 40 cheaper! See page 62.
Spreading the light

Not exactly stateof-the-art in 1995
but with a double
AF illuminator,
decent power
output, ultra-wide
diffuser, and best
of all, a side grip
which made you
look really professional, the Cobra
700AF was very
popular indeed.
These days, you
could argue that
with DSLRs offering 6-figure ISO ratings
giving increasingly good quality, who
needs flash anyway? But the pros know
that light control gives them the edge, and
the Cactus RF-60 (page 70) is a high
power gun designed especially for multiflash setups. It can act as master or slave,
and because you set the power levels, does
not require complex TTL circuitry, which
results in an incredibly low price. If you
like that idea, but would rather use other
guns, see the V6 transceiver on page 80,
which does the same with mixed bunch of
guns from different manufacturers. That is
certainly a first.
What goes around
You had to imagine the red eye of course,

as our catalogue was purely mono, but
when 6x4 prints were king and snapshot
cameras turned everyone into a red-eyed
monster, there was quite a demand for
this item. Nowadays, your digital camera
or computer program has a built-in func-
tion to do this for you and how about

the Canon Barcode Reader down below,
doing a job youd expect a button on your
camera to do (no it didnt sell). But heres
an example of how manufacturers are
finding ways to sell old school products
to users of
supposedly
complete
technological
marvels: the
Lee Bug
filter system,
which allows
GoPro users
to polarise light and
add an ND Grad
effects which are still near impossible to
replicate electronically. See page 56.
Ah yes, the Hama Filmsafe and

Filmshield Bags. Did they actually work?
Or would the X-ray machine operator just
turn up the wick if they wanted to see
inside? Well, we never had a complaint,
and sold lots, especially to slide users.
These days, archiving involves both the
physical photo and the digital photo. An
external hard drive is still a
desirable accessory, even if you
use a cloud service, and the
LaCie d2 Thunderbolt is the
latest restyled version of this
workhorse pro drive. This and
more options are on page 109.
If you do have a collection of
slides which are taking up too much
space, a purpose-designed scanner is the
way to go. A new alternative to these is a
chip-based scanner, and we have been
impressed by the performance of the
Reflecta X-7 Scan on page 108. Lastly, for
your prints there has always been the shoe
box. But for bigger and more precious
prints we can now offer a far superior
solution Ilford Archiva (page 112). It
may seem like a lot of money for a cardboard box, but they are hand-made in
England, and will provide archival permanence and the peace
of mind that
goes with
that. Two
grades
available.
CLOSE-UP & MACRO
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
EXPOSURE AIDS
ON-CAMERA LIGHTING
STUDIO LIGHTING
IMAGE PROCESSING
PRESENTATION/STORAGE
Cover design by Bethany Porteous
Billingham
Waterproofed canvas or highly

durable FibreNyte nylon
never needs re-proofing.
Top-grain
leather,
vegetable tanned
and hand dyed.
Different parts of
the hide are
used to suit the
function of the
component.
Strong 8mm zips

with woven, not
sewn, teeth and
extra-strong
pullers.
Lined with soft
AntiFray and
anti-wicking
material so
no fibres or
moisture get on
your equipment.
Solid brass fittings

wont rust or
break and are
hand-finished.
335 (shown above)

Takes 2 bodies plus 3-4 lenses. Internal
dims: 35.5Wx15Dx22H cm. Weight 1.8kg
269.00
BL335K khaki/tan BL335B black/black
BL335BT black/tan BL335NS sage/tan
445
Extra height bag. Takes 3 bodies plus 3-5
lenses. Internal dims: 40Wx15Dx25H cm.
Weight 2.1kg 309.00
BL445K khaki/tan BL445B black/black
BL445BT black/tan BL445NS sage/tan
Also available:
225 for 1 body and 23 lenses . . . 259.00
555 longer version of the 445. . . . 359.00
550
First appearing in 1978, the 550 was
designed for a full professional outfit.
Its an extremely capacious bag which
also includes two detachable Delta
end pockets. Takes 2-3 bodies plus 35 lenses. Internal dims: 42Wx5Dx26H
cm. Weight 2.44kg.
BL550K khaki/tan 549.00
Colours
Khaki canvas/tan
leather trim
Code suffix . . . . .K
Black canvas/tan
leather trim
Code suffix . . . .BT
L2
The slimline styling of the

Hadleys and one-piece removeable camera insert, make them
popular for use as a stylish
general purpose shoulder bag
too. The Pro and Large will take
A4 files or a similar size laptop
computer, whilst if you are
using a small-size camera
system like a Micro Four Thirds
type, the Small could be ideal
for your needs.
These bags feature a large

Gladstone Bag style top opening
and are also sized specifically to
take todays larger pro DSLR
bodies and lenses. All colour
options are in the durable and
lightweight FibreNyte material,
and they feature rich chocolate
colour leather bindings.
Ideal for a Leica or CSC-size outfit of a

body and 23 lenses, the L2 has a simple
zip-less design with seamless side flaps
which automatically fold over on closure
to give weather protection. No sacrifices
are made on quality though! There are
front and rear pockets for accessories.
Internal dims: 27Wx10Dx15H cm. Weight
0.71kg. 174.00
BLL2K khaki/tan
BLL2B black/black
BLL2BT black/tan BLL2NS sage/tan
The Hadley Pro Original has an internal size of

34Wx8Dx27H cm, so it will take a laptop as well as
camera plus 23 lenses. It also has an extra back
pocket for documents, top grab handle and the facility
to accept AVEA end pockets. Weight 1.01kg 174.00
5 Series
The classic Billingham design, refined with
30 years of customer feedback.
Main compartment has a 4-ply Nytex
binding, fold-over TukTopsides, and
has adjustable SuperFlex partitioning
Full length zippered compartment
Two bellowed front pockets
Rear zip pocket for documents
Delta sling shoulder strap prevents bag
from tipping forward when loaded
Leather-trimmed rain flap tucks away
behind bag during use
Doubled grab handles allow bag to be
picked up whether open or closed
5 loop external fixing system allows
extra pouches, tripod straps or back
pack harness to be attached
7 Series
Hadley Pro Original
Black canvas/black
leather trim
Code suffix . . . . .B
Sage FibreNyte
/tan leather trim
Code suffix . . . .NS
Some FibreNyte also
available in khaki/
tan and black/black
speedgraphic.co.uk / 01420 560066
BLHPK khaki/tan
BLHPBT black/tan
BLHPB black/black
BLHPNS sage/tan
Hadley Small
Simple, discreet, and minimum bulk, this
is perfect for a smaller size camera outfit.
Internal dims: 26Wx8Dx19H cm. Weight
0.7kg 144.00
BLHSK khaki/tan
BLHSB black/black
BLHSBT black/tan BLHSNS sage/tan
Hadley Large
The largest Hadley has the same
two large and two small dividers as
all this series.
Internal dims: 37Wx8.5Dx30H cm.
Weight 0.97kg. 164.00
Stowaways
207
Big front tabs make them easier to

open and the straps are intergral to the
grab handle, so this does not have to
be unclasped separately
Two sewn-in carbon fibre wands hold
the top open for easy access to equipment, and are virtually unbreakable
A full-width rear zippered document
pocket has additional protection from a
rain flap
Shoulder strap includes a deluxe SP50
shoulder pad
Two bellowed front pockets hold accessories and personal effects
SuperFlex interior is fully customisable
Made from FibreNyte material which is
tougher and lighter than canvas
107
Takes 1-2 bodies plus 1-2 lenses. Internal
dims: 27Wx15Dx22H cm. Weight 1.7kg.
264.00
BL107K khaki/choc BL107B black/black

305.00
BLHPK khaki/tan
BLHLBT black/tan
BLHLB black/black
BLHLNS sage/choc
Back Pack Harness

Attaches to Classic and 307 Series models.
55.00
BLBPHK khaki/tan
BLBPHB black/black
BLBPHBT black/tan BLBPHNS sage/tan
Compact
Internal dims: 14Wx6.5Dx21H cm. Weight 0.49kg.
BLSCK khaki/tan BLSCKBT black/tan BLSCB black/black
Pola
Airline
Internal dims: 19Wx7Dx21H cm. Weight 0.53kg.

BLSPK khaki/tan BLSPKBT black/tan BLSPB black/black
Inserts
SP50
Deluxe, foam padded alternative to the

standard version. Superior rubber grip and
smart edge binding.
SP40 (upgrade from SP15) 28.50
BLSP40T tan
BLSP40B black
BLSP40C chocolate
SP50 (upgrade from SP20) 28.50
BLSP50T tan
BLSP50B black
BLSP50C chocolate
Internal dims: 15Wx6.5Dx24H cm. Weight .052kg.

BLSAK khaki/tan BLSAKBT black/tan BLSAB black/black
307
Shoulder pads
With a larger capacity than the bag
above and with a top carrying
handle, built-in 15 screen size
laptop sleeve, rear zipped pocket
and the option of adding end
pockets, this will accommodate a pro
DSLR kit and more. Or, remove the
camera compartment and use it as a
small weekend bag! Internal dims:
43Wx14Dx31H cm. Weight 1.64kg.
269.00
Airline

279.00
BLHLK khaki/tan
BLHLBT black/tan
BLHLB black/black
BLHLNS sage/tan
Hadley Large Pro
The perfect travelling companions, to keep a pocket camera,

wallet, glasses, those euro coins youll need at the airport
and much more all in one place. The vertical zip closes an
excellent security pocket for a passport, and a Kindle slides
neatly into the rear pocket. All fit a belt and come with shoulder strap. Which size you choose depends on camera size and
how much more you need to carry: all types are 129.00
Compact
207
End Pockets
Accessories
BAGS
Hadley Series
AVEA 3 (left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49.50

BLAV3K khaki/tan BLAV3B black/black
BLAV3BT black/tan BLAV3NS sage/tan
AVEA 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.50
BLAV5K khaki/tan BLAV5B black/black
BLAV5BT black/tan BLAV5NS sage/tan
Delta (right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.00
BLDPK khaki/tan
BLDPB black/black
BLDPBT black/tan BLDPNS sage/tan
Luggage Tally
The smart addition to any piece of luggage
not just your Billingham! 19.50
BLLTT tan BLLTB black BLLTC chocolate
Superflex
inserts
allow you
to precisely
tailor your
bags interior to the
equipment to
be carried. First number is the
diameter; second the height in cm. All
types are 15.50
Code BLS . . followed by the numbers:
6-12, 7-15, 8-15, 8-18, 9-15, 9-18, 9-21,
10-15, 10-18, 10-21, 11-15, 11-18,
11-21, 12-21.
V Bridge Insert
Holds SLR
vertically or
horizontally
with lens
attached.
Model 12 for bags of 120mm width such
as the fStops and other smaller bags.
BLVB12 13.95
Model 15 for bags of 150mm width like
107, 207, 307, 225, 335, 445, 555 and
550. BLVB15 13.95
Superflex Flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.95
Straps
Tripod Straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.50
BLTST tan
BLTSB black
BLTSC chocolate
Waist Strap Attachments . . . . . . . . . 33.95
BLWSK khaki/tan
BLWSB black/black
BLWSKC choc/tan BLWSBT black/tan
Prices may change: check our website before ordering
ThinkTank
Think Tank bags are the product of two
ex-Lowepro designers and two working
Californian professionals. Their ethos is
definitely that form follows function.
Styling is deliberately discreet, and
materials are top quality for example, all
zips used are best quality YKK with nickelplated sliders and thread which is fused to
the zipper for extra strength. They have
become the favoured bags for the
travelling photographer.
More info at www.thinktankphoto.com
Complying with BAA and all international

carry-on requirements, this rolling case
features a TSA approved combination lock for
the main compartment, a security cable and
lock in the front pocket for a laptop, and a
second cable and lock in the rear compartment
to attach the bag to an immoveable object.
Holds pro-size SLRs and lenses up to
500/f4 size a typical load might be 2 bodies,
a 300/f2.8, 3-4 other lenses, flash etc. Front
laptop compartment and stretch pocket. Heavy
duty wheels and handle and top and side
handles. Optional low divider set reduces
height by 2.5cm.Int dims: 33Wx16.5-19Dx47H
cm. Weight 5kg approx.
TT559 269.00
Low Divider Sets
Fit a laptop inside
Airport International
TT561 36.00
Airport Security
TT573 43.00
A compact rolling
case, which will
still take a
400/f2.8, or an
outfit of 2 bodies
and 4-5 lenses.
Has the same TSA
lock and security
cable features of
the International
above. Optional
T551 Low Divider Set enables a 15 laptop
to be carried inside. Int dims: 34Wx16.519Dx39.5H cm. TT550 239.00
T477 Streetwalker Pro
T498 Airport TakeOff
The largest Think Tank rolling case is big enough for

a 600mm and a full complement of other equipment, including 23 pro bodies, 67 lenses etc, and
is ideal for the photographer needing to cart a large
amount of gear around. Its just inside the current
BAA carry-on size, but will be too large for most
budget airlines.
Like the other Airport bags, it has a TSA
approved combination lock on the main compartment, laptop security cable, and a
second cable and lock to attach it
to a solid object. An optional Low
Divider Set allows a laptop in an
Artificial Intelligence cover to be
stored inside. Int dims:
33Wx17.820.3Dx53.3H cm.
TT571 289.00
Upsized version, designed around a pro

body DSLR with 400/f2.8, or
70200/f2.8 with hood attached, with
other lenses around the sides. There
are 2 side pockets and 2 stretch
pockets, and an organiser pocket. A
monopod or tripod can be supported by
the bottom front pocket. The waistbelt
can be detached, and a rain cover is
included. Int dims: 24Wx18Dx42H cm.
Weight 1.5kg. TT477 139.95
A rolling backpack with straps designed to

be easy to pack away, but which can be
quickly deployed when the handle is
collapsed. The straps can be completely
covered to facilitate airport handling.
Two standard size DSLRs will fit sideby-side across the top. Pro bodies fit down
the side. The interior can be fully
customised to accommodate lenses up to
300/f2.8 size.
Takes a 15 laptop (Artificial
Intelligence 15 or 17 fit in the front
pocket), and includes a cable lock. A
monopod or tripod can be carried on the
side of the bag. Int dims: 33Wx1317Dx47H cm. Weight 4.5kg approx.
TT498 259.95
T540 Airport Navigator
T559 Airport International 2.0
T550 Airport Airstream
T571 Airport Security
Artificial Intelligence 3.0
Slim laptop cases with detachable shoulder strap. Front pocket opens wide, and
takes cables and other accessories. Also
has an organiser pocket.
TT593 for 13 32.40
TT584 for 15 39.30
TT586 for 17 46.70
Styled on the classic pilots briefcase, this rolling bag

will take two pro-size SLRs side by side with attached
lenses up to 70200/f2.8 size, plus 36 more lenses
and accessories.
There are two internal pockets for an iPad and a
15 laptop computer, and access can be from the top
or side. Handily, the top lid can be kept open by
threading its handle through the main extending one.
If you already have a rolling bag, the shoulder
strap can go over its handle to allow
both bags to be rolled together.
Like all ThinkTank rolling bags,
if ever the handle or wheels need
replacing, this is something you
can do yourself. Int dims:
38Wx17.3Dx33H cm.
Weight 4kg approx.
TT540 199.95
T514 Airport Roller Derby

With its 4 sets of double wheels at each
corner, the Roller Derby can be easily
manoevered around obstacles and in tight
spaces. You can roll it upright at your side,
tilt it to roll on its back wheels, or tilt it on
its side wheels.
Takes a 15 laptop, a tablet, and up to
2 standard DSLRs with lenses attached or
1 pro DSLR and 1 standard DSLR both with
lenses attached. Fits 67 standard zoom
lenses or flashguns. Accommodates a
400mm f/2.8 unattached.
The handle can be put in two positions, depending on whether you are
pushing or pulling. Theres a security
tether, a handy quick access pocket and
tripod mount on the sides, and lots of
internal pockets. Int dims: 32Wx1419D
x47H cm. Weight 5kg approx.
TT514 269.00
T480 Streetwalker
Hard Drive
Takes a 15.4 size laptop. A standard
or pro size body can be carried (pro
size requires space in the laptop
section via a hinged flap) with
70200/f2.8 size zoom attached.
Other lenses can be arranged around
this. A monopod or tripod can be
supported by a fold out front pocket.
The waistbelt can be detached, and a
rain cover is included. Int dims:
28Wx1518Dx 46H cm. Weight 2kg.
TT480 159.95
T470 Shape Shifter

You want to carry gear on your back
to the job, and then, with cameras
around your neck, simply dont
want a bulky pack on your back?
The Shape Shifter is the answer. It
will compress to just 3 depth when
empty, but you can still carry your
17 laptop and accessories.
Holds up to 2 pro-size DSLRs
with 3 lenses, including a
70200/f2.8, in neoprene pockets.
Front pockets with organisers take
small accessories, and theres a
tripod/monopod attachment
system. Ext dims expanded:
32Wx18Dx51H cm. TT470 186.00
T483 Airport Essentials

The smallest TT all-purpose backpack, but still
capable of taking a 300/f2.8 attached to a
camera body, or 46 average size lenses
instead. Designed around a standard size DSLR,
its slimmer than the Commuter. Takes a 13
laptop and an iPad in separate
compartments. There are handles
on 3 sides. The shoulder straps can
be tucked away; a tripod can be
attached, and a rain cover is supplied.
Int dims: 27Wx12.7Dx41.4H cm.
Weight 1.6kg TT483 129.95
Large lens backpacks

The Glass Taxi and larger Glass Limo are designed to take a big lens on its own, or a lens
and body combination, but can be reconfigured for a full outift. More information on p13
Speed Convertibles
T486 Airport Commuter

A large capacity backpack which meets all
international carry-on regulations, and
holds up to a 500/f4 lens. Typical load
might be a pro SLR body with standard
and telezoom attched, plus 34 other
lenses, flash, meter and accessories. There
are quick-access pockets for both a 15
laptop and iPad. Shoulder straps can be
tucked away; theres a removeable waist
belt; a tripod can be attached, and a rain
cover is supplied. Int dims: 29.2Wx17.3D
x41.4H cm. Weight 2kg approx.
TT486 149.95
T409 Speed Racer 2.0

The largest of 3 bags which can be worn
around the waist or used as a shoulder
bag.Forward-opening lid gives quick
access to a pro DLSR with 70200/f2.8
attached and 23 other lenses. Int dims:
29.8Wx25.4Hx17.8D cm. TT409 128.00
T406 Speed Freak 2.0

Takes a standard DSLR body and 23 lenses
inc 70200/f2.8. Int dims: 26Wx22.2Hx14D
cm. Weight 1.1kg. TT406 114.00
T489 Airport Accelerator
T401 Speed Demon 2.0
Need something even bigger? The largest Think Tank backpack swallows a 600/f4 with pro
body attached, plus an extra body and 68 other lenses, accessories and 17 laptop.
Int dims: 31.6Wx17.3Dx47.8H cm. Weight 2.5kg approx. TT489 207.50
Takes a standard DSLR body and 23 small

lenses. Int dims: 23.5Wx17Hx12.7D cm.
Weight 1kg. TT401 99.95
Think Tank Modular Belt System

A very flexible way of
tailoring your carrying
capacity exactly to
your needs. All
Modular System
components can be
locked in place on
the belt, or allowed
to rotate around it.
They are designed
for fast access, but
also come with a
detachable waterproof cover for full
protection.
T321 Modular Set v2.0 (above)

A 4-piece kit including the essential
modular components. Please note that a
belt is not included.
Lens Changer 50
T189 Lens Drop
For smaller lenses like

50mm, and teleconverters,
Int dims:
8.4x16.5H cm.
TT116 19.50
A wide-mouth
pouch with a
circular top
which allows
smaller
lenses and
teleconverters to be changed without recapping them. 10.9Dx17.8H cm.
TT189 29.95
For medium wide-tele

zooms like 1424mm with
hood ready to
shoot. Int
dims:
10Dx18.8H cm.
TT126 21.00
T136 Lens Changer 35 v2.0

Designed for standard short
zoom with hood
ready to shoot,
or a 100 Macro.
Int dims: 10.9D
x 22.4H cm.
TT136 23.00

For wide short zooms like 1635/f2.8 with
hood
attached. Int
dims: 11.4D
x18.8cm.
TT151
24.95
Lens Changer 75 Pop-Down v2.0

Strobe Stuff
Speed Changer v2.0
and a Travel Pouch to carry everything in.
TT321 114.95
T178 LC75 Pop Down v2.0

Designed for a 70200/f2.8
with hood in
position.
Extendable
bottom
section. Int
dims:
11Dx2737H
cm.
TT178 29.95
T228 Hubba Hubba Hiney

A versatile large belt pouch with 3
removeable dividers to take large accessories or lenses, or even a CSC system. Int
dims: 26.9Lx10Dx17H cm.
TT228
49.95
Steroid Speed Belt v2.0

3.5 wide, with extra padding.
TT021 SM 2734
TT027
TT023 ML 3242
XLXXL 4464
TT025 LXL 3848
All sizes 45.00
TT004
SM 2734
TT007
ML 3242
TT010
Pro Speed Belt v2.0
Skin Components
Urban Disguise Series
Lightweight, unpadded versions of

Modular system designs, incorporating
Sound Silencer flaps, for use when discretion and minimum bulk is required. Can be
used with Modular Components.
Practical bags which dont look like camera bags. The camera body is carried in a front
pouch, with extra protection from the outer flap. When the camera is in use this pouch
compresses, reducing the bags bulk, leaving access to lenses in the main compartment.
Larger bags take Attachment Straps to allow pouches to be carried on the bag.
T326 Skin Set v2.0
T813 Urban Disguise 35 v2.0
Belt not included

Skin 50 v2.0
Skin 75 Pop Down v2.0
Skin Strobe v2.0
Skin Body Bag
TT326 104.95
Takes a pro size SLR and 70210/f2.8. Fits

the Pro Speed Belt. Int dims: 25.5Lx25H
x11D cm. TT813 112.70

Takes 2 pro size
SLRs in front
pockets and
23 large
lenses, and a
17 laptop in
the rear pocket.
Side stretch pockets
take flashguns, meters etc.
Int dims: 40.5Lx30.5Hx10.5D (laptop 4D)
cm. TT826 152.50
LXL 3848
TT013
XLXXL 4464
All sizes 29.95
T017 Pixel Racing Harness v2.0
T019 Keep It Up Strap
Fits on either type of

belt to share load
between shoulders and
waist. Two stretch
pockets and D rings.
Full adjustable; one
size fits most.
TT017 31.00
A shoulder strap
which attaches to any
Think Tank waist belt
to provide additional
support. Includes a
handy smartphone
pouch. TT019 22.20
Thin Skin Belt v2.0

Takes 2 pro size SLRs in front pockets and
23 large lenses, and a 15 laptop in the
rear pocket. Side stretch pockets take
flashguns, meters etc. Int dims: 36Lx26Hx
10.5D (laptop 4D) cm. TT821 141.95
T831 Urban Disguise 70 Pro

v2.0
TT033
SML 2742
TT035
LXLXXL 3864
All sizes 23.00
T042 Skin 50
v2.0
T220 Speed Changer v2.0
T221 Slim Changer
A multi-purpose pouch big enough for a

pro-size SLR body, or lenses, batteries,
triggers and other accessories.
TT220 37.95
Slim profile bag to take a standard size

DSLR body or batteries, converters etc. Int
dims: 18.8Wx7.6Dx13.5H cm
TT221 29.95
For wide angle

zoom of 1635/
f2.8 size with
hood. Int dims: 14Wx10.2D x17.8H cm.
TT042 23.00
T044 Skin 75 Pop Down v2.0

TT223 Strobe Stuff
T226 Stuff It!
Stores a typical
600EX/SB910 size gun with
a diffuser
attached, plus an
external battery
pack. Int dims:
10.9Wx 7.4Dx
23.9H cm.
TT223 34.00
An organiser belt pouch with pockets for

accessories and
personal
items. Int
dims: 12Wx
6.4Dx 16H
cm.
TT226
26.40
T224 R U Hot?
T227 Little Stuff It!
Water bottle carrying mesh bag, with an

extra pocket for
an energy bar.
Can be used as
a general stuff
bag too. Int
dims:
9.5Dx21.5H cm.
T224 21.30
Smaller belt organiser which is sized to fit

a prosumer digital
compact like a
Canon G series.
Int dims:
8.9Wx 5.1Dx
14H cm.
TT227 18.50
For 70200/f2.8 lens

with hood reversed,
or popped down,
hood extended. Int
dims: 13.3Wx8.3D
x24.8H cm TT043
29.95
T050 Skin Strobe

Takes Nikon SB910,
Canon 600EX or
similar. Int dims:
13.3Wx8.3Dx24.8H
cm. TT050 29.95
T052 Body Bag

Holds pro-size DSLR body
without lens. Int
dims: 9.5Wx
10.2Dx30H cm.
TT052 32.80
Extra deep
design allowing
two pro-size
bodies with
attached lenses to
be carried in the main compartment. Int
dims: 37Lx31Hx16.5D cm. TT831 141.95

Takes 2 pro size SLRs in front pockets and
23 large lenses. Side stretch pockets take
flashguns, meters etc. Int dims:
34Lx26Hx10.5D cm. TT816 123.95
T840 Urban Disguise Attachment Straps

TT840 14.50
T582 Shoulder Harness v2.0 TT582 24.95
Digital Holster Series

Zoomster style bags which feature a
zippered base to allow the bag to
be extended to accommodate a
longer lens, or a lenshood kept
in the shooting position. The
tailored shape of these bags
means they have less bulk than
similar products whilst still giving
1
excellent protection. Additional
Think Tank pouches can be attached to increase capacity.
All are supplied with a shoulder strap and rain cover.
T861 Digital Holster 10 v2.0
1 For small DSLR. Int dims: 15.9Wx8.9D
x20.329.2H cm. TT861 36.00
2 For medium DSLR. Int dims: 18.4Wx
11.4Dx20.329.2H cm. TT866 49.95
3 Medium DSLR + long lens. Int dims: 19.1W
x11.4Dx28.636.2H cm. TT871 56.50
4 For pro DSLR. Int dims: 18.4Wx
15.2Dx20.329.2H cm. TT876 59.70

5 Pro DSLR + long lenses. Int dims: 18.4W
x15.2Dx28.636.2H cm. TT881 63.40
T886 Digital Holster Harness v2.0
Chest mounts any version. TT886 26.00
Retrospective Series
Think Tank have taken the best of oldschool camera bags and infused new
school thinking about sizing and materials, to create some stylish and discreet
looking bags which will blend in
anywhere. The attention to restraint also
includes sound silencing tabs which
cover the velcro closures when you need
to work quietly. Colours: all bags have
side accessory and organiser pockets and
are available in 3 colours Pinestone or
Blue Slate cotton or Black poly spun
fabrics which conform to your body.
Designed for the latest Compact System Cameras. Whether you

are toting a full outfit with a tablet, or just want something to carry a body and two lenses, theres something to suit. Fabric is best quality lightweight
water-repellent polyester, with YKK Fuse
zippers, metal hardware, and a magnetic
closure. They can be carried on the shoulder or
belt, and have front or side and under-lid
pockets for accessories, and include a rain
cover. They are also great value for money.
Sound
Silencer
tabs
Plenty of room
for personal
items
Takes a pro-size DSLR with standard zoom

attached, plus a 70200/f2.8 and 23
other lenses and accessories, or a
70200/f2.8 or 100400mm on the body
sideways, with 1-2 other lenses. The front
pockets are big enough for a pro body.
Retrospective 5
Retrospective 10
Takes a standard DSLR body and 12

lenses, or a CSC with 34 lenses. Int dims:
24Wx19.5Hx11.5D CM. Weight 1kg.
102.50
TTR5P Pinestone TTR5B Black TTR5BL Blue
Takes a pro-size DSLR body and 24

lenses. Int dims: 30.5Wx22.4Hx15.2D cm.
Weight 1.4kg. 117.00
Retrospective 7
Retrospective 20
Shown here in the Blue Slate colour, available across the range. Takes a standard
DSLR body and 23 lenses, and an iPad or
11 notebook. Int dims: 31.8Wx22.4H
x12.7D cm. Weight 1.4kg. 114.50
A taller design which takes a DSLR with

70200/f2.8 attached. Int dims:
30.5Wx29.8Hx15.2D cm. Weight 1,5kg.
123.00
Citywalker Series
Mirrorless Mover Series
Retrospective 30
T646 Mirrorless Mover 5
Takes one body up to Olympus OM-D or

Sony A7 size and standard zoom or
pancake size lens. Int dims: 9Wx12Hx7D
cm. Weight 200g. TT646 25.00
For typical Fuji X-100, Olympus OM-D size

body and 12 lenses and accessories. Int
dims: 12.5Wx13.5Hx11.5D cm. Weight
220g. TT652 32.50
Think Tank Computer and Tablet bags

App House
Retrospective 40
Retrospective 50
Has extra height to allow a 70200/f2.8

with pro body to be stored upright, and
23 other lenses, plus a 13 laptop in
separate compartments. Int dims:
35.1Wx27.9Hx16.5D cm. Weight 1.9kg.
155.00
The largest Retro offers the same height

features of the 40, but with extra length
to accommodate a 15 screen laptop. Int
dims: 39.4Wx27.9Hx16.5D cm. Weight
1.9kg. 147.00
Very lightweight hip-hugging soft bags with a removeable padded camera insert, which
makes them extremely versatile as a general purpose as well as a photo bag. As you would
expect, they will also take a tablet computer or laptop. High
quality waterproof fabrics and antique nickel
plated metal hardware. Rain cover included.
Available in all black, or black/blue.
Other Think Tank pouches can be

attached. Int dims: 40.6Wx15.2Hx24D cm.
Weight 1.5kg. 138.00
TTR30P Pinestone
TTR30B Black
TTR30BL Blue
Citywalker 20
Takes a standard size SLR with 2470
attached, 24 lenses (inc 70200/f2.8),
flash and 10 tablet. Int dims: 33Wx
22Hx13.5D cm. Weight 1kg. 103.50
TT680 black/blue
TT681 black
Citywalker 10
Citywalker 30

attached, one smallish zoom, flash and
10 tablet. Int dims: 25.5Wx19Hx13.5D
cm. Weight 0.9kg. 92.60
TT670 black/blue
TT671 black

attached, 24 lenses (inc 70200/f2.8),
flash and 15 laptop. Int dims: 34Wx
24Hx17D cm. Weight 1.4kg. 117.00
TT690 black/blue
TT691 black
App House 8 for 8 screen/iPad Mini

TT070 32.50
App House 10 for 10 screen/iPad
TT072 39.50
See p4 for
Artificial
Intelligence
Series
T664 Mirrorless Mover 30i
Features a neat padded divider with an

internal smartphone and card slots, and
takes a body and 23 lenses or flash.Full
length front pocket for personal items,
cables etc. Int dims: 21.5Wx15.5Hx9.5D
cm. Weight 300g. TT658 39.50
Takes a larger system camera like a Fuji XPro 1 and 23 lenses and an iPad or
similar size tablet computer in its own
padded slot. Flip-top lid for quick access
like all of these
bags. Int
dims: 27W
x 20.5H
x10D cm.
Weight
340g.
TT664
50.00
My 2nd Brain
My 2nd Brain Briefcase
PowerHouse
Customizable cases
taking a power
adapter for iPad
and Mac laptops,
plus AC cable, pens,
other cables, USB
drives and various
small items.
Dividers can be
easily changed to
suit your needs.
Neat carriers for iPad or iPad Mini size

tablets, with the usual excellent Think
Tank quality and room for phone, cables
and more. Can be belt-mounted as well as
carried by the handle or detachable strap.
Seam-sealed rain cover also included.
TT231
TT234
TT237
PowerHouse Tablet . . . . . 13.50

PowerHouse Air. . . . . . . . 15.00
PowerHouse Pro . . . . . . . 16.00
Cable Management 2.0

Quick access
to cords and
cables. Seethrough side,
and complete
with 3 handy
bungee cords.
TT241
Cable Management 10 2.0
18.5Lx4.6Dx10.2H cm . . . . . . . . . . . 13.00
TT244
18.5W x 17.5H x 3.6D cm . . . . . . . . . 16.50
TT247
19.8W x 19.8H x 6.9D cm . . . . . . . . . 18.50
The
Mac
enthusiasts
dream. Carry
iPhone and iPad on their
own, or with a laptop as
well. With detachable
shoulder strap and top
grab handle. In 3 colours.
My 2nd Brain Tablet
Keeps iPad (any size) and iPhone in their
own separate pockets. 54.00
TTM2BTB black TTM2BTMG mist green
TTM2BTHB harbour blue
My 2nd Brain 11
iPad, iPhone and 11 MacBook Air 61.00
TTM2B11B black TTM11BTMG mist green
TTM2B11HB harbour blue
My 2nd Brain 13
iPad, iPhone and 13 MacBook 68.50
TTM2B13B black TTM2B13MG mist green
My 2nd Brain 15
TTM2B15B black TTM2B15MG mist green
A mobile office sized around MacBook 13

or 15 computers, with room for papers,
accessories, iPad and phone, all in separate compartments. Pass-through rear slot
to fit over rolling luggage handle, and a
rain cover is also included.
My 2nd Brain Briefcase 13
TTM2BB13B black TTM2BB13MG mist green
TTM2BB13HB harbour blue
My 2nd Brain Briefcase 15
TTM2BB15B blackTTM2BB15MG mist green
TTM2BB15HB harbour blue
Pro Roller Bags
Manfrotto
Pro Backpacks
Substantially constructed, the Exo-Tough
external multi-layer construction on the
front is designed to diffuse shocks. Outer
fabric is treated with a water-repellent
coating. The interior layout is fully
adjustable, and theres a compartment for
both laptop and tablet computers. A
camera with lens attached can be accessed
from the top of the bag. Side snaplocks
prevent the bag being fully
unzipped, stopping
contents accidentally
falling out. A heavy-duty
carrying harness with
sternum strap is
provided together with a
fold-out sun and rain protector. This is
large enough to cover an attached tripod.
Pro Backpack 20
Takes 12 bodies (one with 70-200/f2.8
attached), 23 other lenses, flash, 13
laptop and accessories. Int dims:
24Wx12Dx38.5H cm. Weight: 1.7kg.
MAMPBP20 149.00
Pro Holsters
Pro Backpack 30
Takes 12 pro bodies (one with 70200/f2.8 attached), 34 other lenses,
flash, 15 laptop and accessories. Int
dims: 24Wx16Dx38.5H cm. Weight: 1.9kg.
MAMPBP30 189.00
Pro Backpack 50
Takes 12 pro bodies (one with 70200/f2.8 attached), 5 other lenses, flash,
15 laptop, tablet, and accessories. Int
dims: 24Wx16Dx46H cm. Weight: 2.33kg.
MAMPBP50 219.00
Advanced Travel Backpack
Pro Shoulder Bag 20
reddot design award

winner 2104.
A robust shoulder bag taking a camera

with mounted 70-200/f2.8, and another
short zoom and flash side by side, so that
it has a slimline profile. The Exo-Tough
external multi-layer construction on the
front is designed to diffuse shocks. Theres
a quick access top zip opening. When the
main zip is undone, the bag lid folds
forward. Full-length rear accessory
pocket, and a pull-over sun/rain protective cover included. Shoulder strap is
detachable, and theres a top grab handle.
Inner padded pocket for tablet computer.
Pro Holster
Plus 50
Use ExoTough external multi-layer
construction on
the front to
diffuse shocks,
with an outer
fabric which is
treated with a waterrepellent coating. There are two side
accessory pockets and a pull-over sun/rain
protective cover is included.
Pro Holster Plus 30
Pro body SLR with standard zoom, plus
extra lens or flash and accessories.
MAMPH30 69.00
Pro Holster Plus 40
Std body with 70200/f2.8, plus extra
lens or flash and accessories.
MAMPH40 79.00
Pro Holster Plus 50
Pro body with 70200/f2.8, and extra lens
or flash and accessories.
MAMPH50 84.50
10
Complying with standard airline carryon regulations (always check

specific requirements, as
budget airlines are less
generous with dimensions),
the Rollers have an ExoTough external multi-layer
construction to diffuse
shocks. The outer fabric is
also treated with a waterrepellent coating.
Interior layout is fully
adjustable; the red central
dividers have extra thickness to
protect equipment in the middle from
shocks, and there are
compartments for both
laptop and tablet computers. A fold-out sun and
rain protector included,
and a tripod can be
attached externally.
Theres also
a handy
Accessory
Bag.
Featuring an expandable side pocket

which has been designed to carry a
Manfrotto befree (see page 33) or similarsized tripod, this backpack has many other
design touches which make it a perfect
daybag. A DSLR with 70200/f2.8
mounted and additional lens and flash are
held in the lower compartment, and
clothes/personal items in the top section.
Zip travel can be restrained so that only
the camera section flap opens when in
use. A 40cm high pocket for a laptop is at
the rear, plus front and top small items
pockets. Int dims: 23Hx30Wx17D cm.
Weight 1.42kg. MABPTRV 89.00
Special introductory price saves 20 on RRP
Tamrac
Pro 8 (left)
Takes 2 large SLRs with short lenses
attached, plus 34 more lenses and flash.
Int dims: 32Wx15Dx18H cm.
TC5608 94.00
MindShift
Pro 12 (below)
Longer version taking 2 pro DSLRs with
lenses attached, plus 56 other lenses and
flash. Int dims: 38Wx17Dx21H cm.
TC5612 126.00
Pro Series
Pro Roller 50
Pro Roller 70
Pro Roller Bag 50

Takes 2 pro DSLR bodies, 68 lenses, 2
flashguns, accessories and up to a 17"
laptop computer. Int dims: 32Wx21Dx40H
cm. Weight: 4.4kg. MAMPRL50 279.00
Pro Roller Bag 70

Takes 2 pro DSLR bodies, 79 lenses, 2
flashguns, accessories and up to a 17"
laptop computer. Int dims: 32Wx21Dx50H
cm. Weight: 4.77kg. MAMPRL70 319.00
Rotation 180 Panorama
High quality robust traditional shoulder

bags for medium to large SLR outfits,
featuring versatile interior layout with
cradles for two cameras with lenses
attached, drop-down front pocket and
pull-out storage for memory cards etc. A
plastic-reinforced base and deep closedcell padding all around give great protection. End accessory pockets, a tough
shoulder strap, top grab handle and rear
slot to attach the bag to a trolley are
other useful features.
A lightweight companion for the keen

walker and explorer, this pack holds essential photo gear, as well as a tripod, clothing, your lunch and more.
So far so good, but the 180 Panorama
has an ace up its sleeve to get access to
your camera, theres no need to take the
pack off, or get a companion to fish around
inside. You simply pull round the integrated beltpack and undo the lid.
Its quick and convenient, with an innovative sliding magnetic catch which you can
easily attach and detach with one hand
without looking.
Apache Series
Messenger-style bags
using an attractive,
understated and
waterproof sailcloth
material. Zippered
front pocket has several
internal organiser pockets to
hold small items, and there are two end pockets for water bottles
etc. Silent closure tabs cover the velcro under the flap when you
dont want to disturb a subject. The larger two bags will also take a tablet computer, and
theres a rear Piggy-Back pocket to attach the bag to a trolley handle.
Int dims: 37Wx11Dx27H cm. Weight:

1.3kg. MAMPSB20 125.00
Revolver-8 PL
Designed with pro photographers in mind, and
the way they like to access their equipment, the
Revolver has a circular 'drum' storage compartment for 5 lenses up to 70-200/f2.8 size.
Lenses are accessed through a side flap, and to
change one, it's simply taken off the camera
and put back into place, the drum rotated, and
the next lens selected and mounted on the
camera. The camera with a short lens is stored
in the top section, and theres a rear compartment for a laptop up to 15.4" screen. A top
pocket stores phone, wallet and other personal
effects. Main compartment nt dims: 28Wx11Dx
28H cm. Weight: 1.8kg. MAPLR8 189.00
Apache 2
Apache 6
Takes a compact
DSLR or CSC with
attached lens up to
8.9cm long, a second
telezoom, flash and
accessories. Int dims:
20Wx10Dx16H cm. Weight 652g.
TC5832 59.00
Discreet and
capacious bag for
a pro DSLR body
with attached
lens up to 15.2cm
long, plus 2-3
extra lenses,
including a 70-200/f2.8, flash. An interior
padded compartment takes an iPad
size tablet or small
12x9.5" screen
laptop. Int dims:
33Wx15Dx24H
cm. Weight
1.01kg. TC5836
99.00
Apache 4
Holds a DSLR with a
lens attached up to
11.4cm, 1-2 extra
lenses, a flash, and
accessories. An interior foam-padded compartment holds a
tablet. Int dims: 26Wx13Dx20H. Weight
822g. TC5834 79.00
Top compartment takes a jacket, extra

layers, hat, gloves, lunch, etc. If you
need more gear, theres an optional
padded Photo Insert which fits here
Beltpack takes a large body DSLR with
2470/f2.8, or a smaller SLR with 2
lenses, or CSC with 34 lenses
Accessory packs attach to the belt
Side hydration pocket holds up to a 2
litre reservoir
Breathable padded harness with full
adjustment for all shapes and sizes
Top zip pocket for quick access to
personal items like a phone
Tripod attachment point
Overall size: 25Wx50Hx21D cm. Beltpack
int dims: 24Wx19Hx12D cm. Overall
weight: 1.3kg. Charcoal colour.
MSRPC 182.00
Accessories
Rain Covers
for both packs.
Beltpack can still
be used when on.
MSRPRC 18.50
Photo Insert
Fits 24 lenses inc
a 70200/f2.8 or
extra body + lens.
MSRPPI 41.00
Filter Hive
Holds six up to
100x150mm Lee or
similar filters, and
six round filters up
to 82mm dia. Fits
any belt, not just
Rotation 180.
MSFH 50.00
MSRTC
MSLSC
Tripod Suspension Kit . . . 43.00

Lens Switch Case. . . . . . . 38.50
11
Domke
Lowepro
AVAILABLE JANUARY 2015
ProTactic 350 AW
ProTactic 450 AW
Takes 12 pro SLRs, one with up to

2470/f2.8 attached, 56 lenses or
flashguns, 13 laptop, tripod and
accessories. Int dims: 27Wx16Dx38.5H
cm. Weight 2kg. LPTAC350 159.00
Takes 12 pro SLRs, one with up to

70200/f2.8 attached, 78 lenses or
flashguns, 15 laptop, tripod and accessories. Int dims: 31.8Wx19.8Dx 44H
cm. Weight 2.6kg. LPTAC450 195.00
Pro Trekker AW
The revised Lowepro expedition pack range now has two models. A new
ActivLift harness system allows the pack to be correctly positioned on any
length of back, and has a metal inner frame which allows it to stay off the
back to improve ventilation. The interiors can be customised to suit most
outfits, including very long lenses mounted ready for use on a body. Tripod
harness, side hydration reservoir holder, pull-out
all-weather cover and removeable lid are all
highly desirable features on a long trek. A
pull-out computer sleeve helps at check-in.
Pro Trekker 450 AW

Takes 12 pro SLRs, one with lens
attached up to 400/f2.8, 46 extra
lenses, 2 flashguns, up to 15
screen laptop, accessories
and personal equipment. Int
dims: 28.2Wx19Dx44H cm.
Weight 4.1kg.
LPPT450 299.00
Pro Trekker 650 AW

Takes 23 pro SLRs, one with lens attached up to 600/f4,
57 extra lenses, 2 flashguns, tripod or monopod, up to
15 screen laptop,
accessories and
personal equipment. Int dims:
35.5Wx
21.5Dx49.7H
cm. Weight
4.3kg.
LPPT650
339.00
F-2 RuggedWear
Spec as above, but the cotton canvas is
treated with a non-solvent environmentally friendly waxed finish (you get a
reproofing tin supplied). DKRF2 169.95
S&F Series
High quality professional lightweight and
low bulk modular component system
which uses the standard Lowepro SlipLock
attachment, adaptable to most belts.
Utility Bag 100 AW

F-5XB
RuggedWear
A slimline bag which will take a typical
DSLR sideways and an additional telezoom. Also suitable for CSC and
rangefinder outfits. 4 accessory pockets.
Int dims: 26.5Lx11.5Dx16.5H cm.
DKRF5XB 84.95
12
Toploader Pro AW II
With discreet but stylish all-black design - Lowepro call it urban - these new
backpacks have several innovative features to make them very versatile.
Four access points: full access is gained from the rear, which increases
security, but theres a top flap and two side flaps to allow a camera and lens
to be quickly extracted
Five modular accessories - water bottle pouch, accessory case, tripod cup
and two cinch straps can be placed anywhere on the bag where there is a
SlipLock attachment strap (those are the horizontal bands in the picture)
ActivZone system harness includes comfort lumbar pads, plenty of adjustment, and a removeable waistbelt for ease of packing or travel
Pull-out all-weather cover, top grab handle and internal laptop pocket
F-2 Original
Designed by photojournalist Jim Domke in
1976, and still the best-seller with its
robust, no-frills approach to providing a
working bag solution for a pro photographer. The combination of padded interior
compartments and canvas exterior allows
the bag to mould to your body for comfort
and reduce apparent bulk. The lid folds
right back allowing full access.
8 compartments hold 12 pro bodies,
45 lenses, flash and accessories. There
are 4 capacious pockets for accessories,
and rear and under-flap document
pockets. Webbing Gripper strap runs right
under the bag for maximum support . Int
dims: 30.5Wx16.5Dx23H cm. Weight
1.42kg. 149.95
DKF2S sand DKF2B black
ProTactic Series
All-purpose bag which will

take everything
from a pro-size
DSLR body, or a
pair of binoculars, to a mix of
accessories. Int
dims: 19Wx
7Dx16H cm.
LPSFUB 32.00
Lens Exchange AW
A unique 2-compartment design which
allows you to quickly change lenses onehanded. Just drop the lens youve taken
off into the free pocket and grab the one
to be attached.
200AW takes 70200/f2.8 size.
LPSFLE2
49.00
100AW
takes a
typical f2.8
standard
zoom.
LPSFLE1
44.00
LPSFBDS
LPSFBDL
LPSFBP
LPSFBL
LPSFMW
LPSFPC20
LPSFQP55
LPSFQP75
LPSFLP55
LPSFLP75
Deluxe Tech Belt S/M . . . 44.00

Deluxe Tech Belt L. . . . . . 44.00
Bottle Pouch . . . . . . . . . . 16.00
Light Utility Belt . . . . . . . 54.00
Memory Wallet 20 . . . . . . 16.00
Phone Case 20. . . . . . . . . 16.00
Quick Flex Pouch 55 AW . 44.00
Quick Flex Pouch 75 AW . 49.00
Slim Lens Pouch 55 AW . . 38.00
Slim Lens Pouch 75 AW . . 44.00
Filter Pouch 100

Takes up to 10 square or
rectangular format
filters up to 100x150m
size. Soft lines slots
can be removed for
cleaning.
LPSFFP 28.00
Lowepro Lens Cases

Lowepro lens cases are semi-rigid, with their one piece foam padding giving excellent protection against knocks, and a durable polyester and
nylon outer cover. All the cases have a SlipLock attachment, a mesh lid pocket for the lens cap, and larger ones have compression straps.
Lens Case 8x6cm
Lens Case 11x11cm
Lens Case 11x26cm
For standard prime

lens like 50/f1.4.
Int dims: 8Dx6H
cm. LPLC0806
15.00
For wide-angle fast zoom like 1735/f2.8.

Int dims: 11Dx11H cm. LPLC1111 19.00
For fast telezoom like 70200/f2.8 with

hood reversed. Int dims:
11Dx26H cm.
LPLC1126 28.00
Lens Case 9x9cm

When you want to travel light with a pro
body camera and single lens, these holsters
are a great option. Two supplied straps can
be configured as a single shoulder strap,
waistbelt with shoulder support, or as a
chest harness. Theres a pull-out AW cover
and side pocket for phone and other small
items. SlipLock attachment point for an
extra Lowepro Lens Case or similar.
For standard
zoom lens like
1855/f2.5. Int
dims; 9Dx9H cm.
LPLC0909
17.00
Lens Case 11x14cm

For longer fast wide-angle zooms. Int
dims: 11Dx14H cm.LPLC1114 21.50
Lens Case 13x32cm
Long lens bags
Lowepro Lens Trekker

600AW III
Manfrotto TLB-600 PL
Think Tank T190 Glass Taxi
Will take a long lens from 300/f2.8 to

600/f4 with camera body attached. The
adjustable cradle ensures a snug fit.
Theres a quick-release tripod mount, pullout all-weather cover, plus large external
pocket for accessories. Includes a built-in
backpack ActivLift harness which incorporates a padded back pad with lumbar
support, and
padded
straps and
waistbelt.
Int dims:
20Wx22D
x61H cm.
Weight
3.3kg.
LPLT6
199.95
Toploader Pro 70 AW II
Pro SLR with 2470/f2.8 or 1424/f2.8.
Int dims: 16.1Wx7.8Dx23.5H cm.
LPTLP702 69.95
Toploader Pro 75 AW II
Pro SLR with 70-210/f2.8. Int dims:
16.1Wx17.8Dx29.2H cm. LPTLP752 79.95
Lens Case 9x13cm
For telephoto up to 300/f2.8 size. Int

dims: 13Dx32H cm.
LPLC1332 31.00
For typical
tele-zoom like
55200/f4.5.
Int dims:
9Dx13H cm.
LPLC0913
19.00
Designed to carry big lenses, especially

through airports, the Glass Taxi holds a
400/f2.8 or 500/f4 with hood reversed, or
a 300/f2.8 with hood extended. However,
dividers are also supplied to allow it to be
configured to carry an SLR and several
lenses. Backpack harness can be tucked
away, and the supplied shoulder strap
used instead. Rain cover included. Int
dims: 20.3Wx20.3Dx42H cm. Weight
0.441.37kg. TT190 112.50
Think Tank T192 Glass Limo

Based on the Glass Taxi, but longer, so
that it will take a 600/f4 on its own, or a
400/f2.8 with attached pro SLR body.
Supplied with dividers to reconfigure it to
take a body plus 58 smaller lenses. High
quality Streetwalker-derived harness; also
accepts Pro Speed belt and has three
attachment rails for Modular components.
Rain cover included. Int dims: 22Wx22D
x48.2H cm. Weight 1.11.8kg.
TT192 146.95
A large capacity backpack for a 600/f4

with attached pro SLR body. A padded
cradle divider and circumference divider
fit around the base and middle of the lens
to provide important stability to the heavy
load. The cradle divider moves out of the
way when quick access is required. Extra
storage is provided by the top cap pouch
(which can be removed), and a large front
pocket with internal
organiser. A tripod
can be carried on the
front or side.
Int dims:
22Wx22Dx53H
(main compartment). Weight
3.36kg.
MAPLTLB600
209.95
13
Equipment covers
Op/tech Snoot Boots
Easy-access pouches which give good

protection against impact, moisture and
dust. Top flap is secured with press snaps,
and there is a built-in lanyard to keep the
pouch attached to the camera if required.
D-Micro (left) fits Sony RX100 size camera

with dimensions 11.4Wx6.4Hx5.1D cm.
OPDMIC 18.50
D-Mini fits Fuji X10/20 size camera with
dimensions 11.4Wx7.6Hx5.1D cm.
OPDMIN 18.50
D-Small (left) fits Fuji X10/20 or similar

with hood attached, or camera with
dimensions 11.2Wx8.9Hx8.3D cm.
OPDSM 18.50
D-Compact fits Canon G, Fuji XE-2 and X100, Nikon 1, Sony A7,Panasonic GH-1 or
similar camera with dimensions 12.2Wx
7.6Hx7.6D cm. See note below
OPDC 18.50
D-Offset (right) fits most compact
cameras with an offset lens measuring
12.4Wx7.6Hx11.7D cm. OPDO 18.50
for DSLR cameras
D-Midsize fits most smaller DSLR cameras

or Lumix GH-1 with lens measuring overall
12.7Wx9.5Hx15.2D cm. OPDM 23.50
D-Midsize Zoom (right) fits most smaller
DSLR camera with telezoom measuring
overall 12.7Wx9.5Hx20.3D cm.
OPDMZ 26.95
D-SLR fits mid-size SLR bodies like Nikon

D7000 or Canon EOS 5D, overall size
15.2Wx11.4Hx15.2D cm. Max lens size
11.4x8.9cm. OPDS 23.95
D-SLR Zoom is the long nose version for
similar size bodies with a telezoom up to
15cm, overall size 15.2Wx11.4Hx20.3D
cm. OPDSZ 27.95
Mini 7.6Dx10.2L cm
OPSB01 13.95
Small 8.3Dx15.2L cm
OPSB02 16.50
Medium 8.9Dx20.3L cm
OPSB03 19.25
Large 9.15Dx22.9L cm
OPSB04 21.95
Wide Body Small 10.2Dx12.7L cm
OPSB05 16.50
Choice of pouch will depend on the length

of the lens attached to the camera. See the
Product Finder at www.optechusa.com
14
D-Pro fits deep body pro SLRs like Nikon

D4 or Canon EOS 1 with battery pack,
overall size 15.2Wx16.5Hx15.2D cm. Max
lens size 11.4x8.9cm OPDP 27.95
D-Pro Zoom is the long nose version for
pro SLRs with a telezoom up to 15cm,
overall size 15.2Wx16.5Hx20.3D cm.
OPDPZ 29.95
Wide Body Medium 11.4Dx16.5L cm

OPSB06 19.25
Wide Body Large 11.4Dx20.3L cm
OPSB07 21.95
Wide Body XL 11.4Dx25.4L cm
OPSB08 22.70
Wide Body XXL 13.3Dx30.5L cm
OPSB09 23.50
Novoflex Wraps
Ideal to give extra knock protection for
equipment being carried in a rucksack or
non-padded bag. Other wraps on the market
use standard neoprene fabrics which give good
protection but have limited stretch. Novoflex use a
new fabric (in their trademark blue) which combines
all the protection with much more stretch, so you
can really wrap it tight around the equipment to minimise bulk.
Small for pocket cameras, phones etc.
20x20cm NVWRAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.00
Medium for SLR bodies, lenses, flash, small
camcorders. 28x28cm NVWRAPM . . . . 10.50
Provides simple protection to freely access

your camera while out and about. Lightly
padded to protect your camera from debris
and scratches, it has an integrated belt to
keep your DSLR camera ready for anything
and folds into itself for compact storage.
The flap is rain-resistant and its superlight (the largest is only 192g packed).
Manfrotto E-690 PL Cover

The Rainsleeve is a shaped plastic bag
which fits around the lens and locates
over the eyepiece of the camera. There is a
drawstring to ensure a snug fit around the
front of the lens, and function buttons
and controls can be operated through the
cover. It is designed for emergency
protection and is not recommended for
all-day use. As it takes up little space its
ideal for keeping in a bag in case of emergency. For lenses up to 45.7cm long and
17.8cm max diameter.
PACK OF TWO OPRS 5.50
ULCC 10
Fits a small DSLR (Canon EOS) with kit lens
or short zoom, or a std DSLR (Nikon
D7/800) with short zoom without hood.
17Wx13Hx16D cm. MSULCC10 27.50
ULCC 20
Fits a standard or gripped DSLR (Canon 5D
MIII/1DX or Nikon D800/D4) with
attached medium zoom lens.
ULCC 30
Fits a standard or gripped DSLR (Canon 5D
MIII/1DX or Nikon D800/D4) with
attached large zoom lens.
A scaled-down E-702, suitable for small to

medium SLR cameras. Two side sleeves
give access to controls, and theres a clear
view of viewfinder and LCD panel. Bottom
zipper allows tripod mounting.
MAPLE690 39.95
Designed for a pro-size SLR with 70200mm

zoom, the E-705 has the additionof a transparent TPU top which can be raised to house
a flash or LED light, or folded down when
this is not required. Quick pull, onehanded drawstrings cinch the cover
snugly to the lens, and
also to your arms.
Spacious side sleeves give
easy access to all controls.
The E-705 is also compatible with the E-704 Sleeve
Extension Kit.
MAPLE705 62.95
Think Tank T626 Hydrophobia 300600 2.0

Heavy-duty protection for DSLRs with
lenses from 300mm to 600mm.
Fully waterproofed and seam-sealed
Mounts to the lens hood, and can be
rolled back when not required
Can be put on with camera in place
Clear PVC window allows view of top
plate and rear screen
Right and left hand entry points
Memory card and batteries can be
changed with cover in place
Extension for 600mm lenses provided
Tethered protective front element
cover provided
Requires eyepiece (sold separately)
Includes mesh carry bag
TT626 119.00
Op/tech Rainsleeve Mega
Large for tele lenses, cameras with lens on,

camcorders. 38x38cm NVWRAPL. . . . . 13.50
Extra Large (left) for long telephotos,
laptops 48x48cm NVWRAPXL . . . . . . . 18.00
MindShift Ultralight Camera Cover
D-4/3 fits Canon G, Fuji XE-2 and X-100,

Nikon 1, Sony A7,Panasonic GH-1 or
OPDFT 22.95
D-Shortie fits Canon G, Fuji XE-2 and X100, Nikon 1, Sony A7,Panasonic GH-1 or
OPDSH 18.50
Snoot Boots have a cylindrical profile and can be used for

a variety of purposes. They will give protection to a lens,
and have a belt loop and snap
hook attachment. Or you can
push them over a tripod head
or over the end of a long lens
to give protection against
impact, dust and moisture.
The Wide Body versions are
designed for large lenses, and
there are 9 sizes in all.
Op/tech D-Series
for Compact/CSC cameras
Op/tech Rainsleeve
For large telephoto lenses. The elastic

drawstring enclosure with barrel locks will
fit any camera/lens configuration up to
20.3cm diameter and up to 63.5cm long.
PACK OF TWO OPRSM 8.75
Think Tank T623 Hydrophobia 70200
An all-weather protector for any size SLR

with a standard zoom. A full length
double zipper allows easy access, and the
adjustable hood fits a variety of lens diameters and needs no velcro attachment. A
clear plastic sleeve is of a high quality
grade that wont discolour or crack.
MAPLE702 54.95
Tough, seam-sealed protection for a pro DSLR with a lens

up to 70210/f2.8 size.
External camera strap means you dont need to
remove the one attached to the camera
Clear PVC window allows view of top plate
and rear LCD screen
Memory cards and batteries can be
changed with cover in place
Requires eyepiece (sold separately)
Includes mesh carry bag
TT623 105.00
Op/tech Rainsleeve Flash

Has a top extension to accommodate a
typical flash
up to the
largest
Canon/Nikon
size. The lens
section is
also slightly
shorter than
the standard
version,
making it a better fit for the typical
70300mm telezoom.
PACK OF TWO OPRSF 7.95
Hydrophobia
eyepieces
Manfrotto E-704 PL
Extension Sleeve Kit
Consists of 350mm and 650mm sleeves
which attach to the E-702 or E-705 covers.
If access is needed for focusing, a Hand
Sleeve can be connected underneath as
required. MAPLE705 59.95
Required to fit all

Hydrophobia covers
to the camera
TT639
NSI Nikon large circular . 25.00
TT640
N Nikon rectangular . . . . 25.00
TT643
EP-10 Canon most. . . . . . 25.00
TT644
EP-15 Canon 6D, 5D . . . . 25.00
TT645
EP-20 Canon 5D Mk3, 1D. 25.00
Hydrophobia Flash 70200

Has the same features
as the standard
version, but with an
additional transparent top section
to take a typical
system oncamera
flashgun.
TT621
103.00
15
Op/tech
Think Tank Strap v2.0
Cotton Carrier Hand Strap

with Arca Plate
Soft and durable neoprene straps which

help reduce the apparent weight of equipment by up to 50%, increase carrying
comfort, and which come with a lifetime
guarantee against material or manufacturing defects.
TT253 blue/black
TT254 grey/black
Pro Strap
Classic Strap
Slightly narrower than the Pro Strap, and
with an edge binding for a more tailored
look, for a typical SLR and lens this gives
all the benefits of Op/tech weight reduction with less bulk. Supplied with 3/8
webbing connects. 13.95
OPCSB black OPCSN navy OPSCR red
The best bet for a DSLR with a substantial

lens. Non-slip backing and quick connecting system. Supplied with 3/8 webbing
connects which are adjustable in length.
14.95
OPPSB black
OPPSR red
OPPSN navy blue
Pro Loop Strap
A sturdy webbing design with interwoven

non-slip material and minimal bulk. 2.5cm
wide, and fully adjustable in length.
18.50
Can be attached to Think Tank harnesses
with Camera Support Straps v2.0
TT258 12.50
Kaiser Professional
Hand Strap
Exactly the same as the Pro Strap, but

supplied with Pro Loop connects (see
number 4 in the box below). Black.
OPPLSB 14.95
Gotcha Strap
Similar the Wrist Strap, but with velcro
wrist attachment and quick disconnect.
OPGS 9.95
Op/tech Connects
Numbers reference different types as shown
right; dimensions indicate the range of
adjustment; prices are per pair.
1 Swivel Hook 1219. . . . 8.95
OPCSH
2 Adjustable 8.512 . . . . 6.50
OPCA
OPCW
3 3/8 Webbing 319 . . . 5.95
4 Pro Loop (1/4) 1014. 6.60
OPCPL
5 Utility Loop 3 . . . . . . . . 5.50
OPCUL
OPCUNL 6 Uni Loop 0.5. . . . . . . . . 5.95
OPCE
7 Extensions 8.511.5 . . 6.25
Medium format connectors
As 3/8 weebing style, but with lug ends to
fit post type strap connects. 1015
OPCSPA 8 Pro Connects A
Bronica (not ETR-S), Hasselblad etc . 10.95
OPCSPB 9 Pro Connects B
Mamiya (not 645 Super/Pro), Pentax
67/645, Rollei . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.95
16
SLR Wrist Strap

One-piece loop goes
over the wrist and is kept
in place with a security
slide. Fits most SLRs and
binoculars by means of its UniLoop attachment. OPSWS 7.95
1
Genuine
Leather
Leather Wrist Strap
11mm wide; attaches

to either the base or
on side of camera.
19.95
7
8/9
Pro A:3.1mm B:4.11mm
Use just one strap across a variety of

cameras. Each camera can have a set of
suitable connects, and the ends of these
joined together to form a handstrap
when the strap is detached.
NPWSBR brown
NPWSB black
BRAD Strap
Helps retain the shoulder
pad in position. For RS
DR-1 and RS-7 straps.
BDBRAD 18.00
FastenR-3
Solid stainless steel strap
fastener screw finished in
black nickel. Locking
ridges ensure solid connection. BDFR3 13.95
RS-4
RS-7
Lightweight strap for a single camera

which includes a quick access pocket for
cards or other small items.
BDRS4 44.95
Low profile curved shoulder strap for a

single camera. Accepts MODS accessories.
n.b. BRAD Strap shown in picture is not
included. BDS7 49.95
RS DR-1
FastenR Stealth
Same design as the standard FastenR-3 but with a
vinyl covering on a stainless steel core to stifle
noise. BDFRS 14.95
Keeps two cameras at the ready. The

harness has curved shoulder pads and an
adjustable sternum strap to ensure a
comfortable fit on all sizes of body, and
can be split to create a single strap if
required. It can also be customised with
MODS accessories. BDSDR1 109.95
FastenR-T1
Adapts a Manfrotto RC2
release pattern (200PL)
quick release plate for use
with Black Rapid straps.
BDFRT1 16.70
Sun Sniper
Cotton Carrier
Inspired by an 1885 US Cavalry carbine sling strap, the Sun Sniper spreads the load of a
heavy camera across your body and allows the camera to be easily moved to the shooting
position in one swift action. The shoulder pad is also designed to absorb some of the
camera weight and absorb shocks, and all materials used are top quality.
A harness which eliminates neck and back

strain caused by carrying a heavy camera,
tethers the equipment securely to your
chest when walking or climbing, and
keeps both hands free until you need to
take a shot. Fully adjustable to all body
sizes and shapes.
A small steel Hub screws in to the
tripod socket and slides sideways into the
Vest receptor. When the camera is turned
to the carrying position its locked.
1901 Fotografi
A soft textile strap for use with compact

digital cameras and other small portable
devices. The quick release connector
allows the strap loop to be
detached if not required.
Length approx 37cm.
KA6736 5.25
A soft padded real leather strap suitable

for DSLRs or larger compacts. The camera
mounting plate has a 1/4 tripod mounting socket and two fold-out legs which
provide a secure stand when the camera is
placed on a table or floor. KA6701 24.95
An ideal complement for a classic camera,

or if you are looking for a simple and
stylish support for something more
contemporary. 1901 Straps are made in
Somerset from supple high quality
leather with stainless steel attachments.
The R-Strap design allows the camera to hang upside down from its tripod socket at the
side of the body. It can then be quickly slid up the strap to the shooting position. It stays
secure all the time, and the hip supports a heavy load better, and makes walking with the
camera more comfortable.
Kaiser Wrist Strap
Super Classic Strap

Has the same slimmer tailored look of the
Classic Strap, but with extra padding and
stretch control of the SOS bag strap, so
suits heavier loads. Available in two
versions. Black only. 14.95
OPSCSW 3/8 webbing connects
OPSCSP Pro Loop connects
A sturdy side
strap with
anodised metal
baseplate with
an Arcapattern profile
to fit a
variety of
compatible
releases.
Heavy-duty
webbing and pad
give good support
to a heavy DSLR
load. Baseplate has
recessed 1/4 screw and 1/4 and 3/8
sockets for tripod attachment.
CNUHS 29.95
STRAPS
Black Rapid
PRO II Steel & Bear

With Zick Zack (German for zig-zag)
shock absorbers, stainless steel camera
connector and woven steel security insert,
the PRO II handles DSLR weights of up to
5kg. SSPRO 59.95
Leather Shoulder Strap

11mm wide, with shoulder pad. The split
ring will attach to any camera with a strap
eyelet, or if removed the strap will then fit
many cameras with a slot style attachment. Length is adjustable by moving the
stainless steel grommets to another slot in
the strap. 27.95
NPSSBR brown
NPSSB black
The woven insert on

these straps is not
just there for extra
strength but is also
a great protection
against cut-andrun thieves.
Camera Vest for 2 cameras

DPH Double Plus Harness
Ideal for wedding, news or sports photographers using two or more cameras. A
third smaller camera or pair of binoculars
can also be attached. Woven steel security
insert and stainless steel connectors.
Takes a 5kg load on each side.
SSDPH 114.95
StrapShot
Slides on to any backpack strap to adapt it
to the Cotton Carrier system, and allow a
camera to be conveniently carried and
kept ready for instant use. Includes:
Universal Camera Adaptor
Camera Security Tether
Flat Camera Hub
CNSTS 54.95
Includes a Side Holster, which can be

detached if you just want to carry one
camera. Includes:
Camera Vest
Camera Security Tether x 2
Universal Camera Adaptor
Hand Strap x 2
Angled Camera Hub
Flat Camera Hub x 2
Allen key x 2
CNV2 129.95
17
Spider Camera Holster
Billingham PhotoVest
Wildlife Watching Supplies

C33 Medium Bag Hide
Walkstool Comfort
Made from high quality stainless steel, the Spider enables a typical DSLR set-up to be
carried at the hip, and quickly detached for shooting. The Pin engages in the Spider Pro
Holster slot and a two-position lock allows free movement in the slot, or secure retention
with push-button release.
Pro Holster System

Includes Spider Plate with Pin and Allen
key, Spider Pro Holster, and Spider Belt.
SH1 104.95
Pro Dual Holster System

Allows two cameras to be carried. 2 x
Spider Plate with Pin and Allen key, and
Spider Pro Holster. SH12 184.95
Made from a water-resistant, plain weave

textured nylon material which is
lightweight, tough and machine-washable, with a soft black inner lining, and
heavy duty plastic coil zips. Its cut
slightly shorter than other vests, which
prevents lenses knocking on the the top of
your legs when walking, and gives more
comfort when sitting. The vest has a full
height inner pocket, accessed from a waist
pocket. There are two internal pockets,
one with a security zip, and two handwarmer pockets, plus plenty of places to
store pens, phones, filters and other small
essential items. 195.00
The Spider Plate (right) allows the Pin to be

set in any of five positions to achieve
optimum balance with the equipment being
carried, has anti-twist lugs which fit to the
front of the camera body, and will accept
popular quick release plates, e.g. Manfrotto
200PL type.
Pro Holster accessories

Spider Plate and Pin
Have a second camera ready for use in the
Spider Pro. SH1PP 29.95
Spider Belt SH1B 28.95
Spider Pin SH1PN 6.95
ThinkTank ProSpeed Adap SH1TP 99.95
ThinkTank Steroid Adap SH1TS 99.95
Arca-Swiss type plate

Made by Acratech; screws
into the Spider Pro Plate
to allow quick attachment to a tripod.
SH1PA 59.95
Spider Monkey Unit

A neat clip system which
allows lighter items to be
quickly attached to a belt
- ideal for meters, flashguns, battery packs etc.
Comes with 2 Tabs.
SH3 19.95
SH3T
D-Ring for wrist strap

Screws into any of the
free holes on the Spider
Plate to allow attachment to a suitable handstrap. SH1R 9.95
Monkey Tabs Pack of 3 . . 15.95
Black Widow
Intended for use with small to medium-sized DSLRs
or CSCs, and lenses. For loads up to 1kg you can fit
the Black Widow directly to your own belt. Between
12kg its recommended to use it in conjunction with
the Spider BW Belt and Pad. For loads above 2kg, go
for the Spider Pro system. SH2 39.95
Black Widow Belt
Robust webbing belt for improved
support. Fits 23-48 waist. SH2B 19.95
Black Widow Pad
Adds comfort with heavier cameras.
SH2D 7.95
Black Widow Pin SH2PN 6.95
Thin Tripod Adaptor Plate
Adapts a quick release plate for use with
the Black Widow. SH2TP 19.95
18
BLPVS
BLPVM
BLPVL
BLPVXL
BLPVXXL
Small 3436
Medium 3740
Large 4143
X-Large 4446
XX-Large 4749
A throw-over (bag) hide in medium weight

proofed polycotton material, ideal for
quickly disguising yourself. Uses no poles
or pegs and easily adapts to just cover
your camera and tripod, or as much or
yourself as it necessary. Has one opening
window with insect and scrim net. You can
also put your head through the window
and use the hide as a cape. Advantage
Timber pattern (as shown above) is used
for most conditions such as woodland/dry
grassland, heaths etc. and is the most
popular pattern. The Camouflage pattern
(greens and browns) is better for woodland or darker and greener areas. 82.60
WWC33A Advantage Timber
WWC33C Camouflage
* Walkstool Steady
(optional extra)
Fits any Walkstool Comfort to prevent

movement on slippery surfaces, stopping
the legs sinking in soft ground, and to
give extra stability and strength. Supplied
with pouch. WSCS 15.50
Linpix
Photography
Mat
The Linpix Photography Mat will be a boon

to anyone wishing to get down on the
ground outdoors and stay dry whether
its stalking an animal, or capturing a rare
plant, or even eating ones sarnies.
Size 145 x 75cm
Made from sturdy waterproof material
Folds in two to keep the dirty side
enclosed when its being carried
Rolls up into a compact package
Detachable shoulder strap
Attaches to a camera bag tripod straps
DRM 19.00
Wildlife Watching Supplies C80R Camera/Lens Cover
Black. Available in half sizes from 6 to 12

to ensure an accurate fit to your hand.
Short cuff (left), Long cuff (right). Codes
on website. Either style 25.00
Kaiser Outdoor Photo Gloves

A combination mitten and half finger glove made from
breathable fleece with an anit-slip coating on the palm.
The hinged covers are secured by a velcro strip when folded
back, and theres a handy centre ring pull to aid removal
from the hand. The gloves can be clipped together. Medium
suits most women; large most men. 29.95
KA6370 Medium
KA6371 Large
Eckla Beach-Rolly
A really robust but lightweight, dual-purpose

rolling chair and equipment trolley, which folds
flat for easy stowage in a car boot.
Made in Germany from non-rusting materials
Extra-tough seat material takes bags, boxes
and tripods without problem
Wide-profile pneumatic tyres cope well with
soft or loose material surfaces
For extra comfort when
used as a seat, there is a
Sunshade, a Neckrest
and a Drinks Holder!
Capacity can be
increased with an
optional Cargo Bar
Should there ever be a
problem, spare parts are always available
Walkstool Steady*
MacWet Climatec gloves

Well established as the first choice for
riding, shooting, golfing, cycling and
many other sports where feel and grip are
vital, they are equally good for manipulating camera controls.
Palms and thumbs are made from
Aquatec a unique material which
wicks away moisture and dries quickly,
maintaining good grip even when wet
Climatec backing insulates from wind
and resists rain
Work with touch screen devices like
phones and tablets
Long cuff gives more heat insulation
OUTDOOR
A useful accessory for outdoor photography, as well as for numerous other

pursuits.
The patented Walkstool design is a 3legged folding stool with telescopic legs.
This offers two sitting positions; low, with
the legs retracted, and normal with the
legs extended.
Despite it being very light, the Swedish
National Testing & Research Institute
managed to record a maximum load pressure of 250kg (Comfort 65 model).
There are 4 models. The number
denotes the seat height in cm (45/55 is
normal; the other two are popular with
hunters and taller people).
Height Seat size
WSC45
45cm
35cm . . . . . . 59.95
WSC55
55cm
37.5cm . . . . . 65.50
WSC65
65cm
40cm . . . . . . 73.00
WSC75
75cm
42.5cm . . . . . 83.20
Includes soft carrying bag with strap
Provides
camouflage
and weatherproofing. A
double layer
of proofed polycotton with timber
pattern on one side and
olive green on the other. Elastic
fit around the lens,
with a drawstring
closure over the
camera. Seven
lengths are available to suit most
lenses.
WWC80R1
WWC80R15
WWC80R2
WWC80R25
WWC80R27
WWC80R3
WWC80R4
Lens up to 15cm . . . . . . 36.80

Lens up to 20cm . . . . . . 40.90
Lens up to 36cm . . . . . . 53.10
Lens up to 46cm . . . . . . 61.30
Lens up to 52cm . . . . . . 65.80
Lens up to 60cm . . . . . . 70.80
Lens up to 71cm . . . . . . 84.40
WWS C11 Mat

Extra comfort for sitting or kneeling.
Polycotton camouflage cover over
closed cell foam interior, with waterproof nylon base. 26x36x0.8cm.
Weighs 80g and rolls up snugly.
WWC11 12.20
Colour: olive green/beige. ECBR 95.00
Beach-Rolly accessories
Neckrest
Ideal for birding
or other extended
observation
periods.
ECBRN 16.50
Cargo Bar
Folds out to
increase the load
capacity of the
Rolly.
ECBRCB 25.00
Cargo Net
Hooks over the
frame to restrain
the load useful
on rough ground.
ECBRCN 15.00
Sun Roof
Folds down, so
does not need to
be detached from
the Rolly.
ECBRR 36.00
ECBRB
Bottle Holder . . . . . . . . . . 9.50
Eckla Multi-Rolly
The Multi-Rolly is a heavy-duty version of
the Rolly design, giving you the option of
folding down a seat without having to
remove the equipment being carried. The
load platform is secured against accidental folding by a circlip, and the Rolly folds
flat for easy stowage in a car.
Its available with or without the
Multi-Holding Bar which gives extra
support for long items like tripods (or
fishing rods). This can be purchased separately as an upgrade.
The Beach Rolly Cargo Net and Bottle
Holder can be used with the Multi-Rolly.
ECMR
Multi-Rolly . . . . . . . . . . 159.00
ECMR2
Multi-Rolly with MH Bar 189.00
Optional
MultiHolding Bar
Seat
Holding
hooks
Pockets
Load
platform
19
Novoflex Chestpod
Novoflex Micropod
Novoflex Multi-Tool
Weighing next to nothing (50g) but

capable of supporting a heavy SLR, the
Micropod can be slotted into the pocket of
a camera bag. Attach a small ball and
socket head, you are ready for any eventuality. Can also be used as a small hand
grip. NVMRP 15.00
A handy slimline kit of 8 screwdrivers

weighing just 80g.
2mm Hex
5mm Hex
3mm Hex
6mm Hex
4mm Hex
Torx T25
Phillips
Flat slotted screwdriver
Also comes with a removeable spring for
keyring attachment. NVMT 12.50
Flexible accessories which offer the

possibility of stable support in
difficult situations. They can
be fixed to boards, pipes
or other irregular objects,
so are useful in the
studio or outside.
Each clamp is
equipped with
two support platforms at
right angles to each other, with 1/4
threads. Three sizes; the smaller two
being especially suited to round tube
mounting.
The PISTOCK-C is carefully designed to
achieve a symmetric 3-point support
geometry for maximum comfort even with
heavy equipment. The support can be used
against the shoulder, or against the chest
in conjunction with the neck strap. Both
the strap and support are fully adjustable.
Large (UNIKLEM) 10.5Hx6.5Wx7.5D cm.

Weight 534g. Jaw size 62mm.
NVUK 74.00
Any quick release with a 1/4 socket can
be mounted on to the camera platform as
desired. Weight 450g. NVPS 89.00
Novoflex MicroStativ
Consists of the Micropod with a Ball 19
ballhead. Although small (56mm high)
and light (92g), the Ball 19 will support
most SLR type cameras.
NVSTATIV 30.00
Manfrotto PIXI
A stylish companion
for a compact
digital
camera,
taking
loads up to 1kg. Made from
stainless steel and Adapto, it
has push-button unlocking and
locking of the ball head allowing
the camera to be repositioned in an
instant. Weight 230g. MAMTPIXI 19.95
Manfrotto 709B
All-aluminium sturdy and
lightweight support for
loads up to
2kg.
Legs
fold together to make a hand
grip. Weight 200g.
MA709B 31.00
20
Novoflex Forked Joint

The GAKO joint is a rapid way of achieving
extra support for long lenses or scopes,
but maintaining freedom of movement.
The fork revolves 360, allowing moving
subjects to be followed without sacrificing
rigidity. Height 110mm; fork width
125mm; weight 210g. NVGAKO 55.00
Novoflex Minipod
An amazingly flexible support, ideal for
ground level photography of
plants etc. Each 25cm
leg is connected to a
ball and socket joint,
which can be independently swivelled
and tilted. It will
support up to 10kg.
Legs are detachable.
Weight 390g.
NVMP 95.00
15cm Extension
Rod Set
NVMPS 24.00
Attaches to any clean smooth surface,

like glass, marble, metal or plastic. Has a
base diameter of 65mm and 1/4 screw
attachment. No load quoted, but on a
glass surface we couldnt remove it
using normal force! NVSP 16.00
Complete with the Ball 19 30.00
386B Nano Clamp
Novoflex BasicBall
244RC Arm
The BasicBall is essentially a hemisphere with

nine holes drilled in it to allow the attachment of various length legs at differing
angles, or rods or bendy arms for flashguns,
creating a lightweight and versatile
support system with the addition of
other accessories. The BasicBall (in
silver or blue) comes supplied
with three 20cm legs.
An articulated arm with

variable friction, complete
with ball head and 234RC
quick release (200PL plate).
All joints are simultaneously
locked by the large knob. Fits
035 clamp and takes 4kg
load. Weight 1.11kg
MA244RC 117.50
143RC is the same, but
has a lever in place of
the knob to speed
locking and
unlocking.
MA143RC 129.30
243 Car Window Pod
MPSET 15
Extension
Rod Set
More Novoflex rods
and compatible accessories on pages 4243
BB-GRIFF Handgrip
NVBB
NVBBS
NVMPS
NVBBG
BasicBall blue . . . . . . . . . 55.00

BasicBall silver . . . . . . . . 55.00
15cm extension rod set. . 24.00
Handgrip for BasicBall . . 40.00
Phone and tablet mounts
Medium (UNIKLEM 42) 7.4Hx3Wx4.4D

cm. Weight 170g. Jaw size 42mm.
NVUK42 35.00
Small (UNIKLEM 26) 5.8Hx3Wx4D cm.
Weight 145g. Jaw size 26mm.
NVUK26 32.00
Manfrotto clamps and arms

Only 110g weight, but with a 4kg payload,
the Nano is ideal for
applications where
compact size is important, such as oncamera use. Uses
a reversible
1/4 and
3/8 screw
connection.
MA386B
29.00
Novoflex Suction Pod
CLAMPS & SUPPORTS
Novoflex Clamp Mounts
A sprung-loaded
clamp for window
or narrow sill.
3/8
attachment screw.
MA243 26.95
Joby GripTight
Joby GripTight XL
For standard size smartphones, with or

without case attached. Width 5472mm.
For large smartphones or phablets with a

width betweeen 6999mm.
A universal clamp which mounts on any

tube from 1355mm. 5/8 hex socket
attachment. Takes 15kg load, weighs
250g. Beware of imitations. Not supplied
with attachment screw. MA035 19.95
MA035C 035 with rachet handle . . 24.50
GripTight Mount
A neat spring-loaded mount with folding
legs, making it easy to fit in a pocket.
Enables the phone to be attached to any
support with a 1/4 screw. JYGTM 11.95
GripTight Mount with Micro Stand 1
Includes a neat folding metal tripod base.
JYGTMS 22.95
GripTight Mount with Gorillapod 2
Partnered with the famous flexi-leg
support, allowing the phone to be fixed to
branches, poles etc. JYGTGS 22.95
GripTight Mount XL
Spring-loaded jaws have rubber inserts to
hold device securely when vertical.
Stainless steel 1/4 socket. Attaches to
keyring. JYGTXLM 17.95
GripTight Mount XL with Micro Stand XL
Lightweight folding base wit machined
aluminium ball. JYGTXLMS 33.95
GripTight Mount XL with Gorillapod
Attach the phone to a handy support, or
use for a selfie or hands-free viewing of a
video. JYGTXLGS 33.95
Super Clamp accessories
Novoflex Phone Mounts
037 Camera Mounting Stud

Reversible stud for the 035
socket, with 1/4 and 3/8
screws. MA037 5.50
Sturdy holders for most standard size

smartphones. The mount allows the device
to be swivelled 360 and tilted 20 and
can be attached to any support with a
1/4 screw.
Universal Smartphone (4575mm width)
NVPHKUNI 31.00
iPhone 5
NVPHKI5 36.00
035 Super Clamp
208HEX Camera Mount

Creates a
60mm diameter
platform, and is
better for heavier
loads. Hex pin prevents
rotation in the 035 socket.
MA208HEX 20.50
237 Flex Arms
Available in 0.3kg
and 0.5kg load
versions. 1/4
screw. From 18.00
More Manfrotto 5/8 spigot fit arms for
lighting applications on page 96
Novoflex iPad/Tablet Mount
Novoflex Phone-Bike Clamp
Offers the same flexibility as

the Phone Mounts above,
to enable a tablet
between 104185mm
depth to be securely
attached to any
support with a
1/4 screw.
NVPHKPAD 37.00
A metal handlebar clamp mount with a

reversible 1/4 and 3/8 screw mount.
NVPHBIKE 16.00
21
Levelling bases
Camera rotators
FLM LB15
FLM LB25
The LB25 is similar to the LB15, but offers

a larger +/-25 range of movement.
Platform diameter 60mm. Top screw is
reversible 1/4 or 3/8. Weight 250g.
Height 60mm. Maximum load capacity,
like the LB15, is around 30kg.
FLLB25 117.00
Novoflex MagicBalance
With typical elegant Novoflex design, the
MagicBalance allows 15 movement in any
direction and is super-smooth in operation. No visible internal parts make it
maintenance free and gives it a low profile
(only 44mm high), which means there is
no quoted load limit. Quick throw side
lever locking. Top platform diameter
60mm. 1/4 and 3/8 base sockets; 1/4
top screw. Weight 270g. NVBAL 125.00
Manfrotto DADO rod support system

The red DADO sphere has 18 3/8
sockets to allow one or
more of the DADO rods (or
anything else with a 3/8
screw) to be attached. So an
arm or bracket can be
extended, or more than one
piece of equipment attached
to a single holding point. The
possibilities are limited only by
how many compatible components you
have, and your imagination. And its
strong too: six DADO rods connected
together will
support 8kg. The
rods are also
shaped at one end
to attach directly to
a 5/8 spigot
socket as found on
the Super Clamp.
22
MS050M4-Q2 for RC2 (200PL plate) heads

MAMS050M4Q2 82.95
MS050M4-Q5 for 501PL sliding plate heads
MAMS050M4Q5 91.00
MS050M4-RC4 for RC4 (410PL plate) heads
MAMS050M4RC4 91.00
Novoflex
Telesack
RC4
18.5cm square brown suede leather bag

for filling with dried beans or polystyrene
pellets. NVTS 18.00
Novoflex quick brackets

Allows a camera to be quickly
switched from horizontal to vertical
position. An adjustable slot on the
camera mounting arm allows the lens
to be correctly positioned so that it
aligns in each plane, even with a
deep body camera. Weight 330g. Two
versions are available, for Arca-pattern
and Novoflex MiniConnect quick releases:
Q-PL Vertikal
Fits Novoflex Q= and Arca-pattern quick
releases. NVQPV 67.00
MC-Vertikal
Has base attachment
pieces for the
Novoflex
MiniConnect quick
release.
Q-PL Slim Vertikal
NVMCV 75.00
Scaled-down version of the Q-PL
weighing 116g, suitable for
compact system digital SLRs like the
Fuji XT-1 shown.NVQPSV 67.00
WWS C13 Single Bean Bag

Has a single compartment for beans or
similar filling (not supplied) made from
proofed polycotton material printed with
Advantage Timber pattern.
Small size 25x19cm. Takes approx 1kg of
filling. WWC13B 18.60
Medium size 30x23cm. Takes approx
1.5kg of filling. WWC13M 19.40
A quadrant
bracket with swift
and smooth 90
movement, clickstopped at each
end. Black
anodised
aluminium is
strong and light
(320g). The
bracket is supplied with a camera plate which can be adjusted for different body heights,
and a quick-release tripod mount. CTPSVK 175.00
Camera quick release kit for PRO-SV CTQRCK 34.95
A large and robust bag which can be filled

with a variety of materials to provide a
secure support for a long lens. Size is
19.8x19.8x11.9cm.
The base has velcro tabs which fit slots
in the Eagle Door Support to secure it in
the correct position.
ECEB 39.00
Eckla Eagle Car Window Support

Precision-engineered in Germany, the Eagle Support is the
brainchild of Dutch wildlife photographer Han Bouwmeester,
and is designed to support a typical load of gimbal head plus
400600mm telephoto lens. It can also be used with the
companion Eagle Beanbag shown on the left.
Cars make an excellent hide for nature photography:
animals and birds have less fear of them when they are
stationary than of a human figure.
Provided your car door has a
handle/armrest the Eagle can be
adjusted to fit. There is a wide
range of adjustment on
the bottom strut to
enable the platform to
be levelled, and a handy
spirit level is built in. The
head connection screw is 3/8
thread.
The clamp can be reversed, to
allow it to be fitted either over the
window glass or over the door frame,
and a rubber insert is provided to ensure
that no marking occurs. Dimensions: platform
20x20cm; folded 24x28x12cm. Weight 1.7kg.
ECE 159.00
Buy the Eagle Car Door Support and

Eagle Bean Bag together for 179 saving 19
Clamp adjusted for door . . . . . . or for window glass
Eckla Eagle CamDisk
WWS C14 Double Bean Bag
Shown with the Eagle Car Door Support
Q2
Custom Brackets Digital PRO-SV Kit
DADO 3 Rod Kit

MAMSY0590A 36.95
DADO 6 Rod Kit
MAMSY0580A 49.95
Eckla Eagle Beanbag
Manfrotto MS050M4 L Bracket

Designed to allow a camera to be quickly
changed from the horizontal to vertical without
moving the tripod head. Arm length is 150mm,
with an adjustable fixing screw which allows
different-sized cameras to be correctly centred.
Built-in anti-twist lock and bubble level.
Available to fit three Manfrotto quick release
patterns. Weight 320400g.
A neat accessory which allows a head to be

levelled without the need to adjust the
tripod legs. It has +/-15 movement in any
direction, and includes a handy spirit
level. The all-metal construction to FLMs
usual high standards makes it suitable for
all typical loads and most high quality
heads. Height 45mm. Platform diameter is
60mm, with 3/8 screw and socket
connection. Weight 220g.
FLLB15 93.50
Beanbags
This design provides a large base for

bigger cameras and lenses and can be
wrapped on each side of a fence or car
window. Proofed polycotton Advantage
printed. The version with liners enables
only one side to be used to save weight. Or
choose one with a strap so you can carry it
over your shoulder. Weight filled 23kg
(using plastic pellets will save weight).
Filling not supplied.
Basic (no liner) WWC14B 25.70
Basic with Strap WWC14S 39.70
With Liners and Strap WWC14SL 51.00
Typical tripods, even if they allow groundlevel operation, can be bulky and also
slow to set up. The CamDisk provides a
solid ground-level support for a long lens.
Another creation for the nature photographer from the Dutch professional, Han
Bouwmeester.
Made from high quality anodised
aluminium, which is easy to transport
Large rotating grip allows the lens
support to be easily attached (3/8"
screw) without a locking key
Upturned edges allow the support to be
slid along the ground without accumulating debris
Stainless steel carabiner hook provided
for easy attachment to rucksack
Supplied with a storage pouch
Diameter: 250mm. Height: 38mm. Weight:
850g.
ECCD 99.00
23
Quick release adaptors
FLM SRB-40
FLM Quick Release
ARCA COMPATIBLE
ARCA COMPATIBLE
If your tripod head lacks a quick release camera platform, we have a wide range of
adaptors from 26 which will convert it. Most have 1/4 and 3/8 sockets in the base and
come supplied with one plate with a standard 1/4 camera screw.
Manfrotto 323
Novoflex Q=
ARCA COMPATIBLE
Q=Mount Mini
Possibly the most comprehensive system

of clamps and plates available. The profile
of all the plates is compatible with the
majority of quick release systems using
the Arca-Swiss pattern.
QUICK RELEASES
Q= Camera Plates
4
Q=Mount
The Novoflex Q=PL1 standard plate (Nos

4 and 5) is 42mm square on the top.
All-metal construction gives super rigidity, and it has a compact 50mm square
footprint, so suits most small to medium
size heads. Camera plate is used on many
other Manfrotto heads, and takes DSLR
and smaller cameras. 1/4 or 3/8 base
socket. MA323 25.90
MA200PL Spare 1/4+3/8 plate . . . 14.50
MA200PLA14 Anti-twist plate 1/4 . . . 18.95
A slimline 85mm x 65mm plate and base

which is used on many larger Manfrotto
heads, suitable for large cameras or lenses
with built-in collar. Has two built-in spirit
levels. 1/4 or 3/8 base socket.
MA394 44.50
MA410PL Spare plate 1/4+3/8 . . . 14.50
FLM SRB-60
Manfrotto MSQ6 TopLock

ARCA COMPATIBLE
Larger version (80x54mm overall) with

built-in spirit level. Weight 100g. 3/8
socket. Not supplied with plate.
FLSRB60 66.00
Gitzo GS3760D
Manfrotto 357 Sliding Plate
Accepts most
Arca-pattern
plates as well
as FLMs own. The plate snaps in place with
a secondary security pin to prevent it
sliding out, and then a short throw of the
side lever locks it fully. Depressing the pin
on the end allows the plate to be removed.
40mm length base
FLQS40 Complete with plate . . . 104.50
FLQP40 Camera plate for above . . 16.50
50mm length base
70mm length base
Helps with heavy lens/camera combinations to improve the point of balance on a

tripod head. The 140mm plate is supplied
with 1/4 and 3/8 fixing screws, and
removeable pin. 1/4 and 3/8 base
sockets. MA357 44.95
MA357PLV Spare plate for above . . . 26.95
Manfrotto 577 Sliding Plate

A more compact version of the 357, using
the RC5 type 501PL plate, and suitable for
smaller video cameras, or photo equipment. Plate length is 90mm.
MA577 47.30
MA501PL Spare plate for 577 . . . . . 17.95
24
Users of Manfrotto heads which have a

quick release plate secured by a hex bolt
to the shaft can now convert the head to
accept most Arca-pattern 38mm wide
quick release plates. The MSQ6 comes with
an MSQ6PL plate which is 70x55mm size
and has a 1/4 screw. The plate can be
inserted from above, rather than slid in
from the end. Once in the jaws of the
base, a secondary safety lock prevents the
plate accidentally slipping out released
by the red button and there are 3 builtin bubble levels. MAMSQ6 69.95
MAMSQ6PL Spare plate for MSQ6 . . . 18.95
n.b. this adaptor is not universal: it fits

only more recent Gitzo heads.
Enables any Gitzo head using a triple bolt
plate connection to be converted to use
the new Arca-type D plates as well as
existing C types (the jaw insert is
removed to enable this). Includes a 70mm
plate and all necessary tools and bolts.
GZS3760D 118.95
Gitzo GS5160CDT
ARCA PLATE ADAPTOR
Converts the C
profile Gitzo quick
releases for use with
standard 40mm Arca
pattern plates. GZS5160CDT 41.70
13
50mm
version
FLM Power Release
n.b. this adaptor is not universal: it fits

only more recent Manfrotto heads.
12
Manfrotto 394
A robust and strong clamp with springloaded safety pin (which will move out of
the way if you are using another makers
plate which doesnt have a slot to locate
with this). 70x32mm; weight 80g. 3/8
socket. Not supplied with plate.
FLSRB40 59.00
Uses a very
small camera
plate
which slides sideways into the base and is
locked in place by about one and a half
turns. Although small, it is very strong.
Base connection is 3/8 socket. Note:
when adapting a head with platform, its
diameter must not exceed 40mm and
50mm respectively to avoid interfering with
the rotation of the locking ring.
45mm diameter base
FLPRS45 45mm base with plate. . . 51.50
FLPRP45 Camera plate for above . . 11.50
55mm diameter base
FLPRS55 55mm base with plate. . . 66.00
FLPRP55 Camera plate for above . . 13.25

14
9
25mm wide version of the Q=Mount,
making it ideal for smaller cameras like
CSC or enthusiast compacts, or where
space is tight. Strength is not much
compromised however, so a typical DSLR
load is no problem, and larger 42mm base
plates can also be used in it. Plate not
included. NVQMM 55.00
10
A neat, lightweight quick release for
smaller Novoflex Q-plates and Arca, Foba
(and compatible) plates, with screw lock.
Weighs only 100g, diameter 60mm, height
16mm. Plate not included. NVQM 66.00
15
11
16
17
2
18
1
Q=Base
Q=Mount X
Allows users of Arca-Swiss plates the

possibility of one-handed instant attachment of equipment.
The initial snap lock allows lateral
adjustment before final secure locking
with an eighth turn of the bottom knurled
ring.
All the Novoflex Q=plates locate with
the central safety pin for added security.
As with everything Novoflex, all movements are smooth and precise. Diameter
78mm; height 22mm; weight 264g. Plate
not included. NVQBASE 107.00
A unique quick release which allows a

Novoflex QPL or Arca-pattern plate to be
clamped in two directions without changing its position. The corner clamp mechanism allows a camera plate to be quickly
removed and reset at 90 to the previous
position.
Can be mounted on any head with a
1/4" screw (or using the supplied male
screw, into a head with a socket).
64mm square; height 12mm; weight 180g.
Plate not included
NVQMX 99.00
Novoflex MiniConnect
camera all the time. Attachment is virtually instantaneous just insert the piece
and it snaps shut securely, with only a
quick pull on the side lever to lock tight.
The 80x60x18mm base size is large
enough to give good support to larger
lenses, and there is a secondary thumb
lock on the long side to prevent accidents.
MiniConnect inc one 1/4 coupling piece.
NVMC 75.00
NVMCP1 1/4 Coupling Piece . . . . 12.50
NVMCP3 3/8 Coupling Piece . . . . 12.50
NVMCPS1 1/4 Anti-twist Piece . . . 12.50
A discreet 25mm diameter camera piece,

which is so small that it can stay on the
Q=Base Plates
NVQPL1 (4) PL1 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . 25.00
NVQPL1-3 (5) PL1-3/8 3/8. . . . . . 25.00
NVQLS50 (new) Slim 50mm 1/4 . . 25.00
NVQPL2 (8) PL2 84mm 1/4+3/8. . 33.00
NVQPL3 (9) PL3 120mm 1/4+3/8. 42.00
NVQPL4 (10) PL4 155mm 1/4+3/8 . 50.00
NVQPLAT1 (14) Anti-twist 50mm . . . 42.00
NVQPLP1 (17) 180mm graduated. . 57.00
NVQPLP2 (18) 235mm graduated. . 57.00
NVQPLV (13) Video plate with pin 25.00
NVQPL6 (18) 6x6 anti-twist . . . . . 50.00
See p22 for Q= Right Angle Bracket (12)
Q=Plate Leveller (11) 155mm long with
inset twin bubble levels. NVQPLL 67.00
Tripod and other

screw adaptors
1 HA5120 Bushing to reduce a 3/8
socket to 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.00
2 MA088L Manfrotto 088LBP does the
same job as above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95
3 HA5121 Allows a small diameter
1/4 socket head to be mounted on a
3/8 screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.95
4 MA120 Manfrotto 120 has 6cm platform better for bigger heads . . . . . 17.95
19
Slim profile Q=Plates
25mm
39mm
Slim profile plates suit compact CSC-style

cameras better, are available in 25mm or
39mm widths, and fit all Novoflex Q bases.
NVQPLS25 (6) 25mm plate 1/4. . . . 25.00
NVQPLS39 (7) 39mm plate 1/4. . . . 25.00
Long Q=Plates
Each plate comes with 2 x 1/4 screws.
NVQPL270 (3) 270mm long . . . . . . . 58.00
NVQPL350 (2) 350mm long . . . . . . . 66.00
NVQPL450 (1) 450mm long . . . . . . . 74.00
4
6
2
1
3
5 HA5134 Hama camera case screw;

also useful to fix items to brackets . 2.75
6 HA5131 Hama 15mm extra long
version, suits Metz brackets etc . . . 2.75
25
In search of the nodal point
Panosaurus v2.0
Many cameras now incorporate the ability

to produce panoramic sweep shots and
then compile them into a single picture.
For many purposes this is good enough,
but better results are obtained by using
specialised software and a purpose-made
support such as we show on these pages.
The creation of US artist and photographer Greg

Rubottom, the Panosaurus uses a combination of stiff PVC
plastic and aluminium to create a robust and lightweight
(900g) product which has all the necessary adjustments to
create single-row, spherical and multi-row panoramic
shots. Version 2.0 is upgraded with machined aluminium
and stainless steel for the upper frame to cameras up to
4.5kg in weight.
Operation
The Panosaurus mounts to any tripod
head with a 1/4 screw. Ball and socket
heads will allow it to be levelled using
the supplied spirit level.
Most SLR and compact
cameras can be fixed to the Panosaurus.
It s also fine with most off-centre sockets, provided these are not
greater than 32mm from the baseplate centre.
The next step is to locate the nodal point of the lens by
sliding the camera forwards or backwards (more info on this in the panel
to the left). Once this is achieved, the position of the camera on the
plate can be noted for the next shoot.
With the camera in the upright position, it is then rotated for
the desired number of exposures. The arm can be swung to enable
mulit-row or spherical panoramas to be taken. The turntable is not
click stopped, but has colour-coded markers for 30, 40, 60
and 90 sequence shooting. GRPANO2 119.95
Comprehensive assembly instructions can be downloaded at
gregwired.com/NewPano2.pdf
Stitching software
Youll notice we dont show any of this on
these pages, and the reason is simple. Its
either free, comes as part of a Photoshop
type program, or can be downloaded
Exposure considerations
Bear in mind that light levels will change
across the area of the shot, and also white
balance. So fix white balance manually, and
ideally the exposure too. For this reason,
keeping the sun behind you avoids too
great a change in the lighting across the
shot.
parallax distortion) when the nodal point is

reached. Nodal point adjustment becomes
less critical as subject distance increases,
but care spent at the taking stage will save
time when the photo is stitched together.
We have several devices to facilitate this
process.
The important nodal point
Planning the picture
You can create a panorama shot with just a

correctly levelled tripod and a panning
head. Stitching programs are able to correct
the edge distortion to a large degree, but
you will certainly need a large overlap to
allow them to achieve a reasonable degree
of success.
However, to achieve a really good
result, two things are important.The first is
to avoid using very wide angle lenses, which
distort at the edges.The second is to rotate
the camera/lens around the optical centre,
or nodal point of the lens.The nodal point
can be different for every lens, and finding
it is something which cannot be done by
calculation, only visually. On wide angle
lenses it is typically between the midpoint
of the lens and the aperture ring. Using the
LCD monitor on a reflex camera, observe
the relationships of foreground and background subjects as the camera is panned
there should be no change (that is to say, no
A few pointers:
If the bracket allows it, shooting with
the camera set vertically will give a
wider vertical field of view.
For best results when stitching, an
overlap of between 1/3 an 1/2 of the
image is desirable the software can
accurately match pixels this way.
The wider the field of the shot, the
more pictures you will need to shoot.
Novoflex VR-System Slim
Custom Brackets Nodal Slide

A precision machined black anodised aluminium
plate with scale markings which will fit any Arcapattern head or quick release to allow the nodal point of a lens to be correctly positioned.
The clamp takes any Arca-type camera plate (not supplied) and ensures that the camera is
exactly perpendicular to the direction of adjustment. CTNS 81.95
Sounds pretty obvious, but how do you calculate how

many shots will be needed?
Manfrotto MH057A5 LONG
Youll need to know the field of view of

your lens. It should be on the manufacturers website. A Sigma 28mm has a 75
horizontal, 48 vertical view. If we use it
vertically, and choose to overlap by 1/3,
this means the effective angle is 32. So,
choosing the nearest increment on a pan
head, which is 30, a 180 shot, for
example will therefore require 6 shots.
Consists of two 454 worm-drive geared platforms

mounted on a 300N Panoramic Adaptor. The 300N has
a graduated scale and allows the photographer to set
the rotation points to 90 60, 45, 36, 30, 24,
20, 15, 10 and 5 (respectively 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 15,
18, 24, 36 or 72 photos for one 360 picture). The top
platform has an L bracket adaptor using Manfrottos
hexagonal quick release plates into a 625 base which
incorporates a spirit level. Maximum nodal point
adjustment is 120mm. 1/4 and 3/8 base and
camera mounting. Weight 2kg.
MA057A5L 342.00
Manfrotto MH057A5
Specification is identical to the LONG version, except that the
lateral 454 geared platform is replaced by a shorter sliding
plate. This will suit most digital SLRs but not very large
cameras. Weight 1.6kg. MA057A5 299.00
26
Novoflex VR-System Pro II
Designed around smaller body cameras,

this all-metal bracket folds into a 21.5 x 8
x 7.5 cm rectangle, so will fit easily into a
bag, and weighs only 750g. It will create
multi-row flat or spherical projection, or
single row cylinder projected panoramas.
The panning base has smooth ball-bearing
travel, and click-stop indents at 16, 30,
36 and 48 increments. There is a bubble
level in the base securing screw, and the
camera platform is Arca-compatible.
NVVRSLIM 389.00
Panoramic
platform adaptors
A bracket designed for use with full-frame

fisheye lenses with a diagonal image angle
of 180, the VR-Slant mounts the camera
horizontally at an angle of 60, and it can
also be tilted vertically at up to 15. With
the camera set like this, complete spherical panoramas can be made with only 3 or
4 overlapping pictures. Using a monopod
with a levelling aid, interior panoramas
(perhaps in a restricted area) can be
created in a few seconds. Base sockets
3/8 and 1/4. Weight 780g. NVVRSL
199.00
List of suitable lenses which can be used
with the bracket, and a demonstration
video can be seen at www.novoflex.com
FLM P-1
This superbly-engineered system will

create multi-row spherical stitched
pictures, as used in web presentations
of interior spaces, as well as photographic 360 panoramas.
In particular, the base
component which provides the lateral
rotation does away with external pins
for setting the desired rotation points.
Instead a single ball bearing inside the
base is positioned by pulling and rotating
the blue knob you see in the picture, thus
directing it to pre-set tracks milled
into the base. This then sets it
into one of 8 angle presets:
36 click stops in 10 steps
Plus free 360 rotation
The base also has two inset spirit levels. A
third 2-bubble level, which can be fixed in
the camera accessory shoe, is also
supplied.
Each adjustment plate has mm increment markings; the L-bracket
150280mm; the top plate 0170mm.
Novoflex VR-System 6/8

Similar to the VR-Pro II,
but designed for
fisheye lenses. It
uses a small base
with 6 or 8 click
stops giving 45 or 60
steps. This ensures also that it will
not intrude into the
view of a 180 lens.
NVVRPRO68 449.00
NVVRPRO2 599.00
Novoflex Panorama 48
Novoflex Panorama=Q Pro

The base of the VR-System Pro above,
offering 8 angle presets, adjustable by
means of a knob, and avoiding the fuss of
external pins. The top fixing is a Q-pattern
clamp mount, compatible with Arca, Graf,
Kirk and many similar plates. Base fixing
3/8 and 1/4. NVPQP 329.00
Novoflex Panorama II
Super-smooth rotation. Spirit level,

spring-loaded anti-twist pin and 360
markings. Base and top connection 3/8
or 1/4. 60mm top diameter. Weight
140g. NVPP 89.00
PANORAMIC
Novoflex VR-Slant
A panorama plate with a high load

capacity. Smooth operation is ensured by
the use of a ball track. Base connection
3/8. Top connection screw is reversible
1/4 or 3/8. Height 40mm. Top diameter
58mm, bottom diameter 63mm. Weight
212g. FLP48 79.00
Version of the Panorama II on the left with

built-in click stops at 16, 30, 36 and
48 increments and 360 scale with 5
subdivisions. Base connection 3/8 or
1/4. Built-in spirit level. Weight 160g
NVP48 155.00
Also available as the Panorama=Q 48 with
Q-pattern clamp mount, compatible with
Arca, Graf, Kirk and many similar plates.
Weight 240g. NVPQ48 182.00
27
Manfrotto
Offroad
All models feature a padded rubberised

grip, 45 rapid action leg locks, dual 1/4
or 3/8 camera fixing screw, large 60mm
head platform and wrist strap, in black
anodised aluminium.
680B
Compact 4-section version of the above.
Height 154cm, closed 51cm, weight 0.83kg.
MA680B 44.50
681B
Very robust 3-section design with extended
grip, for loads up to 12kg. Height 161cm,
closed 67cm, weight 0.78kg.
MA681B 44.50
679
680
All the features of the

681, but with the addition
of three retractable legs
a boon if you need to
change lenses a lot. The
legs fold and slide into
the bottom tube. Height
172cm, closed 74cm,
weight 1.88kg.
MA682B 75.00
usually 65.95
while stocks last
MA679BK
45
Carbon fibre CX series
A popular alternative to a ball

head. Tilt tops
move in one plane
only, so are easier to
control just rotate the camera by 90 to
change from front to back to side to side
adjustment. 3/8 base socket.
234RC With
200PL-14 quick
release plate.
MA234RC 26.00
234 Non-quick
release version.
MA234 18.00
28
GM2541
(1) Ideal for most purposes. Carbon fibre
4-section, for loads up to 12kg, height
160cm, closed 53cm, weight 0.5kg.
GZM2541 194.95
GM2561T
(not shown) Very tall carbon fibre 5section, for loads up to 18kg, height
GZM3551 239.95
GM5541
Exped
(3) Carbon fibre 4-section, for loads up to

25kg, height 162cm, closed 55cm, weight
0.86kg. GZM5541 262.50
678 folding tripod base
GM5561T
Fits 479, 479-4, 434, 679, 680 and 681 to

provide a retractable tripod base. No
reduction in load capacity. MA678 49.00
(4) Super-compact 6-section, for loads up

to 25kg, height 155.5cm, closed 41.5cm,
weight 0.7kg. GZM5561T 284.95
The following replace the supplied foot, and

screw into the end of the monopod.
Rubber/Spiked Foot
679B/680B:
MA204SP1 15.95
681B: MA250SP1 14.95
694CX: MA160SP1 15.95
695CX: MA116SP1 15.95
694CX (left)
695CX (right)
4-sections. Height
165cm, closed
53cm, weight
0.58kg.
MA694CX 119.00
5-sections. Height
160cm, closed 46cm,
weight 0.59kg.
MA695CX 129.00
361 Shoulder
Brace
Suction Cup with

retractable spike.
679B/680B:
MA204SC1 22.95
681B: MA250SC1 22.95
694CX: MA160SC1 22.95
695CX: MA116SC1 25.95
Manfrotto
video monopods
GM3551
Lightweight
pro monopods
with the option
of 4 or 5 leg
sections. Metal
parts like lock
levers are
magnesium.
Each will take a
load of 5kg.
Spiked Feet/Suction Cups

Manfrotto tilt
tops
Gitzo monopods are made to the same

high standards as their tripods. Legs have
twist locks, and the head attachment
screw is 1/4 and 3/8 reversible, with a
top platform diameter of 58mm. Nonrotating leg sections allow quick and easy
extension. A handy belt clip is incorporated in the wrist strap.
(2) Compact and light carbon fibre

Traveller 6-section, for loads up to 4.5kg,
height 143cm, closed 36cm, weight
0.33kg. GZM2561T 194.95
681
679B with 234RC Tilt Top

682B
Self-standing
Snappily-titled 3-section
walking pole made for
Novoflex by the top German
manufacturer Leki. The
ergonomically-shaped
handgrip unscrews to
reveal a 1/4 screw. An
included 35mm platform
can be attached to this to
give better support to a
larger ball head. Legs have
cm markings to aid quick
adjustment to your height.
The rubber foot can be
removed to reveal a spike
and there is a built-in
snow/mud shoe.
NVQLW2 52.00
The fastest operating

monopod in the world!
Just pull the leg down to
open and lock at any position, and press the release
at the top to close again.
A rubber pedal at the base
allows you to do this onehanded. The upside down
construction helps stop
mud and moisture from
the ground entering the
monopod, and theres a
padded grip.
Takes loads up to 8kg,
height 170cm, closed
74.5cm, weight 0.8kg.
MA685B 109.95
3-section, for loads up to 10kg, height

MA679B 39.95
MONOPODS
Gitzo
QLEG Walk II
Neotec 685B
679B
Novoflex
Supplied with adaptor to fit any make of

monopod for additional stability.
Adjustable length and pivoting
attachment. MA361 23.95
Manufactured in collaboration with Fizan,

Italys top outdoor manufacturer, this pole
differs from our other offerings in that it is
a pair and not just a single unit, so its
ideal for anybody preferring two poles.
One pole is a standard type with
comfortable handgrip and wrist strap; the
other has an integrated camera mount
with protective cap. The 1/4 screw is
easily rotated with a knurled wheel to
make attaching and detaching the camera
quick and easy.
3-section legs with internal locks
reduce the weight of the poles to just
400g for the pair, but despite this very low
weight they will support 2.5kg. Available
in three colours.
PRICE FOR TWO POLES 79.00
MAMMOR Red
MAMMOG Green
MAMMOB Blue
Spiked feet
G1220.129B
Short spike with rubber foot
cover.
GZ1220129B 14.80
G1220.129LB
Long spike
GZ1220129LB 25.80
FLM
Viewfinder
Trekking Pole
This 3-section
lightweight alloy pole
has internal twist locks,
and at the top theres a
polished beechwood
knob covering a 1/4
camera screw. Foam
hand grip, carbide tip
with rubber foot cover,
mud/snow shoe and
handstrap complete the
spec. 145cm extended,
67cm closed. Weight
350g.
LYVF 19.95
Carbon-fibre 5-section monopods, made in Germany. Head

connection is via a reversible 1/4 or 3/8 screw.
CM30-M5
30mm diameter top tube. The built-in
spiked foot is revealed by unscrewing the
rubber foot. Maximum load 16kg. Height
150cm. closed 45cm. Top platform dia
50mm. FLCM30M5 153.50
A taller 180cm version is also available
CM30-M5 foot
CM34-M5
34mm diameter top tube. Spiked foot is
revealed with a quick twist of the rubber
foot, and cant fall off. Max load 20kg.
Height 150cm, closed 45cm. Top platform diameter 70mm.
FLCM34M5 208.50
CM34-M5 foot
560B-1
MVM500A
Manfrotto 560B-1 Fluid Base

Has a retractable tripod base which incorporates a fluid damping cartridge to give
smooth camera movements. The tilting
top has a 200PL quick release plate, and
the 4 leg sections have rapid action leg
locks. Height 166cm, closed 65.5cm, max
load 2kg, weight 0.9kg.
MA560B 95.00
Manfrotto MVM500A Fluid

Head and Base
A fully-featured monopod with extra
working height and damped folding tripod
base. The MV500AH fluid damped video
head has a very smooth action and an
adjustable pan bar to give excellent
camera control. The camera plate can be
attached easily from above, rather than
having to be slid in from one end, with no
secondary safety lock required. Theres a
foam grip and handstrap. Height 200.5cm,
closed 77cm, max load 5kg, weight 2.1kg.
MAMVM500A 209.00
29
Benbo
1
The BENt BOlt concept dates back to a

First World War gun carriage design.
Simple and robust, it allows each leg to
be placed at virtually any angle. The full
size tripods have just two leg sections,
which makes them very rigid, and the
bottom section is also waterproof, so
they can be stood in a stream without ill
effect. Feet have shaped hard rubber
spikes (except Compact model).
Mk1 1
Centre column has a swivelling platform to

help camera positioning near to the
ground. The other end has a weight hook.
Height 150cm, closed 84cm. Weight 2kg.
Kit including Compact Ball Head and Bag
BBT3K 149.95
BBT3S Legs only 103.50
Legs also available with plain platform on
request.
The original heavy-duty Benbo with 35mm

diameter tubing. Centre column has 1/4
screw at one end; 3/8 at the other.
Height 157cm, closed 84cm. Weight 3.4kg
BB1 145.00
Trekker Centre Column

Tilt Bracket
Allows independent movement without the need
to unlock the legs.
Requires the centre
bolt to be dismantled and reassembled (full instructions supplied).
BBCTB 49.95
30
The combination of Velbons space-saving Trunnion

Shaft system and reverse-folding 6-section legs
enables the Ultrek to extend to an amazing 5.3x its
folded length. So it has a normal working height, but
packs into virtually any bag. Its supplied with the
new QHD-53D ball head which has a
DIN-pattern quick release plate (a
first for Velbon). Unlocking or
locking of the legs is achieved with a single twist
of the bottom leg section, and the legs can be
angled for low-level operation. Includes a
carrying case. Height 156.5cm; closed
29.5cm. Max load 2kg*. Weight 1.17kg.
VEUT43 109.00
STANDARD WORKING HEIGHT
UNDER 30CM WHEN FOLDED!
VEQB62 Spare plate for QHD-53D. 14.00
The REXi is the professional

grade Ultra tripod, with
30mm diameter top tube,
and really rigid 5-section
legs. Operation is like
the other Ultra tripods
a splittable centre column allows low level operation at 9.5cm, with
quick release centre column lock. Supplied without head, the attachment screw is 3/8 so it will take a wide variety of pro heads.
Height 153cm; closed 36cm. Max load 4kg*. Weight 1.3kg.
VEURL 99.00
CB38/CB38FT
FLM
A really compact and lightweight head for

the load capacity. Concentric friction and
locking, and panoramic base lock knobs.
3/8 tripod connection. Reversible 1/4
and 3/8 camera screw. Weight 460g.
38mm diameter ball. Load capacity around
25kg. Base diameter 55mm.
Standard version with removeable
platform
FLCB38F CB38F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175.00
FLCB38FT CB38FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208.00
Recommended quick releases
55mm Power Release or 40mm Q/Release
Carbon fibre tripods

Hand-assembled in the Black Forest area
of Germany, FLMs new series of tripods
all feature:
Reverse-folding legs to reduce folded
length
3 leg angles which can be quickly set
with the patented quick set system
Hook on the centre column allows extra
weight to be suspended if required
Column detaches from the platform to

allow ground-level operation
CP30-M4S
CB48/CB48FT
An ideal size for the majority of photographers looking for a large and strong ball
head. Concentric friction and locking, and
panoramic base locking knobs. 3/8 tripod
connection. Reversible 1/4 and 3/8
camera screw. Weight 615g. 48mm diameter ball. Load capacity around 35kg. Base
diameter 65mm.
platform
FLCB48F CB48F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226.00
FLCB48FT CB48FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259.50
40mm, 50mm or 70mm Quick Releases
CP26-M4S
Velbons quoted loads are very conservative in comparison to other brands
A light and strong 4-section tripod using

26mm diameter top tubes, which will cope
with most DSLR type loads. Rubber feet
screw off to reveal spikes. Height
extended 155cm, closed 47cm. Weight
1.2kg. Max load 10kg. Top platform 50mm
FLCP26M4S 395.00
Mk2 2
Very tall, and also good for working in
deep water, with the same tubing as the
Mk 1. Height 256cm, closed 114cm.
Weight 3.75kg
BB2 171.00
Carrying bags
BBTBAG
BB1BAG
BB2BAG
Tilt Function This small knob at the top of the FT model housing
controls a unique FLM feature. A quick twist locks the ball into one
plane of movement, at the angle you have selected.
Ultra MAXi Mini-D
Trekker Mk3 3
All the features of the Trekker Mk3 but

with a shorter centre column and short
fixed length legs. Height 71cm, closed
55cm. Weight 1.5kg. BBMT 75.00
FT heads: tilt feature
Ultrek UT-43D II
Ultra REXi L
Mini Trekker 4
Large ball heads
Velbon
Trekker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.00
Mk1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.00
Mk2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.00
Compact Quick Release

Adapts any head with a
1/4 screw to the
Benbo pattern quick
release. Includes a
bubble level.
BBQRC 28.00
BBQRPL Quick Release Plate . . . . . 11.95
EX-Macro
A very compact a lightweight tripod for
tabletop or macro work with a 3-way pan
and tilt head with quick release plate.
Legs can be set at two angles and are
given extra strength in either position by
telescopic braces. The head has a quick
release plate, and a carrying case is
included. Height 56.3cm, closed 28.1cm.
Max load 1.5kg*. Weight 580g.
VEEXMAC 27.95
A really good quality mini

tripod, the Mini-D has 5-section
legs and a really short closed
length, but is also surprisingly tall for a
tripod of its type, and includes a QHD-43D
quick release ball head. Legs can also be
angled in 3 positions to give a low working
height of 15.5cm. Pouch case included.
Height 49.6cm; closed 20cm. Max load
2.5kg*. Weight 670g.
VEUMM 69.95
VEQB62
Spare plate for QHD-43D. 14.00
Small ball heads

CB18
Unique at this price,
the CB18 has a lock for
both the ball and the
revolving base. Max
load about 10kg. 1/4
tripod connection.
1/4 camera connection. Weight 85g. Base
diameter 30mm. FLCB18 25.00
4-section tripod with heavier-duty 30mm

diameter top tube, taking 15kg loads but
weighing just 1.5kg. Waterproof built-in
feet convert from rubber to spike with a
quick twist. Height extended 153cm,
closed 47cm. Weight 1.5kg. Max load
15kg. Top platform 70mm.
FLCP30M4S 499.95
CB58/CB58FT
The largest FLM head has a hollow ball to
save weight. Concentric friction and
locking, and panoramic base locking
knobs. 3/8 tripod connection. Reversible
1/4 and 3/8 camera screw. Weight
858g. 58mm diameter ball. Load capacity
around 55kg. Base diameter 77mm.
platform
FLCB58F CB58F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253.50
FLCB58FT CB58FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290.00
50mm or 70mm Quick Releases
CB24E
Although
small, the
CB24E has a
big weight
capacity.
Locking is with
a large and
precise knob.
Max load about
15kg. 3/8 tripod connection. 1/4
camera connection. Weight 140g. Base
diameter 35mm. FLCB24 46.00
FLM Quick Releases

FLM offer three different styles of quick release which can be
attached instead of the plain platform. See page 24 for info.
31
MT Series Features
Manfrotto
MT190 Series
Aluminium legs
Manfrotto describe the MT190 as the new
benchmark, and with its extra working
height and increased load capacity
compared to the previous version, could
well have the ideal combination of
strength and portability for most DLSR
photographers.
MT 190 Kits
including
496RC2
ball head
MT190XPRO4
4-section legs. Height extended 160cm,
closed 49cm. Weight 2.1kg. Max load 7kg.
MAMT190XPRO4 156.95
New compact
horizontal
column mechanism is released
with one finger
and does not
require the
column to be
replaced.
Rigidity and stability, for loads up to 9kg.
Aluminium legs
With a 6kg maximum load, the 496RC2 is
an ideal companion for the MT190 tripod.
It has a camera quick release using the
compact 200PL type plate.
MT190XPRO3 with 496RC2
MAMK190XPRO3 179.95
MT190XPRO4 with 496RC2
MAMK190XPRO4 209.00
Bubble level can be
placed in any position
around the platform
MT055XPRO3
MAMT055XPRO3 159.95
MT055XPRO3 Kit with

MHXPRO-3W Pan & Tilt Head
(shown right) This innovative new head
has folding and retracting handles to
minimise bulk when carrying the tripod.
MAMK055XP33W 229.00
492 Micro Ball
496RC2 Compact Ball
The smallest
Manfrotto ball head
ideal for clamps,
table tripods etc.
Height 6cm, weight
140g, max load 2kg.
3/8 base socket.
MA492 31.00
The most popular Manfrotto ball head,

suitable for most
SLR loads.
Has a quick
release which
includes a
200PL camera plate.
The slot is doublesided, which makes
adjusting the
head easier,
and it has a
revolving
base and friction
lock. Height 10cm, weight 420g, max load
6kg. 3/8 base socket. MA496RC2 56.00
494RC2 Mini Ball
Winner of the reddot design

award in 2014, this innovative
travel tripod has reverse-folding
aluminium legs with a unique
folding mechanism which allows
the legs to fold perfectly around the
head and quick release plate attachment.
Switches at the top of each leg allow
two leg angles to be set
Ball and socket head uses Manfrottos
standard 200PL plate design
4-section legs have quick-throw locks
Supplied with a stylish padded case
Height extended 144cm, closed 40cm.
Weight 1.4kg. Max load 4kg.
MABFRA4BH 119.00
MT055 Series
MT190XPRO3
closed 59cm. Weight 2kg. Max load 7kg.
MAMT190XPRO3 144.95
Covered by a
rubber cap is the
EasyLink attachment point a
3/8 socket able
to take a wide
variety of
Manfrotto or
other compatible
accessories. Add
lights, microphones, reflectors or flags to
assist in whatever type of shot
you are creating.
Manfrotto ball and socket heads
Quick Power leg

locks can be
opened and closed
with one hand,
and because they
create more force
from the same
effort by the user,
are stronger.
The quick release version of the 494 with

the popular 200PL pattern
quick release.
Good choice
with a small
travel tripod
where light
weight is paramount.
Height 8.5cm, weight
320g, max load
4kg. 3/8 base
socket.
MA494RC2 45.50
Plain platform versions

of the 494, 496 and 498
are also available:
MA494
MA496
MA498
494 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.50
496. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.50
498 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72.00
MH054M0-Q6 Magnesium
The MH054 is very compact and strong,

with smooth movements. The sliding red
switch on the side engages a stop which
enables the platform to be shifted at
precisely 90 to the horizontal (disengaged, the angle is 103). The Top Lock
quick release suits larger equipment and is
Arca-Swiss compatible. Height 11.7cm,
weight 600g, max load 10kg.
MA054Q6 159.95
The mid-size MH055 heads have a 12kg

load capacity. Features, including the
ratcheted controls which allow convenient
repositioning are the same as the other
types. A new slimline Q2 quick release
platform takes 200PL plates. Height
13.1cm, weight 920g, max load 12kg.
MA055Q2 139.95
Also available as plain head version.
Stylish carrying bag

included with befree
MH054M0-Q2 200PL plate

Height 11.7cm, weight 600g, max load
10kg. MA054Q2 109.95

Height 13.5cm, weight 1kg, max load
12kg. MA055Q5 149.95

MABFRC4BH 259.00

Height 11.9cm, weight 700g, max load
10kg. MA054Q5 117.95
MH055M0-Q6 Top Lock plate

Height 13.5cm, weight 1kg, max load
12kg. MA055Q6 169.95
498RC2 Midi Ball
A midsize
head
with a
small enough
base
(60mm) to
allow it also
to be used on a monopod. Has a separate
lock for the revolving base, which like the
main locking knob can be repositioned,
and a friction lock. A 200PL quick release
plate is included. Height 10.8cm weight
670g, max load 8kg. MA498RC2 77.50
498RC4 uses the 410PL plate. Twin builtin spirit levels. Height 11.5cm, weight
800g. MA498RC4 84.95
befree Carbon
Carbon fibre legs

All MT tripods have
4-position leg
settings
MT055CXPRO3
closed 61cm. Weight 2kg. Max load 9kg.
MAMT055CXPRO3 309.95
MT055CXPRO4
Carbon fibre legs

MT190CXPRO3
MT190CXPRO4
closed 52.5cm. Weight 1.6kg. Max load
7kg. MAMT190CXPRO4 279.95
32
MT190CXPRO4
FREE Manfrotto 294C4 carbon fibre monopod

with every MT190CX or MT055CX tripod
Worth 74.95. Offer runs until January 31st 2015 or until stock exhausted.
MH057 heads are the largest in the

magnesium series, with a carrying capacity of 15kg, but still weighing under
1.5kg. An innovative portrait angle selector enables the platform to be shifted at
precisely 90 to the horizontal. The revolving base has degree markings and a separate lock. The Top Lock quick release
suits larger equipment and is Arca-Swiss
compatible. Height 15cm, weight 1.3kg,
max load 15kg. MA057Q6 194.95
Also available as a plain head version and
with other quick release plates.
Hydrostat ball and socket heads overleaf
33
468MGQ6 Hydrostatic
Manfrotto
pan and tilt heads
X-PRO 3-Way
Quick release plates
804RC2
200PL
For 460MG and
all RC2 & Q2
suffix heads. New
version with 1/4
and 3/8 screws.
MA200PL
14.50
Uses Manfrottos Adapto polymer which is 50% lighter

than aluminium with comparable strength, and allows
a modern shape to be achieved. 3-way action, with
large ergonomic handles. 200PL type quick
release plate. Height 11.6cm, weight 790g. 3/8
base socket. MA804RC2 55.00
808RC4
391RC2 Junior
All-metal 3-way head suitable for both
photo and video use. Height 9.5cm,
weight 570g. Max load 5kg. 3/8 base
socket. 200PL plate. MA391RC2 47.50
Utilises a revolutionary hydraulic system
to lock the ball which gives a huge load
capacity, short locking action and,
coupled with a Teflon-coated ball, supersmooth action with no creep at the point
of locking.
Weight is kept low by the magnesium
housing, and there are two side slots to
allow +90/-90 movement, a graduated
and independently-lockable panoramic
base, and a friction control conveniently
situated at the end of the large rubberised
lock knob.
The Top Lock quick release uses a
70mm long Arca-compatible plate, and
has 3 built-in spirit levels. 3/8 base
socket. Height 13cm, weight 800g, max
load 16kg. MA468MGQ6 229.00
468MG also available with other pattern
quick releases, or with a plain platform:
Suitable for all but the heaviest of cameras. Another

innovative design from Manfrotto, the 808RC4 incorporates two balance springs in both the forward/backward and
side-to-side movements. This improves handling with
heavier loads in particular long lenses. Both
springs can be bypassed if normal handling is
required. Height 15.6cm, weight 1.42kg. Max
load 8kg. The quick release plate is the
410PL type. 3/8 base socket.
MA808RC4 99.95
410 Junior Geared

Given the features that this head offers, its
extremely compact, and offers superb movement control via geared operation in all three
planes pan, tilt and side to side. Gears can be
temporarily disengaged for rough positioning.
Uses 410PL plate. Height 13cm, weight 1.22kg.
Max load 5kg. 3/8 base socket.
MA410 139.00
MH293D3-Q2 Foldable
A compact lightweight Adapto-bodied 3way head which has a side handle which
folds parallel to the main tilt handle,
making it easy to store and carry. There
are 3 built-in bubble levels, and it has a
200PL type quick release plate. Height
9cm, weight 570g, max load 4kg.
MA293D3Q2 49.95
Grip Action ball heads
405 Pro Geared

With large easy-grip knobs and unique
rapid disengagement of the gearing, the
405 allows swift rough positioning of the
camera, and is ideal for working quickly
but needing the precision of a geared
head. Looks fantastic too! Uses the 410PL
quick release plate. Height 16cm, weight
1.6kg, max load 7.5kg. 3/8 base socket.
MA405 329.00
X-PRO Geared
324RC2
This new design has improved ergonomics
and uses Manfrottos proprietary Adapto
material to result in a very low 430g
weight. Has an adjustable friction control
to adjust the movement for different
loads. Built-in bubble level. Quick release
with 200PL plate. Height 10.1cm, weight
430g, max load 3.5kg. 3/8 base socket.
MA324RC2 99.00
34
327RC2
A professional version with a
magnesium shell and 5.5kg load capacity.
The handle, with non-slip rubber grip, is
slightly longer than that of the 324RC2.
Built-in bubble level . Quick release with
200PL plate. Height 10.1cm, weight 620g,
max load 5.5kg. 3/8 base socket.
MA327RC2 139.00
Manfrottos latest take on

this design has innovative retracting
and folding
levers to
pack the
head
down to a
13x13.5x13.5cm
space. So it will fit in a smaller bag
and the levers wont snag on things so
much. Other features include friction
controls on forwards and sideways tilt, a
panoramic base, 3 bubble levels and
200PL pattern quick release plate. Height
13cm, weight 1kg, max load 8kg. MAMHXPRO3W 114.50
AVAILABLE EARLY NOVEMBER

A new head aimed at the more advanced CSC user,
although with a 4kg payload it will also take a
lighter DSLR with small to medium size lens. The
body is made from Manfrottos Adapto polymer,
which offers strength with light weight, and
the styling complements the latest MT190
and 055 series
tripods. Quick
adjustment of the
platform position is
made by depressing the relevant lever; releasing it engages
the gearing for fine adjustment. The quick release plate is
the popular 200PL style. Height 13cm, weight 750g, max
load 4kg. 3/8 base socket. MAMHXPRO3WG 149.00
MH055M8-Q5
Dual Purpose
A clever design which will
appeal to all photographers
who would ideally like both 2-way
for video or scoping and 3-way operation
for stills photography. A quick lever movement is all it takes to achieve this; fluid
cartridges and friction control allow
optimum settings for all requirements.
Lightweight magnesium construction. The
pan bar can be set for right or left hand
operation. Adjustable counterbalance.
Supplied with 501PL plate. Height
13.5cm, weight 1.3kg, max load 7kg.
MA055Q5 214.95
Manfrotto video heads are overleaf
200PLARCH-14
Anti-twist
version of the
200PL for SLR
cameras.
MA200PLA14
18.95
MA200PLA38
3/8 version
18.95
200USS
Universal antitwist plate for all
makes of spotting scope.
MA200USS
52.90
410PL
Large flat plate for
405, 410, and all
RC4 suffix heads,
with 1/4 and
3/8 attachments.
MA410PL 14.50
501PL
90mm
sliding plate for
all RC5 suffix, 501,
502 and 503 heads with
1/4 and 3/8 screws.
MA501PL 17.95
500PLONG
Sliding plate for MVH500A/AH heads with
1/4 and 3/8 screws.
MA500PLONG
24.95
Manfrotto and other tripod accessories

BAG70N
BAG80N
BAG80PN
Carrying bags
Made from durable ballistic nylon with a
tapered end to accommodate most types
of tripod head. They can be fully unzipped,
or the padded end opened quiver style to
allow the tripod to be extracted. Padded
bags have grab handles provided as well
as a shoulder strap.
MABAG70 unpadded 70cm . . . . . . . . 23.50
MABAG80 unpadded 80cm . . . . . . . . 31.50
MAPBAG80 padded 80cm . . . . . . . . . 59.50
MAPBAG90 padded 90cm . . . . . . . . . 62.95
MAPBAG100 padded 100cm . . . . . . . 71.00
MAPBAG120 padded 120cm . . . . . . . 78.50
Stainless steel
spike, supplied
with fixing tool.
Sets of 3.
For 190CXPRO4
MA116SPK3 35.00
For 190XB, 190XDB, 190XPROB, 190CX3,
190CXPRO3, 055CXPRO4
MA160SPK3 32.40
For 055XB, 055XDB, 055XPROB, 055CX3,
055CXPRO3
MA204SPK3 35.00
230 Snow Shoes

Attach to tripods or monopods to
provide stability in snow, mud or
soft ground. 138mm
diameter.
MA230 20.50
166 Apron Support
MSTRAP-1
Hook fixes to the tripopd
spider the top bit where
the legs attach and the
loop goes around the legs.
MAMSTRAP1 21.00
Designed to create a carrying handle

rather than a shoulder strap.
MAMSTRAP2 17.00
Op/tech Tripod Strap
MSQ6PL
70mm long
plate for the Manfrotto
Q6 Top Lock system, also compatible with
most other Arca-Swiss pattern releases.
MAMSQ6PL 18.95
Spiked feet
Loops around each end and allows the

tripod to hang vertically or horizontally.
Large neoprene pad reduces the apparent
weight. Quick disconnects. OPTS 19.95
Three compartments help organise your

odds and ends (or stones in high winds!).
Fits most tripods not just Manfrotto
models. MA166 27.50
Op/tech Tripod Strap with

Swivel
Same as the standard

strap, but with a loop
at one end and a
swivel clip at the
other to connect to a
suitable eye. OPTSS 19.95
35
Video supports
Benro A2573F with S4 head

A high quality leg set with a magnesium
head with separate pan and tilt drag and
lock adjustment. The centre column can be
tilted to level the top platform, which has
a built-in bubble level. Anti-rotation legs
can be set at 3 angles, and are equipped
with rubber feet or stainless steel spikes.
The S4 head has a sliding long plate
(compatible with the Manfrotto 501PL)
with safety catch and balance range of
50mm, and the pan bar handle can be set
for left or right hand operation. Supplied
with case and strap. Height 177cm, closed
79cm. Weight 2.63kg. Max load 4kg.
BRA2573FS4 189.00
Manfrotto 546B Pro Midi

A 2-stage, extremely rigid and stable tripod
able to carry loads up to 20kg. The 546B has a
die cast aluminium crown with a built-in
75mm bowl. Telescopic mid-level spreader
helps set leg angles accurately ( the tripod
is also available as the 546GB with ground
level spreaders). Spiked feet with flat
rubber overshoes are provided for solid
support on both uneven terrain and
smooth floors and the tripod can be
used with various dollies. Height
154cm, closed 69cm. Weight 3.5kg.
Max load 20kg. MA546B 309.00
535AQ top
Manfrotto 546B Kits

Information about the heads is on
the right
Complete with MVH502A head
and padded carrying case
Weight 5.5kg. Max load 7kg
MA502A546BK 439.00
Complete with MVH504HD
Weight 6.3kg. Max load
12kg
Manfrotto video monopods are on p29
MA505HD546BK 553.00
36
Manfrotto 755XB MDeVe with

MVH500AH head
Manfrotto video heads
The MDeVe tripod design aims to bridge between

photo and video. Instead of a bowl mount for the
head, it has a flat platform, and levelling is done
by means of the centre column, which locks with a
quick turn of the end grip. So if you shoot still
landscapes as well as video, this could be the ideal
tripod. The 3-section legs can also be set at 4
different angles, making low-level shooting possible. Its paired with the MVH500AH lightweight
fluid head, which is designed for cameras up to
5kg, although for counterbalanced operation the
limit is 2.4kg (more details on the right). The kit
comes with padded carrying case. Height 154cm,
MA500AH755XBK 309.00
755XB Legs only
MA755XB 189.00
700RC2 Mini
Syrp
Genie
Lightweight 2-way head with fluid

cartridge damping equally suited
to scope as well as DV cameras.
Uses 200PL quick release plates.
Height 9.5cm, weight 520g, max
load 2.5kg. MA700RC2 63.50
An integrated panning
and tracking control
device which can be
used in a variety of
ways with many existing filming products on
DIY devices. It requires
no external power
source, using a built-in
Li-ion battery which
takes 3 hrs to recharge
and provides around 7 hours runtime.
Attaches to any tripod, rack, ball head
or camera. 3/8" base socket with
adaptor and 1/4" camera
Two bases, one for rotation and one
housing the cable controller, can be
quickly exchanged to change the mode
of operation
Movement can be continuous or incremental. All settings are easily input via
the 4-way buttons and displayed on a
large clear LCD panel
Max panning speed: 360 in 5 secs.
MVH500AH
Ideal for lighter weight video
cameras, HDV SLR or scopes,
the MVH500AH features a quick
side-mounting release system,
3/8 side socket to mount lights,
arms etc, and smooth fluid cartridge with fixed drag. The pan bar
can be set either side. Supplied with a 500PLONG sliding quick
release plate with 1/4 and 3/8 screws and video locking pin. Max
counterbalanced load 2.4kg, will support up to 5kg. Height 9.5cm,
weight 930g. MAMVH500AH 104.95
MVH500A
75mm bowl mount version. MAMVH500A 119.95
Manfrotto 535AQ with MVH502AH head

A lightweight professional-grade single leg kit with a 75mm
bowl mounting. The aluminium 4-section legs are very rigid,
will support up to 20kg but provide a compact folded length.
Legs can be set at 3 angles. The MVH502AH head (details on
the right) was designed around HDSLR outfits, and has a flat
base so can be used with other supports you may have.
However, also supplied in this kit is a 75mm bowl adaptor
and a 7560mm bowl reducing ring, so other suitable
video accessories can also be used when required. The kit
is completed with a padded carrying case. Height 179cm,
closed 73.4cm. Weight 5.2kg. Max load 7kg.
MAMVK502C1 399.00
535AQ Legs only MA535AQ 269.00
Max linear speed: 100cm in 45 secs

Can be linked to most DSLRs with
remote control socket
Supplied with Panning Mount; Linear
mount; 3m High Performance Rope;
International Wall Charger; 2 x Slider
Mounts; 4 x Slider Straps; User Guide
SYGD 799.00
Camera cables
SYL3C
Canon 1D/5D/7D. . . . . . . 19.95
SYL1N
Nikon 10-pin. . . . . . . . . . 19.95
Others available
Magic Carpet
MVH502AH
Replaces the 501HDV Pro model. Offers much of the control and
features of larger ENG-type heads at a much lower price. Very smooth variable fluid movement, independent Teflon friction adjustment and locking of
both spring-balanced pan and tilt movements. Maximum load for use of spring
balance is 4kg. Supplied with a 501PL sliding quick release plate with 1/4 and 3/8
screws and video locking pin. Height 13cm, weight 1.6kg. Max load 4kg (6kg absolute
maximum). MA502AVH 129.95
MVH502A 75mm bowl mount version. MAMVH502A 159.95
A simple, elegant and durable slider for producing silky

smooth professional tracking movements, using precision
ball bearing rollers.
Quick release legs fold neatly away
Counterweight roller for vertical shots
Carriage has a bubble level, brake and
reversible 3/8 and 1/4
Short Track version
thread
800mm; 1.83kg. SYMCS 299.00
Integrated rope attachment for
Long Track version
motion control
1600mm; 2.66kg. SYMCL 369.00
Maximum load 7kg
Novagrade
Digiscoping Adaptor
for smartphones and DLSRs
Manfrotto MHXPRO-2W
A new lightweight 2-way head styled to match the

latest MT190 and 055 series tripods. It features a
switch to select between hard and soft fluid resistance to adjust to either the weight of equipment
being used, or the preferred speed of movement. The body is made from a combination of Adapto technical polymer and
aluminium which makes it very light,
and the camera quick release is the near- universal
200PL pattern, so if you plan to use a photo head
as well, it will save changing plates. Height 10cm,
weight 0.76kg. Max load 4kg.
MAMHXPRO2W 119.00
Each adaptor is
supplied with several
compression rings to
ensure a perfect fit
504HD
Manfrottos professional head with a
75mm bowl fitting. Rigid all-aluminium
construction with variable friction on pan and tilt
axes. The fluid panning movement is further enhanced by the use of a
ball bearing race. The counterbalance system has four presets to
cater for camera weights from 0.757.5kg. Pan bar can be set either
side, and controls have been designed to be easy to use, even when
using gloves. Plate 504PLONG. Height 15.5cm, weight 2.9kg. Max
load 7.5kg. MA504HD 295.00
Until now, each camera

required a separate adaptor
for a specific scope. Now, the Novagrades
patented compression rings system allows
a Canon, Nikon, Micro 4/3 camera or
smartphone (iPhone, Galaxy, Moto, HTC,
etc.) to be securely mated with any scope
or binocular eyepiece between 39 and
60.75mm diameter. Each version 149.00
NGACS
Smartphone
NGACC
Canon EOS
NGACN
Nikon
NGACMFT
Micro Four Thirds
Novagrade plan to release adaptors for
more cameras. Check www.novagrade.com
37
Ball heads
Novoflex
MagicBall
TrioPod
The TrioPod is a verstile modular tripod, available in 3- or 4-section legs, in either

aluminium or carbon fibre. It comes in a kit with a set of 15cm mini legs and a carrying
bag, so you immediately have the flexibility of using a tripod in a different way, as seen in
the picture above. It can also be used with many of the Novoflex clamp and arm accessories, so its uses become almost infinite.
Very compact centre base (or spider)
enables the legs to fold parallel for
minimum closed bulk
Legs can be individually set at 20, 40,
60 and 90 angles
Legs can be used with QPMONO platform as a monopod
Extra height of up to 10cm can be
obtained by using the optional Trio
Centre Column
Legs have foam grips and rubber
locking collars
Rubber feet can be screwed back to
reveal spikes
Aluminium leg versions

3-section: length 65cm, height 151cm,
weight 1.8kg. NVTRA3 269.00
weight 1.9kg. NVTRA4 299.00
38
Ball 19/Ball 19P
Ball NQ
Small and strong; P

version (pictured) has a
lockable rotating base.
NVB19 22.00
NVB19P 24.00
These two heads also
available with a flash
shoe fitting see page 76
A compact and
strong lowprofile head.
Corrosionfree materials
with greaseless (but
smooth) ball
mounting
Short-throw
locking of ball and base with side lever
Arca-compatible Q=Mount quick release
(plate extra)
Height 80mm, base dia 50mm, weight
460g. Max load 7kg. NVBNQ 156.00
Ball 30/Ball 40
Centre Column in use
with Mini Legs
Carbon fibre leg versions

weight 1.5kg. NVTRC3 399.00
weight 1.6kg. NVTRC4 429.00
NVTRCC
This patented design turns a ball head inside out to allow a

much greater range of movements, with over
180 in one plane. Rapid locking is by a
large easy-grip knob, with an extra
concentric tension control on the
Universal and Large models.
The advanced materials
used include blue Delrin
for the ball which is excellent at absorbing
vibration, but
without the mass
Mini MagicBall (75mm high, 330g, max
usually required
load 5kg)
for a professional head.
NVMBM 145.00
Universal MB50 MagicBall (90mm high,
Pan Handle for MB50 and
610g, max load 7kg)
Large MagicBalls
NVMB50 199.50
A 100mm long extension grip to
Large MagicBall (105mm high, 920g,
improve handling with long
max load 10kg)
focus lenses and large cameras.
NVMB 245.00
NVMBG 35.00
Mountaineer
The worlds first carbon fibre tripod in
1994, the Mountaineer series has had
many improvements of the years, and the
latest Series features incredibly stiff and
strong tubing, stronger G-Locks and many
detail operating refinements, making it
the perfect all-purpose tripod choice.
Ground Level Set mechanism allows

rapid removal of the centre column to
get the camera closer to the ground.
A single simple unlocking ring
under the column's upper disc
frees the column while keeping
the upper disc solidly in place
on the tripod.
TrioPod Centre Column . . 50.00
Simple and very strong heads for use in all

conditions.
Made from corrosion-free materials and
are safe in salt water
No grease is used in the ball mechanism
Single screw unlocks the ball and
revolving base (3/8 socket)
Ball 30 Height 75mm, base dia 41mm,
weight 255g. Max load 5kg.
NVB30 55.00
Ball 40 Height 95mm, base dia 53mm,
weight 485g. Max load 10kg.
NVB40 69.00
A large and strong heavy-duty ball head

with a very smooth ball action.
Three vertical 90 openings
Click-stop repeatable friction control
Short throw pan and ball locks
1/4 or 3/8
camera screw
and base
socket. Base dia
69mm.
Height
113mm,
weight
870g,
max
load
12kg.
NVCB5
349.00
GK1580TQD4
GK1580TQR5
SAVE 40%
on the companion
Gitzo carrying bag
when bought with
a Mountaineer!
G-Lock Ultra leg locks have smoother

action, greater resistance to slipping, which
improves maximum load capacity, and also
reduce dust and moisture ingress.
Series 0
Top leg 21.7mm. An alternative to a
Traveller with greater rigidity (thinnest tube
is now 40% thicker than its predecessor).
GZT0532 3-sec legs. Ht 132cm . . . . 469.00
GZT0542 4-sec legs. Ht 137cm. . . . 514.00
GK1580TQD4
Series 1
GT1542T
Top leg 25.3mm. Lightweight standard

height tripod. Weighing around 1.3kg, but
carrying an impressive 10kg.
GZT1532 3-sec legs. Ht 158cm . . 549.00
GZT1542 4-sec legs. Ht 159cm . . 589.00
NOT SUPPLIED WITH HEAD Same legs as the GK1580TQR4, but with a longer centre column.
With the legs folded, a head therefore can be kept on the tripod as it sits at the end of and
not between the legs, and a greater working height is possible. Height 149cm, closed
42.5cm. Weight 1kg. Load 8kg. GZT1542T 499.00
GK2580TQD
Series 2
Carbon eXact optimizes the fibre composition for each tube size, using HM (High
Modulus) carbon fibre in the narrower
tubes to make them stiffer. The tube diameters are also optimised: the final leg section
of a 4 section Series 1 tripod is now 22.5%
thicker than its predecessor.
When opened, this is a standard height Series 1 tripod, but thanks to its innovative 180
leg folding mechanism and 5-section legs, the closed length is 25% less. The carbon fibre
legs allow low level operation, and it comes complete with GH1781TQR ball head with
quick release. Its the ultimate compact travelling tripod. Height 149cm (inc head), closed
35cm. Weight 1.16kg. Load 5.5kg. GZK1580TQR5 599.00
The 4-section version of the Series 1 Traveller Kit, with GH1781TQD head, with Arcapattern quick release. Three leg locks speed setting up and folding, but result in a greater
folded length and a bit more weight. Height 151cm (inc head), closed 42cm. Weight 1.4kg.
Load 6kg. GZK1580TQD 699.00
e.g. GC3101 for

Series 2/3 only
59.97
Classic Ball 5
Top platform diameter is 58mm. The standard 1/4" screw can be removed and
replaced with the included 3/8" stud.
Traveller
Gitzo
Top leg 29mm. The popular all-purpose

size. Not too heavy or bulky, but strong
enough for a 300mm lens.
GZT2532 3-sec legs. Ht 166cm . . 645.00
GZT2542 4-sec legs. Ht 167cm . . 695.00
GZT2543L 4-sec legs. Ht 179cm . . 725.00
Series 3
Top leg 32.9mm. Sized for pro equipment, including a lens up to 400mm, this
is an extremely rigid support but all
models are still under 2kg weight!
GZT3532 3-sec legs. Ht 161cm . . 739.00
GZT3542 4-sec legs. Ht 162cm . . 779.00
GZT3542L 4-sec legs. Ht 179cm . . 779.00
The Series 2 Traveller has a

conservatively rated capacity of
7kg using 6X carbon fibre tubing.
It offers ground level working, and
the column is reversible and includes a
weight hook. Supplied with GH2781TQD ball head
with Arca-type plate. Height 154cm, closed 43cm. Weight
1.9kg. Load 7kg. GZK2580TQD 769.00
Gitzo 5 Star Service
We keep a wide range of Gitzo tripods,

heads and accessories from stock, but if
your requirement is for something more
unusual, and its in the UK, we can usually
have it ready for despatch within 24 hours
- at a guaranteed excellent price too!
39
Gitzo Systematic
Series 2
Series 4
Available in standard or long versions,

and supporting 25kg, these are the choice
for anyone wanting Systematic versatility
with the lightest possible weight.
GZT2532S 3-sec legs. Ht 136cm . . 545.00
GZT2542S 4-sec legs. Ht 130cm . . 579.00
GZT2542LS 4-sec legs. Ht 150cm . . 599.00
Larger top-section tubing than the 3

series, and offering also a 5-section super
compact TS version which is essentially
the 3-Series Systematic Traveller, and a
Gant super-tall version.
GZT4542LS 4-sec legs.Ht 156.5cm . 699.00
GZT4552TS 5-sec legs. Ht134cm . . 725.00
GZT4552GTS 5-sec legs. Ht 240cm . 899.00
Series 3
The most popular size Systematic, with a
choice of standard, long and extra-long
leg versions, all supporting 25kg.
GZT3532S 3-sec legs. Ht 129.5cm . 579.00
GZT3532LS 3-sec legs. Ht 149.5cm 589.00
GZT3532LSV 3-sec legs. Ht 149.5 cm 609.00
GZT3542XLS 4-sec legs. Ht 200.5cm 689.00
Designed for the heaviest loads,

Systematic carbon fibre tripods are
supplied with a wide flat plate for the
attachment of a large head of gimbal
type support. This can be substituted
with an optional centre column,
levelling base, video bowl adaptor,
or the Systematic head.
Ratchet
locking lever
now built into
the top casting
speeds
changing
Built-in spiked
feet with pushon protective
rubber caps
Gitzo heads
Centre ball heads
GH2780QD
40
Systematic accessories
Centre component has a

secondary
safety button
to safeguard
equipment
Legs can be set

at 3 angles,
and have
larger and
easier to grip
selectors
An innovative design, featuring a hollow

Bubble Ball and double-locking system
which gives a very high load to weight ratio.
The coated ball has an exceptionally smooth
movement, and separate pan and friction
controls. QD quick release heads have the
latest Arca-compatible plate, and can also be
used with the previous C pattern plates.
GH1780 Height 8cm, weight 0.28kg, capacity 10kg. GZH1780 154.00
GH1780QD Height 10.5cm, weight 0.5kg,
capacity 10kg. GZH1780QD 265.00
GH2780 Height 9.6cm, weight 0.43kg,
capacity 14kg. GZH2780 217.00
GH2780QD Height 12cm, weight 0.7kg,
GH3780 Height 11.3cm, weight 0.6kg,
capacity 21kg. GZH3780 254.00
GH3780QD Height 13.5cm, weight 0.85kg,
Rapid columns are a sliding

centre column with 30-34cm
travel depending on the model.
GS3512S for Series 2/3/4
GZGS3512S 173.95
GS5512S for Series 5
GZGS5512S 192.50
Series 5
Gitzos ultimate tripods, supporting a
whopping 40kg, and with the rigidity to
provide a shake-free platform for lenses as
long as 800mm (with suitable head).
GZT5532S 3-sec legs. Ht 132.5cm . 725.00
GZT5532LS 3-sec legs. Ht 150cm . . 749.00
GZT5562TS 6-sec legs. Ht 148cm . . 829.00
GZT5562GTS 6-sec legs. Ht 277cm 1025.00
Bags
High quality padded bags designed to

cope with the daily rigours of pro use.
GC1101 for Series 0 and 1 tripods with
typical head. GZGC1101 78.60
GC3101 for Series 2 and 3, Explorer and
Levelling tripods with typical head.
GZC3101 99.95
GH5381SQD Systematic head
Birding heads
G2380 Video head
Traveller
Bags
Closed-cell
neoprene reinforced with rubber
at abrasion points.
Strap adjust for
shoulder, sling or
hand carrying. Two
textile loops and
snap hook.
For Series 1
Travellers.
GZC1201T 49.95
For Series 2
Travellers.
GZC2202T 59.95
Strap
GH1720QR Height 9.2cm, weight 0.46kg,

capacity 4kg. GZH1720QR 195.00
GH2720QR Height 10.7cm, weight 0.7kg,
capacity 6kg. GZH2720QR 241.00
Tripod Holster
Allows one-handed
attachment of tripod
to belt. 31.50
For Series 0, 1, 2, 3
GZC3320
For Series 1, 2, 3, 5
GZC5330
Custom Brackets Gimbal LS
Ergonomic design, with all the adjustment

controls on the same side. There is no
shift when the pan handle is locked ideal
for high magnification shooting. Height
13.5cm, weight 1.4kg, capacity 5kg.
Supplied with GS5370MC sliding plate.
GZ2380 229.00
Spikes
Sets of 3 short spikes
with rubber covers.
GZ1220.129B3
43.50
Long spikes
GZ1220.129LB3
63.80
GS5370D 54mm
x 70mm.
GZGS5370D
27.95
GS5370MD 54x140mm long plate.
GZGS5370MD 69.50
C Profile plates for original series Centre
Ball, Traveller, Systematic, Low Profile pan
heads, and C suffix quick release adaptors.
The Gimbal LS has these features:

Designed to carry lenses between
200mm and 600mm
Precision roller bearing assemblies
are utilised for pan and tilt movements: these are sealed, so never
need attention
Black hard-anodised aluminium is
strong, light and scratch-resistant
Locking knobs are rubber-coated for
secure handling, and are also captive,
so will not fall out
Setup Lever on the side arm stops the
lens platform tilting, and gives extra
safety when attaching a lens, or when
moving the tripod and head
Panoramic base and lens plates (extra
cost option) have laser-engraved
reference markings
Benro GH-2
GS5370MC
Medium
length,
38x82mm, with
1/4 and 3/8 screws. GZS5370MC 37.00
A Profile plates for Off-Centre Ball

heads. Size 34x47mm
GZ1173/14 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.95
GZ1173/38 3/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.95
GS3760D Quick release adaptor on page 24
Weight 1.134kg. Dimensions: 23.2H x

20.3W x 8.9D cm. 3/8 tripod socket.
CTGLS 399.00
CTGLM1 Lens Plate 500600mm . 43.00
CTGLM2 Lens Plate 200400mm . 43.00
CTGLA Anti-twist foot for GLM2 . 17.95
Benro GH-1
For lenses up to
400mm with
tripod collar.
Takes Arca
pattern plate.
Weight 710g.
Includes PL-80
80mm plate.
BRGH1 229.95
GS5370C
Square, 38x38mm,
with 1/4 and 3/8
screws.
GZS5370C 31.50
GS5370LC
Long graduated, 38x140mm, with 1/4
and 3/8 screws. GZS5370LC 69.50
GZS5370XLC Extra-long 200mm. . . . 76.80
Adjusts to fit all
sizes of Gitzo
tripod, old and
new, and can be left
on while shooting. Includes a neoprene
phone/accessory pocket. GZC5210 31.50
Gimbal heads enable heavy lens and

camera combinations to be balanced
around the central point of rotation.This
dramatically improves the handling of
long lenses, allowing moving objects like
wildlife to be tracked more easily.
Custom Brackets are based in

Cleveland, USA, and their long
experience in precision engineering shows in the supersmooth operation of the
head, and robust
construction from
aerospace-grade materials.
Quick release plates
GC4101 for Systematic legs or some larger

Mountaineer and head combinations.
GZGC4101 124.95
GC5101 for larger Systematic leg and
head combinations. GZGC5101 157.50
GZS3321SP Systematic Top Plate . . . 67.50
Light and compact, with high payload and

and ultra-smooth movement. The large,
easy grab knob handles both friction and
locking, and the head can be operated if
required without the handle.
Gimbal heads
D Profile plates are Arca-compatible for

latest Centre Ball and Systematic heads.
Replaces the
flat Systematic
platfom.
Designed to
quickly level long focus lenses and to give
exceptional stability and smooth movement. Revolutionary internal hydraulic
locking is secured by a short turn of the
knurled collar. Friction control No 90
slot. Max load 30kg. Supplied with Arcatype GS5370D plate. GS5381SQD 369.00
GS3121LVL Levelling
Base is a lockable half
ball with 15 tilt in any
direction. All Series.
GZS3121LVL 204.95
Series 5 adaptor
GZS5300S 58.30
Gitzo accessories
Well engineered from high quality

aluminium, the GH-2 provides robust
support for lenses up to 600mm.
Uses a one-piece curved arm giving a
maximum loading of 23kg
The camera platform can be adjusted
vertically for optimum balance
Clamp lock is compatible with ArcaSwiss pattern plates
Weight 1.44kg. Dimensions: 24.2Hx24.1W
x8.9D cm. 3/8 tripod socket. Includes PL100 100mm plate. BRGH2 299.95
Manfrotto 393 Bracket

For use with heavy long lenses to create
better balance for panning and tilting.
3/8 attachment to monopod or tripod.
MA393 139.95
41
Extension tubes
Focusing racks
At close distances and high magnifications, normal focusing on the lens

becomes redundant, and getting to the
precise focus point is made easy by the
use of a separate platform to slide the
whole camera/lens assembly backwards
and forwards.
Novoflex Castel-Mini
Velbon Super Mag Slider

Kenko autofocus tubes
Best quality independent manufacture
tubes, with chromed bayonet surfaces. All
tubes are coupled for TTL exposure
control, and all except Pentax for focusing. At 50mm focal length maximum
extension using all three tubes will
achieve 1:1 magnification ratio (life size
on the negative). Tube lengths are 12, 20
and 36mm. 142.50
KETC
Canon AF (full frame only)
KETN
Nikon AF-D
Kenko tubes for MFT/NEX

For use with CSC interchangeable lens
cameras. 10mm and 16mm tubes can be
used singly or together to allow closer
focusing and hence larger reproduction of
the subject on the sensor. Full
TTL metering is retained.
119.95
KET2M Micro 4/3
KET2S Sony NEX
Novoflex
Castel-Cross
Rack and pinion racks give the best feel
and control, without any hint of backlash,
to make focusing at high magnifications
easy, and the Castel-Mini is a compact
solution for 35mm and lighter digital SLR
cameras, and by means of a double rack
system achieves 135mm movement in only
133mm of length. NVCM 125.00
Novoflex Castel-L
For the ultimate in focusing

control, this combined rack
gives super-smooth and precise
adjustment in both X and Y axes. There are
two variants; the Castel-Cross-Q above
which has the Arca-compatible Q=Base
quick release (supplied with Q-PL1), or the
Castel-Cross-MC which has the
MiniConnect system (like the Castel-L
below left). Either type 299.00
NVCCQ
Castel-Cross Q
NVCCMA
Castel-Cross MC
Manfrotto 454 Micro

Positioning Plate
The same basic design as the Castel-Q

below, but with a built-in Novoflex
MiniConnect quick release (note that
this is a screw clamp, rather than a
snap lock, version). Supplied with
1/4 camera release piece.
NVCL 155.00
Novoflex Castel-Q
The standard rack for all types of camera.
Takes Arca-pattern quick release plates
(plate not supplied). Maximum
movement 140mm; overall
length 200mm. Shown
with optional CASTFINE tube.
NVCQ 155.00
Novoflex Cast-Fine
Fits over the focusing knob of the CastelQ, Castel-Cross and Castel XQ (n.b.
not Castel-L) to improve fine-focusing
control. NVCF 25.00
Canon extension tubes

EF tubes can be used for macro work or to
improve close focusing with long focus
lenses, maintaining all focus and metering
connections (including EF-S lenses).
CAEF12 EF12 II (12mm) tube. . . . 72.80
CAEF25 EF25 II (25mm) tube. . . 146.00
Viewfinder magnifiers are a useful
accessory for many macro scenarios.
Available from Seagull, Canon and
Nikon see page 5152
42
Novoflex Castel-XQ II
A low profile heavy duty versatile rack with Arca-compatible connections,
and a unique 2-way quick release camera mount.
Only 25cm long, but allows 37.5cm of camera movement
The Q-Mount XD (available separately) allows the
camera plate to be set in either direction, but
requires only one locking knob
Top and bottom Arca-type profiling allows the
rack to be used either way up, and in conjunction with many other compatible devices
NVCXQ2 269.00
A double rail worm-drive focusing rack

which allows a relatively limited, but still
useful range of adjustment in both foreand-aft (60mm) and side-to-side (30mm)
axes. 1/4 and 3/8 base sockets. 1/4
camera screw. VESMS 69.95
All-metal construction, to Manfrottos

usual high standards, this uses a worm
drive to allow fine focus over 120mm of
travel. Not quite as elegant as a rack and
pinion, but effective. A spring-loaded
lever allows rough setting of the camera
position, and the plate can be locked
solid. 1/4 camera screw; 1/4 and 3/8
tripod fittings. MA454 74.95
CLOSE-UP & MACRO
Novoflex Bellows
CASTBAL T/S Bellows
Auto Bellows for Canon EOS
A compact bellows unit with non-geared

tilt and shift movements on the front
standard, deisgned for use with CSC or
smaller DSLR cameras. It attaches to
the CASTEL-Q focusing rack for use, and
requires adaptors to attach
camera body and lens. Max
extension length:
120mm. Min extension length: 23mm.
Weight 410g.
The Novoflex Auto Bellows is unique in maintaining full coupling of

the camera and lens without any other adaptor. You dont need to
use a specialised lens a typical zoom will
produce excellent results, but
macro lenses will enable even
higher magnifications to be
achieved. Features include:
Auto diaphragm operation
Open aperture metering
Built-in focusing rack
Minimum extension 50mm; maximum extension 130mm.
Focusing rack travel 65mm. Weight 430g. NVBCAF 439.00
Bellows only: NVCASTBAL 249.00

Bellows complete with CASTEL-Q rack (as
shown above): NVCASTBALKIT 389.00
CASTBAL T/S shown above with CASTEL-Q,

A/UNI, FUXA, UNILEI adaptors and
Schneider PRO 80 APO Digitar lens
To use the CASTBAL T/S you will need

adaptors for each end, plus the appropriate
camera and lens adaptor.
BALPRO 1
Universal
Bellows
Camera side adaptor A/UNI

NVAUNI 40.00
Camera body adaptors to fit A/UNI
NVCANAAF Canon EOS. . . . . . . . . . . . 58.00
NVFUXA Fuji X-Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.00
MVMFTA Micro Four Thirds . . . . . . 58.00
NVNIKA Nikon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.00
NVNEXA Sony NEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.00
Many others available
Lens side adaptor UNI/LEI
NVUNILEI 40.00
Lens adaptors to fit UNI/LEI
NVLEIM Leica M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70.00
NVLEINIKNT Nikon (inc G type) . . . 125.00
NVLEIOM Olympus OM . . . . . . . . . . 70.00
Many others available
Novoflex EOS reverse adaptor on next page
Velbon V4 boom arm

Ideal for copying, or anything requiring
rapid and accurate readjustment of a horizontal camera position. The telescopic
column has geared adjustment, and can
be swivelled both vertically through 180
and horizontally through 360. A quick
twist of the grip at the end of the column
locks both movements. Base mounting is
3/8" or 1/4"; head mount screw is
1/4". Max extension 545mm;
closed length 340mm.
Weight 572g.
VEV4 59.95
The same as the BALPRO T/S, but with

fixed standards. NVBPRO1 269.00
To use the BALPRO 1 you will need camera
and lens adaptors. These are the same as
the BALPRO T/S.
BALPRO T/S Bellows
For fully automatic

operation with Canon EOS
cameras you require: EOSRETRO (see next page), EOS-PRO
and PRO-EOS adaptors 325.00
A tilt and shift beloows allowing depth of

field control according to Scheimpflug
principles. It fits nearly all 35mm, DSLR
and medium format cameras to 6x7
format. Geared adjusters give 26mm of
horizontal movement, and 15 left and
right adjustment. Length is 200mm, width
180mm and weight 979g.
NVBPTS 650.00
To use the BALPRO T/S you will need adaptors for each end, plus the appropriate
camera and lens adaptors. See the CASTBAL
T/S list for the latter.
Camera side adaptor APRO
NVAPRO 40.00
Lens side adaptor PROLEI
NVPROLEI 40.00
Novoflex rod support system

STASET
Comprises two 30cm rods, one 15cm rod,
one mini clamp, one connection piece,
one mini ball head, one connection screw,
one screw, one flash shoe, one flower
stalk holder and one
ground spike.
It can be assembled in
a multitude of ways and
expanded with any of the
components listed below.
Support items, build backgrounds the possibilities
are endless.
NVSTASET 89.00
(Numbers) relate to items in the picture
NVSTA30 (1) 30cm rod with 1/4 male and
female threads at opposite ends . . . 14.00
NVSTA15 (2) 15cm rod with 1/4 male and
female threads at opposite ends . . . 12.00
NVMUFFE (3) Angle connector for two rods
Bracket accessories
NVARM Flexible arm 45cm. . . . . . 31.00
NVARMK Flexible arm 30cm. . . . . . 29.00
NVMARM Arm + mini ball 45cm . . . 50.00
NVMARMK Arm + mini ball 30cm . . . 48.00
NVN
Mini ball with flash shoe . 20.00
NVN19
Mini ball 19 with shoe. . . 23.00
NVUPLA Base plate for brackets . . 85.00
at 90 degrees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.00
NVKLAMMER (4) Small clamp . . . . . . 14.00
NVPFKLAM (5) Flower stalk holder . . 12.00
NVNAGEL (6) Ground Spike . . . . . . . 11.00
NVVBS (7) VBSCHRAUBE 1/4 male-male
connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.00
Klemme Large Clamp

11cm long metal clamp with
strong spring. Jaws
have rubber protective
strips. 1/4 socket
connection.
NVKLEMME 30.00
43
Novoflex EOS-RETRO
EOS Reverse Adaptor
Macro lighting
Metz 15 MS-1 Digital
Fits all Canon EOS cameras and

retains full lens functions, including
TTL metering. It also enables
extremely high magnifications to be
achieved with non-specialist lenses.
For example, a 28105mm lens
reversed will give a range of magnifications from 1:7 (7th lifesize) at the
105mm end to 2.8:1 (nearly 3x lifesize) at the 28mm end, with superb
quality which is much more flexible
than a typical macro lens. The front
adaptor part has a 58mm thread
which can be adapted with step-up
rings. For even greater magnifications, the EOS-RETRO can be used in
conjunction with a BALPRO or
BALPRO T/S bellows unit. So a 28mm
lens here will offer a massive 7x lifesize reproduction on the sensor!
NVEOSR 245.00
Works wirelessly with Canon E-TTL/E-TTL II,

Nikon i-TTL, Sony, Olympus and Panasonic
4/3, Pentax and Samsung TTL.
The 15MS-1 uses two side-mounted
reflectors to allow light to be spread
evenly around the subject, or ratioed over
a range of 4 stops to each side. In addition, each reflector can be individually
adjusted to one of three angles.
Designed to work with built-in or wireless commanders, the gun can also be
used manually with cameras not having
this by means of an optional PC cable.
For more diffused lighting a clip-on
circular disk is supplied, and there is a
rear LCD display. Built-in pop-up flashes
can be masked. Future TTL compatibility is
assured via Metz service firmware
upgrades.
Adaptor rings 52, 55 and 58mm plus
an IR adaptor are
supplied, plus a belt
pouch. Additional
sizes extra.
MZ15MS1 279.95
Seagull MRC 80 LED

Although its primary purpose is as a macro
lighting accessory, the MRC80 could also
be used for head and shoulders people
shots to give the typical virtually shadowless ringlight-style lighting with circular
catchlights in the eyes of the subject.
Has a flash mode which gives a 4x
brighter burst of light
High quality LEDs give 5w output,
continuously adjustable from zero to
full power
Colour temperature 5800K
Brightness 480 lumens
Flash GN8.5 (ISO100)
Takes 4 x AA batteries (not supplied)
Supplied with adaptor rings in sizes 49,
52, 55, 58, 62, 67 and 72mm
KUMRC80 89.00
Nikon R1C1 Remote Kit

Nikons macrolight system is modular, and this kit
for any Nikon camera comprises two SB-R200
Wireless Remote Speedlights controlled by an SU800 Commander unit. The SU-800 will control up
to three groups of Speedlights, so extra SB600910 guns could be included. i-TTL, DTTL, TTL (film) and manual modes are
supported, and accessories include a
diffuser, extreme close-up adaptor, and
52, 62, 67, 72 and 77mm rings (although
n.b. the 60mm Micro-Nikkor requires the
UR-5 adaptor ring). NKR1C1 589.95
Copy stands
Kaiser
Novoflex MagicStudio Repro
Kaiser copying equipment is the choice of professionals and institutions. It is rigid and
robust, and the wide choice of baseboards, columns, lighting units and accessories allows
it to be easily customised or upgraded as the users needs require.
Camera stands
SG CS-380
A low cost, but rigid, copy stand for
lighter cameras, which can be easily
dismantled for storage or transit.
30.5x23cm baseboard is 18% reflectance
grey. 3-section column extends to a
maximum 50cm, and can be quickly
released from the base socket. Camera
platform has 1/4 screw and 25mm foreand-aft movement. SPCS380 42.50
RS2 XA
Matt grey baseboard 40Wx50D cm with
cm/inch scales. 79.5cm high column has a
cranked friction drive camera arm, with
distance from column adjustable from
12.5-19.5cm. Maximum load 1.5kg. 1/4
camera screw. KA5411 198.00
RB2 packages
KA5411K1 RS2 XA stand + RB2 . . . 559.00
KA5510K1 RS1 stand + RB2 . . . . . . 712.95
Novoflex adjustable rod bracket
Optional adaptor rings each 16.10

MZ15MS62 62mm
MZ15MS72 72mm
MZ15MS67 67mm
The UNISET consists of a base plate to which are attached two adjustable rods equipped
with ball and socket heads with shoe. The shoe can be detached to reveal a
1/4 screw for attaching TTL cords. One rod is vertically jointed, the other horizontally. Will support all kinds of on-camera flashgun. The base plate has an
Arca profile to enable it to be fitted to
a wide variety of quick
releases. Weight
900g.
NVUSET 150.00
UNISET-DENTAL version has short arms as

shown below. NVUSETD 107.00
Manfrotto 330B
44
Four tiltable holders on mounting arms

which are adjustable in height and angle.
Takes any standard ES27 screw tungsten
or halogen lamps (not supplied) up to
150w maximum. KA5450 378.00
KA3124 150watt tungsten . . . . . . 13.95
EL150W 150watt halogen. . . . . . . 18.50
A versatile macro copying stand for small

to medium size subjects, which can be
used in conjunction with other Novoflex
and MagicStudio components. Comprises a
rigid 49.5cm long stand with sliding, lockable camera platform, to which the
included 15cm long extension arm can be
attached, Three 40x50cm baseplates
(which fit the MS50 table) are included
transparent, black/white and dark grey.
NVMSREPROSET 205.00
Macro flash brackets
RB218N
A cold lighting unit with two 18w 5400K
fluorescent tubes mounted in tiltable and
height adjustable holders. Separate
control box. KA5464 399.95
KA5458 18w fluorescent lamp . . . 18.50
SG CS-920 Kit
Canon 28/2.8EF on EOS-RETRO
Lighting units
Allows two flashguns to be mounted either

side of a camera. Base tripod socket. Flash
mounts are non-detachable standard flash
accessory shoe type.
MA330B 52.60
Novoflex flexible arm bracket

The UNIMARM (right) uses the same base plate to which are
attached two 45cm flexible arms equipped with ball and socket
heads with flash accessory shoe. Weight 1.26kg. NVUMARM 150.00
A solidly-built stand complete with two

lights which offers great value for money.
The 45x45cm baseboard will take a 12x16
print, and is 18% reflectance grey for easy
metering. Has a spring-balanced 92cm tall
column with a large instant-release lever,
and camera platform with 1/4 attachment screw.
The lighting arms are fully adjustable,
and accept 150w (max) ES screw-fit bulbs.
Comes complete with 2 x UK plugs and 2 x
100w tungsten lamps.
SPCS920 150.00
RB218 packages
KA5411K3 RS2 XA stand + RB218N 585.00
KA5510K3 RS1 stand + RB218N . . . 739.00
RS2 XA
Matt grey baseboard 40Wx50D cm with
cm/inch scales. 100cm high heavy duty
column has a cranked friction drive camera
arm, with spring weight compensation. RA1
arm allows 18.5cm variable distance from
column. Maximum load 4kg. 1/4 or 3/8
camera screw. KA5510 357.00
Book Holder
43x41cm with 6mm
glass plate and 8
height adjusting
foam blocks.
KA5904 296.00
A spirit level is handy for levelling the camera, ensuring it is parallel to the board.
See our range on page 51.
The setup above shows MagicStudio Repro

with the MS50 Table and 2 x MagicStudio
lights. These are 6000K 18w flicker-free
fluorescent lamps designed for reproduction work. They are supplied with arms,
ball heads and clamps.
NVMSTB50MS50 Table . . . . . . . . . . . 89.00
NVMSL
MagicStudio light (ea) . 209.00
An extended focusing
range can be achieved
by attaching a focusing
rack like the CASTEL-L
shown here.
45
Novoflex body adaptors
Kenko Pro-300 DGX converters
Make use of your high quality SLR lenses on a CSC body! Many superb fixed focus lenses of
3040 years ago can still be picked up on eBay for very little outlay, and a modest telephoto becomes a super tele on a small format sensor. Or maybe keep a treasured Nikon
lens for use on a new Canon body. Whatever the need, theres likely to be a Novoflex
adaptor for it. They are engineered with total precision, so that there is absolutely no play
between lens and body, and they retain infinity focus.
Please note that no electrical functions are transmitted between the body and lens.
for Canon EOS bodies

NVEOSNIK
NVEOSLER
NVEOSCO
Nikon F lens . . . . . . . 125.00

Leica R lens . . . . . . . 125.00
M42 screw . . . . . . . . . 75.00
EOSNIK-NT
Enables Nikon-G
lenses, which lack an
aperture ring, to be
manually stopped
down.
NVEOSNIKNT 139.00
Leica R adaptor
is officially
licensed, and
has 6-bit coding
to enable access to the M240 R-lens menu.
for Leica M bodies

NVLEMCAN
NVLEMLEI
NVLEMCO
NVLEMCONT
NVLEMLER
NVLEMMINA
NVLEMMIN
NVLEMNIKNT
NVLEMOM
NVLEMPENT
Canon FD . . . . . . . . . 125.00
M39 screw . . . . . . . . . 75.00
M42 screw . . . . . . . . . 74.00
Contax/Yashica . . . . 125.00
Leica R . . . . . . . . . . . 125.00
Sony/Minolta AF . . . 125.00
Minolta MD. . . . . . . . 125.00
Nikon . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.00
Olympus OM . . . . . . . 125.00
Pentax K . . . . . . . . . 139.00
Leica Visoflex II/III adaptor
for Fuji X-mount bodies

NVFUXCAN
NVFUXLEI
NVFUXCO
NVFUXCONT
NVFUXLEM
NVFUXLER
NVFUXMAF
NVFUXMIN
NVFUXNIK
NVFUXOM
NVFUXPENT
NVFUXT2
46
Canon FD . . . . . . . . . . 99.00
M39 screw . . . . . . . . . 75.00
M42 screw . . . . . . . . . 73.00
Contax/Yashica . . . . . 99.00
Leica M. . . . . . . . . . . 125.00
Leica R . . . . . . . . . . . . 99.00
Minolta MD. . . . . . . . . 99.00
Nikon . . . . . . . . . . . . 139.00
Olympus OM . . . . . . . . 99.00
Pentax K. . . . . . . . . . 139.00
T2 mount . . . . . . . . . . 74.00
A set of 3
10mm rings
and 2 adaptors which
enables
Leica screw
and M bayonet long focus lenses to be
used on an M240 body without the need
for a Visoflex adaptor. The rings can be
also be used to create a variable extension
tube. Replacing the camera end adaptor
with a ***/LEI adaptor (e.g. the FUXLEI
on a Fuji XE-1 above) allows other digital
CSCs to be used. NVLEMVIS 165.00
High grade multicoated teleconverters

designed for lenses 100mm or longer, and
using low dispersion Hoya glass. The 1.4x
has 5 elements and autofocuses with lenses
f5.6 or faster. The 2x has 7 elements, autofocuses with lenses f4.5 or faster.
Pro-300 DGX 1.4x 192.95
KEP14C Canon
KEP14N Nikon
for Micro Four Thirds bodies
for Sony NEX bodies
NVMFTCAN
NVMFTLEI
NVMFTCO
NVMFTCONT
NVMFTLEM
NVMFTLER
NVMFTMAF
NVMFTMIN
NVMFTNIK
NVMFTOM
NVMFTPENT
NVMFTT2
NVNEXCAN
NVNEXLEI
NVNEXCO
NVNEXCONT
NVNEXLEM
NVNEXLER
NVNEXMAF
NVNEXMIN
NVNEXNIK
NVNEXOM
NVNEXPENT
NVNEXT2
Canon FD . . . . . . . . . . 99.00
M39 screw . . . . . . . . . 75.00
M42 screw . . . . . . . . . 74.00
Leica M. . . . . . . . . . . 125.00
Leica R . . . . . . . . . . . . 99.00
Minolta MD. . . . . . . . . 99.00
Nikon . . . . . . . . . . . . 139.00
Olympus OM . . . . . . . . 99.00
Pentax K. . . . . . . . . . 139.00
T2 mount . . . . . . . . . . 74.00
Canon FD . . . . . . . . . . 99.00
M39 screw . . . . . . . . . 75.00
M42 screw . . . . . . . . . 74.00
Leica M. . . . . . . . . . . 125.00
Leica R . . . . . . . . . . . . 99.00
Minolta MD. . . . . . . . . 99.00
Nikon . . . . . . . . . . . . 139.00
Olympus OM . . . . . . . . 99.00
Pentax K. . . . . . . . . . 139.00
T2 mount . . . . . . . . . . 74.00
Pro-300 DGX 2x 204.95

KEP2C Canon
KEP2N Nikon
Holga Pinhole Lens for SLR

A quick an easy way to try out pinhole photography. It
bayonets on in place of your usual SLR lens to give blurred
movements, almost infinite depth of field, and a pleasing
softness to the image. But youll need a tripod, as exposures will be long. 19.95
HGLPC
Canon
HGLPPX
Pentax
HGLPN
Nikon
HGLPSX
Samsung
HGLOP
Olympus Pen
HGLPS
Sony Alpha
HGLPPL
Panasonic Lumix G HGLPSN
Sony NEX
Lens and body caps
LENS
Lenskirt
Lenskirt is a portable, flexible hood which
attaches to the end of a lens to allow you
to shoot pictures through glass without
any reflections of lights, flash or yourself
appearing in the image.
Simply attach the Lenskirt to the glass
using the four small corner suction points,
set up your camera and insert the lens
into the aperture, pull the drawstring
tight, and shoot.
For city nightscapes from your hotel
room, shots from trains and planes, sports
stadia pics behind glass, aquaria and
many other situations, its ideal.
Folds neatly to fit into a pocket or
bag. More information and examples at:
www.lenskirt.com
LS1 49.00
Kaiser 3-in-1 hood
B+W collapsible rubber hood
A rubber hood which can be set in wideangle (28mm), normal and tele positions.
High-grade rubber for standard/tele lenses
KA6820
KA6821
KA6822
KA6823
KA6824
KA6825
KA6826
KA6827
Type 900
BWH9039
BWH9040
BWH9043
BWH9049
BWH9052
BWH9055
BWH9058
39mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.50
40.5mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.25
43mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.25
49mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95
52mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95
55mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95
58mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95
OPHH5
OPHH6
OPHH7
X-Large 5 (12.7cm) . . . . 11.25

XX-Large 5.75 (14.6cm) 12.25
XXXL 6.5 (16.5cm). . . . . 12.95
Novoflex adaptors are also available to order for these mounts: Canon M, Nikon 1, Leica T,
Pentax Q, Samsung NX and Four Thirds, at similar prices to those shown above.
Adaptor Mount Rings
Medium format adaptors
Canon
Body adaptor
(left) + med
format adaptor
Support large lenses when used on the
body types listed below, prevent excess
strain on the lens mount, and give better
balance when used on a tripod. The base is
shaped to fit Novoflex and other Arcapattern quick releases, and has 1/4 and
3/8 sockets. 60mm clamp diameter.
for MFT, Fuji-X, Nikon 1 and Pentax Q
NVMFTAD 74.00
for Sony NEX, Canon EOS-M
NVNEXAD 74.00
Kood body adaptors
For these lenses:

NVHARING Hasselblad . . . . . . . . 139.00
NVMAMRING Mamiya 645 . . . . . . . 234.00
NVPENTRING Pentax 67. . . . . . . . . 189.00
which then are attached to a body adaptor:
NVCANA
Canon EOS . . . . . . . . . 58.00
NVFUXA
Fuji X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.00
NVLEAR
Leica R . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.00
NVMFTA
Micro Four Thirds . . . . 58.00
NVNIKA
Nikon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.00
NVNEXA
Sony NEX . . . . . . . . . . 58.00
Allow a lens of a different mount to be attached

to a body, and still maintain focusing to infinity.
Note that any metering connections will be lost.
Canon EOS body M42 screw
KDBACAFM42 29.95
Canon EOS body Canon FD
KDBACAFFD 64.95
Nikon body M42 screw
KDBANM42 29.95
Pentax K body M42 screw
KDBPKM42 16.95
CALC52
CALC58
CALC67
CALC72
CALC77
CALC82
CARC
CABC
Nikon
EOS 52mm Lens Cap II . . . 4.95
EOS Rear Lens Cap EF . . . . 2.95
EOS Body Cap RF3 . . . . . . . 3.95
Non-branded caps
Good quality plastic. All sizes and types,
each 2.95
NKLC52
NKLC58
NKLC62
NKLC72
NKLC77
NKLF4
NKBF1B
52mm Lens Cap . . . . . . . . 9.95

58mm Lens Cap . . . . . . . . 9.95
62mm Lens Cap . . . . . . . . 9.95
72mm Lens Cap . . . . . . . . 9.95
77mm Lens Cap . . . . . . . . . 9.95
LF-4 Rear Lens Cap . . . . . . 7.95
BF-1B Body Cap . . . . . . . . 7.95
49mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95
52mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95
55mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95
58mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95
62mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95
67mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95
72mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.50
77mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.50
Op/tech Hood Hats

Clip-on lens caps
KDLC40 40.5mm
KDLC46
46mm
KDLC49
49mm
KDLC52
52mm
KDLC55
55mm
KDLC58
KDLC62
KDLC67
KDLC72
KDLC77
KDLC82
58mm
62mm
67mm
72mm
77mm
82mm
Rear lens caps

KDRCLM
Leica M
KDRCLR
Leica R
KDRCLS Leica M39
KDRCM42
M42
KDRCMFT Micro 4/3
KDRCN
Nikon
KDRCNEX Sony NEX
KDRCO
Olympus
KDRCPK
Pentax K
Body caps
KDBCLM
Leica M
KDBCLR
Leica R
KDBCLS Leica M39
KDBCM42
M42
KDBCMFT Micro 4/3
KDBCN
Nikon
KDBCNEX Sony NEX
KDBCO
Olympus
KDBCPK Pentax K
Neoprene covers which slide over a

lens hood to give protection from
dust, moisture and impact. Theres
6mm or so of stretch, so its best to
choose a size slightly smaller to ensure
a good friction fit on the hood. Also ideal
for spotting scopes, telescopes
and binoculars. Sizes quoted
are approximate diameters.
OPHH1
OPHH2
OPHH3
OPHH4
Mini 3 (7.6cm). . . . . . . . . 8.50

Small 3.5 (8.9cm) . . . . . . 8.95
Medium 4 (10.2cm) . . . . . 9.25
Large 4.5 (11.4cm) . . . . . 9.95
47
Timer remotes
Wired remote controls
Have long exposure and interval timing as

well as basic triggering functions.
Basic remotes
All activate the metering before firing the
shutte; some have an extra function.
Canon IR Controller RC-6
Hahnel Remote Control

An 80cm wired release which is supplied
with a 2m extension cable, giving a
maximum 2.8m if required.
Each remote is supplied with
connector adaptors for every model in
that brands range
Autofocus before shutter release, bulb
and continuous shooting lock functions are included
19.95
HLRC
HLRN
HLRS
HLRO
HLRP
Canon, Pentax K, Samsung GX

Nikon
Sony A series
Olympus E series
Panasonic
Nikon MC-DC2
for D90, D3000, D5000,
D7000.
A 1m length remote.
Includes a shutter lock
for manual timed
exposures.
NKMCDC2 24.50
Canon Remote Switch 80N3

For EOS 1D/3060D/5D/7D.
80cm wired remote which
activates metering as
well as releasing
shutter.
CARS80N3 43.95
Nikon AR-11 soft shutter

release
Improves the
release point feel of
cameras with a
screw-threaded
shutter release. Insert
made from high quality ebonite resin.
NKMC11 21.95
48
Phottix TR-90
A multi-function remote switch with timer
and intervalometer functions.
Triggers camera and meter and can
activate Bulb function
Self-timer, timer delay, exposure time
and interval can all be independently
set, in 1 second increments from zero
to 99 hours, 59 mins and 59 secs
Number of exposures: 1399
39.95
PHTR90C6 Canon E3 type, Pentax,
Samsung
PHTR90C8 Canon N3 type
PHTR90N10 Nikon D90, D7000
PHTR90N8 Nikon 10-pin type
Canon Timer Remote

Controller 80N3
Canon Remote Switch 60E3

For EOS350600D/1000D, 1100D. Triggers
TTL metering and fires shutter. 60cm long.
CARS60E3 16.00
No extension cord available for this release.
Wireless remote
controls
For EOS350600D/1000D, 1100D.
An infra-red controller
which fires the shutter
up to 5m from the
camera. Gives immediate release or bulb time
exposure. Includes
pouch case.
CARC6 16.95
Nikon ML-L3
for D40D80, D90,
D3000, D7000, Nikon 1
and Coolpix 7000.
An infra-red trigger
which gives immediate
release of shutter, or a
2 second delay. Range
of 5m.
NKMLL3 18.95
Hahnel Giga T Pro II
Nikon MC-30A
for D4, D3, D2, D1, D800/10, D700, D300,
F6, F5
An 80cm release which
duplicates the functions of
the camera shutter release.
First pressure turns on the
metering.
NKMC30 66.50
Nikon GP-1A GPS Module

Geotagging device which stores longitude,
latitude, altitude
and time. Fits
accessory shoe or
can be attached
to a strap.
Compatible with
most Nikon DSLRs.
NKGP1 199.95
For all EOS

cameras with an
N3 type release
socket, e.g.
1D/3060D/5D/7D.
Self-timer, interval timer and long exposure timer; range of 1 sec to 100 hours.
Exposure count setting.
CART80N3 137.50
Nikon MC-36A
For 10-pin sockets.
Offers long exposure
and interval times
of 1sec - 99hrs,
59min, 59secs, and
delayed shutter
opening from 1sec to
the same maximum,
plus manual release.
NKMC36 138.90
A timer, intervalometer and remote

control with a range of 100m.
Ideal for wildlife, astral and time lapse
photography
Uses the new UHF FSK 2.4GHz worldwide standard radio frequency
Programmable features include a selftimer, interval timer, long exposure
setting and interval count. Features
can be used in any combination
Backlit LCD display on transmitter
Complete with the necessary connectors to fit all cameras in the manufacturers range, and batteries
66.95
HLGTC Canon
HLGTP Panasonic
HLGTN Nikon
HLGTS Sony A
HLGTO Olympus
REMOTES
Nikon Wireless Remote Set WR-A10/R10/T10

A radio triggering set which can be used
for one camera, or with the addition of
more receiver units, to trigger multiple
cameras simultaneously. The function
button on the controller enables control
of autofocus, video recording and more.
There are 3 channels available to avoid
interference. An adaptor is included to
convert 10-pin terminals for use with the
receiver (owners of cameras with the new
terminal can buy WR-T10 transmitter and
WR-R10 receiver separately.
NKWR10SET 199.00
Kit comprises:
WR-T10 Transmitter
Used with one WR-R10 Transceiver unit
has a line of sight range of 20m. An unlimited number of cameras with attached WRR10 unit can be triggered simultaneously.
NKWRT10 64.00
WR-R10 Transceiver
Takes signals from the WR-T10 and transmits to further WR-R10 units in multiple
configuration. NKWRR10 84.00

WR-A10 Adaptor
Converts an 8-pin terminal to allow use
with the WR-R10 Transceiver. When used
in this configuration, one camera can be
designated a master to control up to 64
other cameras equipped with WR-T10
transceiver, and the range is 50m.
LiveView wireless camera

control via iPad or iPhone
Enables most Canon and Nikon DSLRs to
be controlled and images to be reviewed,
stored or deleted
via a secure
local wireless
network with a
range of around
50 metres.
Triggersmart
The Triggersmart offers sophisticated
motion capture possibilities at an
unprecedented price point. You can easily
capture images by triggering the camera
using sound, light intensity increase,
movement or by breaking an infra-red
light beam.
It is compatible with a variety of still
or video cameras. Many accept the 2.5mm
jack cable supplied with the kit, and there
are inexpensive adaptor cables for other
types of socket.
The Sound Trigger mode was used to fire the

camera by the sound of the air rifle used to
shoot the glass. The delay can be adjusted.
MCT-1 Controller Unit controls sensors

and trigger units remotely, with a full
range of adjustment of sensitivity and
delay, plus single or continuous exposure over set time spans
IR Transmitter & Sound Sensor Unit
creates a beam of IR light to be
received by the other unit, or acts as
the receiver when triggering by sound
IR/LIS Unit is the receiver for the IR
beam, and also acts as the Light
Intensity Sensor when using that mode
2 x 8cm mini tripods to mount transmitter and receiver units
CamRanger
1 x 3m cable; 1 x 5m cable; 1 x 3m
2.5mm jack camera cable
2 receptor baffle
Comprehensive instruction booklet
TSKIT 238.00
Cables and accessories
TS970
Canon E3, Pentax, Samsung GX
and other 3.5mm . . . . . . . 5.40
TS971
Canon N3 type. . . . . . . . . . 5.40
TS973
Nikon 10-pin, Fuji S3/5 . . 5.40
TS974
Nikon D90/5000/7000 . . . 5.40
TS975
Sony Alpha/Dynax . . . . . . 5.40
TSCT1
5m Camera Ext Cable. . . . 11.40
TSCS1
5m Sensor Ext Cable . . . . 11.40
TSMP1
AC power supply MCT-1 . . 15.00
Ideal for many shooting situations

where being next to the camera is
neither desirable nor possible,, e.g.
nature photography, surveillance,
pole-aerial shots
Good in the studio for relaying pictures
from the camera to an art director or
client
A neat transmitter creates its own wireless network, so needs no computer
and is free from local interference
Real time liveview image is streamed
from the camera to the device (in JPEG
or RAW); it can be reviewed, saved and
deleted from the camera card remotely
Complete remote focus control is possible, including nudge and stack focusing. Images can be enlarged to full
resolution
Intervalometer, auto-sequencing of
shots for HDR and other function
control
USB-rechargeable battery is userreplaceable. Lasts typically 36 hours
but can be longer depending on use
CMCCI 269.00
MP-360 and PT Hub Kit

A motorised pan and tilt platform,
designed to be used with the CamRanger
remote control unit. Ideal for wildlife
photography, pole photography or any
situation where adjusting the camera
position is difficult or undesirable.
The MP-360 unit can rotate 360, with
unlimited rotation, and tilt a total of
30, 15 up and 15 down
The PT Hub receiver is powered from
the CamRanger, and will also work with
MP-101, Bescor or Hague powered
heads
MP-360 weighs
900g, takes 4 x
AA batteries, or
can be externally powered
CMHUBK 249.00
Buy the CamRanger with the MP360/PT Hub Kit and save 20
CMCCB
CamRanger spare battery 29.95
499
49
Microphones
Some mic terms explained

Frequency response: 100Hz16kHz
VideoMic Go
Compact and light,
ideal for CSC or
DLSR. Powered by
camera, and comes
complete with
Rycote noisesuppressing mount.
Super-cardioid
pattern; 100Hz20kHz; dynamic
range 120dB; S/N
ratio 60dB. Weight
73g, length 167mm.
RDVMG 65.00
Rode design and make most of their microphones in Australia, and have a world-wide reputation for providing superb sound quality at hitherto unheard of price points, whether for
studio, broadcast, and now video applications. Any of these microphones will immediately
improve the sound quality of your videos, and most fit the standard 3.5mm mini-jack socket.
Rode VideoMic Pro

With its high resolution 1/2" condenser
capsule with a super-cardioid polar pattern
ensures that your recording is focused on
the subject in front of the camera.
Switchable high-pass filter reduces rumble
from traffic etc below 80Hz. Two level
settings allow a 10dB reduction when
recording high volume, or a +20dB adjustment boosts the mics output to allow a
reduction of the SLR input level to compensate for the typically high noise levels of
accurately captures most sounds. Extra

range at either end is better for music.
Polar pattern: Cardioid refers to a
heart-shaped pattern where sound
pickup from the rear is restricted.
Super-cardioid narrows the front
acceptance angle further.
Signal-to-noise S/N ratio: comparison of required sound to background
noise. 60dB is good (for comparison,
the very best domestic reel-to-reel tape
recorders managed around 65dB).
Dynamic range: Expression of the
mics range before the onset of distortion from zero input to maximum. Any
sound over 100dB is pretty ear-shattering.The better mics have 10dB attenuation option for recording rock groups
and the like.
Rode NTG-2
A super-compact way of achieving broadcast quality

recording with a wide stereo soundstage. Two 1/2
cardioid mic capsules are set in a X/Y conifguration
under the foam windshield, with a high rejection of
sounds from behind the camera. Switchable high-pass
75Hz filter for rumble and integrated anti-shock mount.
Two level settings allow a 10dB reduction when recording high
volume, or a +20dB adjustment boosts the mics output
compensate for the typically high noise levels of camera audio
circuitry. Power: 9v battery. Freq response 40Hz20kHz;
dynamic range 100dB; S/N ratio 73dB. Weight 115g, height
130mm. RDVMPS 159.95
A lightweight super-cardioid shotgun

condenser microphone designed for
professional use, with a choice of 48V
phantom or onboard 1.5V alkaline power.
XLR mic connection. Supplied with windshield (optional Dead Cat recommended
for outdoor use). Freq. response 20Hz
20kHz; S/N ratio 76dB. RDNTG2 149.95
50
Rode mic accessories
Dead Cat VMP

Artificial fur windshield for VideoMic
Pro. RDDCV 28.00
Dead Kitten
The same, for the Stereo VideoMic Pro.
RDDK 19.95
Dead Cat Go
For the VideoMic Go. RDDCG 28.00
RDPG2
RDVC1
RDVXLR
PG2 Pistol Grip . . . . . . . . 47.00

VC1 Mini Jack Extn Cable. 10.95
Min JackXLR converter . 10.95
Tascam DR-60 PCM Audio Recorder
Rode iXY Stereo Mic

for iPhone, iPad or iPod
In conjunction with the RodeRec app (Lite version
is free; low cost Pro version enables 24-bit recording), this converts the device into a high quality
setreo recorder, n.b. requires iOS 6+. Includes a
switchable high-pass filter to minimise handling
noise. A foam windshield is also supplied. Freq response
20Hz20kHz; dynamic range 120dB; S/N ratio 75dB. RDIXY 135.00
Rode iClamp for iXY Mic
Gives additional support when attached to device. RDCLAMP 9.95
Fits any Nikon with a 3.5m mic socket to

improve frequency response and give
better isolation from mechanical and wind
interference. The back-electret design
takes its power from the camera. Freq.
response 70Hz16kHz; S/N ratio 60dB.
NKME1 99.95
Canon
Nikon
FINDER
Seagull Right Angle Finder
Eyecups
Eyecups
Spirit levels
DK-19
D4, D3, D2X/H, D700, D800.
NKDK19 7.95
DK-20 D3000, D3100. NKDK20 5.95
DK-21 D7000, D80, D90. NKDK21 5.95
DK-23 D300. NKDK23 5.95
DK-24 D5000. NKDK24 5.95
2-bubble level
A great aid for macro, and

low or high level photography, the finder has
switchable 1x3.25x magnification, and unlike cheaper
mirror designs gives a sharp
correctly oriented
image, thanks to a 9
element glass roof
prism construction.
Includes adaptors
for Canon 18mm and
22mm rectangular, Nikon 22mm rectangular, Pentax and Leica R finders. Plus a
blower brush and pouch case.
KURAF 79.95
KURN Adaptor for Nikon round eyepiece
(large and small type) 7.75
Canon
Angle Finder C
With a very
soft rubber
surround, EOS
eyecups wont scratch glasses.
Type EB
For EOS 20D/30D/40D/50D/60D/5D Mk2
CAEBCUP Eyecup EB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.75
CAECCUP2 Eyecup EC/2 EOS 1 (all) . . 9.95
CAEDCUP Eyecup ED EOS 3/30/5/50. 8.95
CAEFCUP Eyecup EF 300600D . . . . . 6.75
CAEGCUP Eyecup EG
EOS 1D Mk3/7D/5D Mk3. . . . . . . . . . . 11.50
Anti-fog eyepieces
Have a waterabsorbent
polymer
coating to
prevent
fogging.
CAECFOG EOS 1 (not1D Mk3) . . . . . 28.00
CAEDFOG EOS 3/30/33/5/50 . . . . . 36.95
CAEGFOG EOS 1D/1Ds Mk3/7D/5D 2/3 28.00
Eyepiece extender EP-EX15 II
camera audio
circuitry. Power: 9v
battery. Freq response
40Hz20kHz; dynamic range
114dB; S/N ratio 74dB. Weight
85g, length 150mm.
RDVMP 138.50
Rode Stereo VideoMic Pro
Nikon
ME-1
Finder accessories
The all-in-one solution for DSLR video

makers wanting to create a professional
quality soundtrack. Simultaneously
records up to 4 tracks of PCM audio to an

SD card (up to 32GB). 2 XLR/TRS combo
inputs for professional microphones, with
switchable 48V phantom power. 3.5mm
socket for amateur mics. Option of recording a duplicate safety soundtrack at a
lower level in case the main recording
distorts. Very low noise preamps, unlike
those included in DSLRs. Slate tone generator enables easy synchronising in postproduction. 133mm wide; sits comfortably
under a camera body. Weight 510g.
Requires 4 x AA batteries.
TADR60D 199.00
For EOS 40D/5D/400D /450D/500D/

550D/600D/ 1000D/1100D Extends the
viewfinder 15mm nearer to your eye, and
can improve viewing
comfort.
CAEX152
13.50
Gives a correctly oriented image and is
useful for low angle, copying or macro
work. Offers switchable magnification
from 1.25x (full size) to 2.5x (centre of
image). Includes adaptors for all EOS
eyepiece sizes. CAANGC 195.00
Nikon DR5/6
Angle Finders
Ideal for copying or macro photography,

providing an upright, unreversed image.
Built-in dioptric eyesight adjustment.
Switchable from 1:1 to 1:2 magnification.
Either type 224.95
NKDR5 for round eyepiece Nikon SLRs
NKDR6 for rectangular eyepiece SLRs
Mounts on a standard accessory

shoe (not Sony),
to provide a level
check in two
planes. KD2BL 7.95
3-bubble level
Magnifying eyepieces
NKDK17M D2/D3/D4, D700, D800. . 25.50
NKDK21M D200, 300, 90, 80, 7000 . 25.50
Anti-fog eyepiece
NKDK17A D2/D3/D4, D700, D800. . 25.50
Replacement eyepiece
NKDK17 D2/D3/D4, D700, D800. . 13.50
Eyepiece adaptor/cover
Allows the camera to be

levelled in any position
without re-setting the
bubble level in the
shoe. 16.95
KD3BLA Std shoe KD3BLS Sony shoe
Kaiser self-adhesive level

For permanent attachment to cameras,
tripods, flash bars etc.
Can also be screwed in
place. 26mm diameter.
KA6386 12.50
DK-22 adapts small circular items to

larger circular eyepieces. NKDK22 5.95
DK-5 Eyepiece Cover for all rectangular
eyepiece cameras. NKDK5 5.95
Nikon LCD Monitor covers

NKBM8
NKBM9
NKBM10
NKBM11
NKBM12
NKBM14
BM-8 D300 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95

BM-9 D700 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95
BM-10 D90 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95
BM-11 D7000 . . . . . . . . . . 9.95
BM-12 D800/810 . . . . . . 12.95
BM-14 D600/610 . . . . . . 11.95
Kaiser Silicon LCD Screen Protector

A high quality 6-layer film which protects the
screen from fingerprints and scratches.
Top coating is covered with a PET antireflective layer
UV protective layer
Silicon base enables it to stay attached
without any glue, so it is easy to remove
when needed
Works with touch screen
Sizes
KA6085
KA6086
KA6087
KA6090
KA6092
2.5 screens . . . . . . . . . . . 8.50

2.7 screens . . . . . . . . . . . 9.95
3 screens . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.95
3.5 screens . . . . . . . . . . 10.95
4 screens . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95
Hoodman LCD screen viewfinders are on the following page.
Kaiser screw-in level

Mounts between camera base and support,
and has twin bubble levels. 1/4 base
socket and top screw; 4cm diameter.
Bubbles can be aligned in relation to
camera base. KA6380 10.95
Kaiser Action Level / Sound

Uses a traffic light style
LED arrangement to indicate
when the
camera is level a
green LED shows in the
centre when level so its
ideal for use in low lighting levels.
Automatically resets itself when used
vertically, and includes a switchable beep
confirmation. Fits a standard camera hot
shoe. KA6383 44.00
Action Level Cross
levels in 3 planes,
even when the
camera is vertical.
KA6378 57.00
51
Hoodman
Sensor cleaning
Visible Dust
HoodLoupe 3.0
Robust and high quality LCD screen
viewing aid. The Loupe suits screens up to
3 size, and uses German-sourced optics
to give a distortion-free 1:1 view of the
picture. Body is rubber armoured and the
soft rubber eyepiece has 3 dioptric
correction built in.
Its supplied with a lanyard and pouch
case, and can be attached to an SLR body
or to a camcorder. HMPL3 75.95
HoodLoupe Mag 3.0
High quality rubber
cup for the
HoodLoupe with
temple flare to
exclude side light,
and built-in 3x
magnification.
HMHM 35.95
Cinema Strap
Attaches the
HoodLoupe to a
DSLR body.
HMCS 12.95
The latest SLRs include some improvements, such as shaking devices to remove
dust or Indium Tin Oxide coating of the
sensor to reduce static electricity, but
eventually dust spots will appear on your
shots and action must be taken. Canadian
nanotechnology company Visible Dust
has the tried and tested answer.
Stage One: Check the sensor. You can
see from a test shot of a bright plain
surface where dust has gathered, but
confirmation using an illuminated loupe
helps make cleaning effective.
Quasar Sensor Loupe 7x
HoodCrane
Allows the HoodLoupe to be
swung completely out of the way
to allow use of the pentaprism
viewfinder.
HMCR 49.95
HoodBoost Adaptor
Raises the mount point position of the
HoodCrane on compact cameras so that
the Hood aligns correctly. HMHBA 23.95
HoodLoupe 3.2
HoodLoupe Compact 3.2
A high quality 7x
magnifier with 6
built-in superbright LEDs
which fits over
the lens throat.
The LEDs are set at
different angles to help
create a 3D image of the dust particles.
VDSL7 84.95
Stage Two: Dry Cleaning. Unless dust
has adhered to the surface, or you have a
liquid-based stain, the negative charge
of the VD brush fibres removes (not
displaces) dust from the camera sensor.
Zeeion
A non-contact
cleaning option. It
blows an oppositely
charged mass of air at
the dust on the sensor, to
prevent it being re-attracted. A one-way
valve stops the dust being sucked into the
bulb, and fresh air is drawn in through a
valve at the rear; a 20 micron filter removes
grit and dust particles. VDZ 39.95
Dust Snapper
Same design as the original HoodLoupe
3.0 but fits wider format Canon 3.2
screens (n.b. Nikon 3.2 screens use the
HoodLoupe 3.0). German optical glass
gives distortion-free 1.1 viewing, 3 dioptric adjustment built in. A 1/4 socket
allows it to be mounted to a variety of
video supports like the Hoodman Custom
Finder Plate, and it comes with a lanyard
and pouch case. HML32 95.95
52
Has a flexible rubber body to allow it to be

collapsed against the camera body, useful
if you plan to keep the Finder attached all
the time. HML32C 105.95
Custom Finder Plate
Made by Custom Brackets,
provides solid anti-twist
mount and strap
socket.
HMCFP 115.00
Modern camera
bodies are
made of
materials
which are often
inherently more attractive to dust particles
than the surface they might sit on. The Dust
Snapper is a silicon mat with a higher affinity to dust, to keep contaminants away
from the body when cleaning, and also
absorbs accidental knocks. VDDS 31.95
MAINTENANCE
General cleaning accessories

Arctic Butterfly
724 Super Brite
View Brush
Two LED lights make
dust location easy. The
micro-fibres of the
brush are negatively
charged when the
brush is spun to effectively remove the dust
from the sensor with
one or two passes.
Supplied with hard
shell case. Requires 2 x
AAA batts (not
supplied). VD724 99.95
Arctic Butterfly 788
Basic version with one LED, and less
powerful motor (so less charge). Requires
1 x AAA batt (not supplied) VD788 79.95
Stage Three: Wet Cleaning. For oil,
saliva, and stuck dust you will need a
swab and solution. Visible Dust solutions
are non-toxic, use no alcohol, and are
safe for all sensor types.
Green Series Swabs

For use with Sensor Clean and Smear Away
Ultra-thin
paddle-shaped
microfibre swabs
for use with
Sensor Clean,
and safe for use
with ITO coated
sensors. Pack of 12 34.95
VDSWG10 1.0X sensor
VDSWG16 1.6X sensor
EZ Cleaning Kits
Contain swabs and enough Sensor Clean
solution for 4 cleans. Ideal for use in an
emergency. 19.95
VDEZ210 1.0x sensor VDEZ216 1.6x sensor
Solutions
Sensor Clean: a cleaner for use with all
types of sensor. Non-alcoholic, non-toxic,
non-corrosive, prevents static build up.
VDSC07 7.5ml bottle 19.95
Smear Away: Use to remove stains which
cannot be removed by the brush or Sensor
Clean, such as oil and saliva. 7.5ml
VDSA 19.95
Sensor Brush Clean: A pH buffered solution which will clean any type of Visible
Dust brush with no affect on the brush
charge. VDSBC 12.95
Large Blower Brush
Lens Pen
An all-in-one solution to lens
care. First remove grit and
dust with the brush at one end, then
reverse the pen to reveal a velvet
pad with non-toxic cleaner which
can be wiped around the glass to
remove smudges and other greasy contaminants. Replacing the cap recharges for the next use. LN1 8.95
Has a large 70mm bulb to give

a decent amount of air, and
soft high quality hair in the
brush. KDLBB 5.95
Giottos Rocket-Air
Super-large bulb gives a
strong blast of air to
remove dust from the most
inaccessible corners. Fins
allow it to stand upright.
Large size: black.
GTRAL 9.50
Hama Lipstick Lens Brush

Retractable soft hair
brush with a push-on
cap to keep out dirt
and moisture.
HA5601 5.25
Hama Contact Cleaner

Clean battery terminals and maintain
equipment performance with this pen. A
retractable bundle of glass fibres, 2.5cm
in length, removes any layer of oxidation
on battery terminals. HA5629 7.50
FilterKlear
Identical in design and operation to the Lens Pen, but with a flat, rather than curved pad,
for filter surfaces. LN2 8.95
Hama Lens Cleaning Fluid
B+W Lens Cleaner II
Wont damage
multicoatings,
and doesnt
leave messy
traces. Pumpaction spray head;
includes one pack
of 30 lens tissues.
n.b. do not use on plastic, or camera
mirrors. HA5902 6.50
Hama Lens Tissues
5 packs of tissues as above. HA5915 5.50
High quality non-flammable and

biodegradable cleaner from the
makers of very high quality
filters. Also suitable for TFT and
LCD screens. 50ml pump-action
spray head. BWLC2 9.00
Visible Dust Lens Clean

A methanol- and alcoholfree solution which
removes finger prints and
other water/oil based
contamination from
optical surfaces, without
staining. Use with any
microfibre cloth.
VDLC 14.95
Cleaning cloths
Ilford Antistaticum
is a 32cm square cloth
used to eliminate static
on negatives, slides,
lenses etc. ILSTAT 7.40
Screwdriver Set
Includes four
slotted and
two cross-head
screwdrivers.
KDSS 5.95
Hama
20cm
microfibre cloth
Handy sized cloth which takes up no space
in a camera bag. HA5908 4.25
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Aerosol Postal Restrictions
Royal Mail will no longer accept certain
classes of aerosol products, which
includes air dusters. So regrettably we
will not accept any orders for these items
under a value of 30, or to any
destination outside the UK.
You can include one or more cans in a
mixed order of 30+ as we will use a
courier service to deliver your order.
Lee Cleaning
Cloth
A high quality
30cm square
cloth,
which can
be used either
dry, or with the Lee
Cleaning Solution. LECC 5.30
Lee Filter Cleaning Solution

60ml bottle of specially formulated solution for use on resin or glass filters.
LEFCS 4.00
B+W Photo-Clear Cloth
Laboratory tested
poly/nylon microfibre
woven into a thick,
durable fabric. 17cm
square. BWPCC 5.50
Speed Graphic HiteCloth
The softest microfibre cloth we have
found. Absorbs moisture and grease
particles.
Keeps its
quality when
washed.
32x29cm.
KUCLOTHS
4.95
Kenair Master
SEE NOTICE ABOVE
A 360ml professional size aerosol containing a high-pressure CFC-free gas. Ideal for
removing grit and dust from negs and
slides as well as photo and other equipment. The valve in the kit can be re-used.
Master Kit KRKENR01 . . . . . . . . . . . 19.20
Refill single KRKENR02 . . . . . . . . . 10.70
Refill 3-pack KR02KIT. . . . . . . . . . . 31.00
Spare Standard Valve
As supplied with the
Master Kit.
KRKENR04 9.50
Silica Gel
Helps keeps moisture at
bay in steamy
climes. Not
refreshable.
Large 25g,
85x65mm size.
Pack of 2.
KDJSG 2.50
53
A division of
Jos.
Schneider
Optical
Works, B+W
manufactures filters
to the
highest
optical and
mechanical
standards.
Schott optical glasses are married to a
matt black anodised brass mount. This
has less of a tendency to bind on the
lens than the more common aluminium
type. The filter glass is held in place with
a threaded ring, rather than a spring
circlip, for added security.
B+W
Buying filters
Glass filters
are made from optical glass, like
lenses, and can be multicoated to
reduce flare and improve light transmission (to nearly 100% in some
cases).They are your first choice for a
colourless UV or Protector filter to
keep on each lens at all times - its a lot
cheaper to replace a filter than the
front element of a lens!
The popular second choice is a
polariser.The circular polariser refers
not to its shape but to the pattern of
light rays after passing through the
filter.The technical reason why is
unimportant, but the filter is, as it
darkens blue skies, reduces reflection
off water, and intensifies colours in a
way which Photoshop cant replicate.
Its also good as an emergency neutral
density filter.
When do I need a slimline

filter?
In general, if you have a lens with a
viewing angle wider than 74 (24mm
focal length on full frame format) its a
good idea to go for one. Both the Hoya
HD and B+W XS-Pro Nano have a
front thread to take a lens hood.
Resin and graduated

filters
Cokin and Lee systems use CR39
optical resin instead of glass (although
certain filters in the systems are glass).
This material can be dyed to create
graduated filters (grads) which are
extremely useful in balancing the
exposure, for example, of an overbright sky against a darker foreground.
You can achieve a similar result in
Photoshop, but its much quicker to
use a filter when you take the picture.
54
A comparision of the standard F-Pro

mount on the left, and an XS-Pro Nano
slimline mount on the right.
Hoya is the worlds largest optical glass

manufacturer, supplying many leading
camera and lens manufacturers with their
raw glass. This, together with their dyedin-the-mass production method, ensures
quality and consistency.
Revo slimline super-multicoated

Only available in the UK and Germany, Hoya Revo filters have an improved super-multi-coating (IS-HMC) which virtually eliminates
surface reflections. These coatings are overlaid with a water, scratch and stain-resistant finish which is very easy to clean. Coatings are
furnace-bonded to ensure stability. The glass is mounted in a low-profile aluminium frame (4mm UV/Protector and 6mm Polarising) which
prevents vignetting occurring with wide-angle lenses.
Filter type
UV
Protector
Circular Polarising
MRC filters
MRC Multi Resistant Coating comprises 4 layers of anti-reflection coating, plus a final layer on either side which resists
water and dust. This makes these filters easy to clean and
resistant to scratches. They are in F-Pro mounts, which are
4mm thick, and 9mm for polarisers.
Filter type
Protection 007
UV 010
UV Dig IR Blocking
Circular Polarising
ND 0.9 3 stops 103
ND 1.8 6 stops 106
ND 3.0 10 stops 110
Suffix
MP
MUV
MUV486
MCPOL
MND103
MND106
MND110
37
39
40.5
43
46
49
52
29.00
29.00 29.00 29.00 29.00 29.00 29.00 29.00
70.00
73.50
64.40
61.40
65.30
55
31.00
31.00
87.80
84.20
65.30
62.40
65.30
58
32.90
32.90
87.80
86.00
66.30
68.30
68.30
62
40.60
40.60
88.70
91.00
83.90
87.80
87.80
67
48.40
48.40
104.30
108.30
88.70
94.60
94.60
72
59.00
59.00
126.80
123.80
117.00
122.90
122.90
77
77.00
77.00
146.20
139.95
144.00
149.95
149.95
82
101.50
101.50
Suffix
RUV
RP
RCPOL
37
27.50
27.50
44.80
40.5 43
46
49
52
55
58
62
67
72
77
28.50 29.40 31.00 31.40 32.60 34.60 37.20 41.00 46.00 51.20 56.00
28.50 29.40 31.00 31.40 32.60 34.60 37.20 41.00 46.00 51.20 56.00
47.40 49.95 52.50 55.00 57.60 62.00 67.80 73.60 79.95 89.60 99.95
82
61.40
61.00
114.95
Slimline Circular Polariser
HD slimline super-multicoated
5mm deep mount suitable for lenses wider than 24mm (full frame) or
18mm (APS-C format). Smaller sizes also available.
Hoyas premium filters have 8 layers of coating to give 99.35% light transmission.
Filter type
Slimline CP
Suffix
CPOLS
49
52
55
58
62
67
72
77
82
26.00 28.80 31.00 34.40 38.80 42.70 47.00 53.80 66.50
HMC multicoated
215.00
215.00
XS-Pro MRC Nano

With the same water and dust resistant coating as the MRC series, Nano filters are slimline types for use with super-wide lenses. They are
3mm thick (UV or Protector) or 5mm (polariser), and have a front thread to accept a lens hood. Ksemann polarisers
have higher efficiency polarising foils than the standard types, and are edge-sealed to protect against humidity.
Filter type
XS-PRO Protr 007
XS-PRO UV 010
XS-PRO Ksmn C Pol
FILTERS
Hoya
Suffix 49
52
55
58
60
62
67
72
77
82
86
MPX
35.80 35.80 39.70 44.50 68.50 51.30 57.00 67.60 81.00 97.70 119.00
MUVX 35.80 35.80 39.70 44.50 68.50 51.30 57.00 67.60 81.00 97.70 119.00
MCPX 87.80 91.60 99.30 102.00 130.70 108.80 130.80 146.00 167.00 202.40 250.00
MRC Graduated Neutral Density
Three layers of coating on both sides improves light transmission to around

98%. 5mm deep mount.
Filter type
UV(C) Digital
Skylight 1B
Yellow K2
Yellow-Green XO
Green X1
Orange G
Red 25A
81B
ND1000 (10 stops)
Suffix
HCUV
H1B
HY
HYG
HG
HO
HR
H81B
HNPD10
46
12.80
14.50
22.60
22.60
22.60
22.60
22.60
22.60
49
52
10.95 11.70
15.95 17.50
21.90 24.20
21.90 24.20
21.90 24.20
21.90 24.20
21.90 24.20
21.90 24.20
38.80 41.60
55
12.80
18.95
27.00
27.00
27.00
27.00
27.00
27.00
44.30
58
62
14.30 16.50
22.80 26.60
29.95 32.90
29.95 32.90
29.95 32.90
29.95 32.90
29.95 32.90
29.95 32.90
49.90 66.50
67
72
18.80 21.80
33.40 41.00
40.20 53.30
40.20 53.30
40.20 53.30
40.20 53.30
40.20 53.30
40.20 53.30
72.00 77.60
77
24.95
49.95
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
65.00
91.50
Highly durable HD filters use a newly

developed glass which is chemically
Filter type
Protector
UV
Circ. Polarising
Suffix
HDP
HDUV
HDCPOL
hardened to give 4x the strength of standard glass (ANSI test). In addition, the 8layer coatings are bonded to the glass in
furnace heat for best possible durability.
The top coating is designed to resist oil
stains, so fingerprints can be removed
much more easily. The polarising film is
the same as used in the latest HD LCD
screens, and has a 25% higher light transmission than those currently used in standard photographic polarising filters.
Ultra slim mounts UV and Protector filters
are just 3mm thick; the polariser 5mm, so
they can be used with ultra-wide lenses.
52
55
58
62
67
72
77
82
31.00 34.00 37.50 42.00 47.50 53.20 59.95 64.95
31.00 34.00 37.50 42.00 47.50 53.20 59.95 64.95
55.70 61.00 62.20 71.00 78.50 99.95 117.50 139.95
Tiffen
Multicoated ND graduated filters in rotating mount. Graduation set half way up the filter.
Filter type
1 stop (50%)
2 stops (25%)
Suffix 49
52
55
58
62
67
72
77
82
MNDG1 92.60 93.60 94.60 95.60 103.40 105.30 106.30 114.00 137.00
MNDG2 92.60 93.60 94.60 95.60 103.40 105.30 106.30 114.00 137.00
Neutral density standard coated filters

3, 6, or 10 stop density, supplied in 4mm F-Pro mounts.
Filter type
Suffix 52 55
58
62
67
72
77
ND 0.9 3 stops 103 ND103 48.80 49.70 49.70 62.40 70.20 76.95 77.95
ND 1.8 6 stops 106 ND106 49.00 49.95 53.80 72.00 77.80 89.30 99.95
ND 3.0 10 stops 110 ND110 51.00 51.90 54.60 73.00 78.95 90.70 102.40
Filter Product Codes

HOYA: HY followed by Suffix and
size. e.g. 52mm HD UV is HYHDUV52
B+W: BW followed by Suffix and
size. e.g MRC 77mm Circular
Polariser is BWMCPOL77
TIFFEN: TF followed by Suffix and
size. e.g. 58mm 10 stop ND is
TFND358
Variable Neutral
Density
This is a convenient tool for still
or video photographers wishing to
achieve precise aperture control in varying
lighting conditions.
The Variable ND works in a similar fashion to a polarising filter. The outer ring is rotated
to adjust the amount of light passing through the lens, giving continuous control over a
range from approximately 2.4 stops (ND0.6) to 8 stops (ND2.4).
The filter is oversized (77mm is 85mm diameter) to avoid vignetting occuring on wider
angle lenses, and is supplied with a cleaning cloth and padded pouch. Prices on the right
10 stop neutral density

Blurs movement of water and clouds. Makes crowds disappear in street scenes. Made in
USA. 5 star review from Amateur Photographer.
Filter type
10 stop ND
Variable ND
Suffix
ND3
VND
52
55
58
62
67
72
77
82
19.95 21.50 24.95 32.95 32.95 59.95 59.95 79.95
89.00 n.a 105.00 109.00 129.00 139.00 149.00 189.00
55
Cokin filters are square or oblong, and are made from

CR39 optical resin, which means they are strong and
light. Unlike glass filters, Cokin filters slide into a filter
holder which is then attached to the lens by means of an
adaptor ring. Graduated filters are oblong, rather
than square, which allows the point of graduation to be adjusted vertically to suit the scene
Filters & adaptors
Z-Pro Series 100mm

100mm wide filters,
compatible with other
100mm filter systems
such as Lee and Hitech,
supplied in suede-style
pouch with anti-static
lining. 100mm size
filters will be necessary
if ultra wide-angle
lenses of 17 or 18mm are to be used (1011mm on APS-C sensor DSLRs).
P Series 84mm
The most popular Cokin
system, 84mm wide, and
suitable for use with lenses
of 2024mm focal length
on full frame/ 35mm
format, 14mm on APS-C
sensor DSLR, or 50mm
with most 120 SLRs.
Adaptors are available from 49mm to
82mm, plus bayonet fittings.
Z-Pro Neutral Density Grad Kit
P Neutral Density Grad Kit

Contains P121L, P121M and P121S (1, 2
and 3 stop) graduates, plus a P series
filter holder. CKPNDGKIT 44.95
P Neutral Density Solid Kit

Soft cut 100mm grads in 1, 2, and 3 stop
density (Z121L, Z121M, and Z121S),
complete with holder, and Z306 Wallet.
CKU960 129.95
Z-Pro Filter Holder

Has slots for three 100mm wide, 4mm
thick filters. There is an extra slot on the
back to allow the holder to be reversed,
and a single filter used.
Z-Pro Holder CKBZ100 44.00
Z-Pro Filter Wallet

Takes 5 filters,
a holder and
adaptor rings.
CKZ306 26.30
Contains P152, P153 and P154 1, 2 and 3

stop solid filters, plus P series filter
holder. CKNDSKIT 44.95
P Landscape Kit 1
Contains P123S Blue Grad Soft, P037 81EF
warm-up, and P197 Sunset 1, plus P series
filter holder. CKPLKIT1 48.50
Kits do not include adaptor rings - see last
column for prices.
P Series Filter Holders

Standard P Holder CKBP400 10.00
Wide Angle P Series holder
Accepts one filter (can be a polariser) and
allows use with super-wide lenses (19
20mm on full frame). CKBPW700A 16.95
P Series accessories
CKP253
CKP255
CKP305
CKP306
56
Adaptor Cap . . . . . . . . . . . 4.90

Modular Hood . . . . . . . . . 14.20
Filter Box (10 filters) . . . 15.20
Filter Wallet (10 filters) . 22.60
Glass ND Stoppers
Cokin Filter Codes

CK followed by type, then filter number.
e.g. P series 121M grad is CKP121M
Description
Cokin
Lee
Number P type Z-Pro

Code Prefix CKP... CKZ...
Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . 001 12.95 29.20
Orange . . . . . . . . . . . 002 12.95 29.20
Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 003 12.95 29.20
Green . . . . . . . . . . . . 004 12.95 29.20
Sepia . . . . . . . . . . . . . 005 12.95 29.20
Yellow/Green . . . . . . . 006 12.95 29.20
Infra Red 720 (89B) . 007 30.70 59.95
Blue 80A . . . . . . . . . . 020 12.95 32.30
Warm 81A . . . . . . . . . 026 12.95 32.30
Warm 81B . . . . . . . . . 027 12.95 32.30
Warm 81C . . . . . . . . . 028 12.95 32.30
Star 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 057 19.60 n.a
Star 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . 058 19.60 n.a
Close-up +1 . . . . . . . . 101 24.60 n.a
Close-up +2 . . . . . . . . 102 24.60 n.a
Close-up +3 . . . . . . . . 103 24.60 n.a
ND Grad ND2 (1 stop) 121L 18.95 39.95
ND Grad ND4 (2 stop) 121M 18.95 39.95
ND Grad ND8 (3 stop) 121S 18.95 39.95
ND Grad Full ND8 . . . . 121F 18.95 n.a
Blue 1 Grad . . . . . . . . 122 18.95 41.70
Blue 2 Grad . . . . . . . . 123 18.95 41.70
Tobacco 1 Grad . . . . . 124 18.95 44.00
Tobacco 2 Grad . . . . . 125 18.95 44.00
Neutral Density ND2 . 152 14.60 35.40
Linear Polarising . . . . 160 43.00 139.00
Circular Polarising . . . 164 67.95 215.00
Sunset 2 . . . . . . . . . . 198 28.95 48.40
Diffuser 1 . . . . . . . . . 830 17.90 43.80
Diffuser 2 . . . . . . . . . 840 17.90 43.80
Diffuser 3 . . . . . . . . . 850 17.90 43.80
Adaptors
Description
Number P type
Code Prefix CKP...
49mm . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 9.95
52mm . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 9.95
55mm . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 9.95
58mm . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 9.95
62mm . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 9.95
67mm . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 9.95
72mm . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 9.95
77mm . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 9.95
82mm . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 9.95
86mm (pitch 0.75) . . 486A n.a
86mm (pitch 1.00) . . 486B n.a
Medium format adaptors (P type)
Hasselblad Series 50 . 401 28.20
Universal . . . . . . . . . . 499 22.60
Z-Pro
CKZ...
18.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
22.20
22.20
22.20
n.a
31.20
31.20
n.a
for GoPro
Create professional
GoPro movies
using professional quality
filters! Available
for Hero 3 and 3+
cameras.
Seven5 Deluxe Kit
Action Kit
A 3-stop ND Grad balances the sky with
foreground, and the Polariser improves
contrast and reduces glare when filming
over water or snow. Includes push-on
holder, cleaning cloth and pouch.
LEBUG3AK Hero 3
59.00
LEBUG3PAK Hero 3+ 66.00
75mm Filter System

The Seven5 system offers smaller and lighter filters and accessories for users of compact
system or rangefinder cameras, but its equally useful for any camera type up to a
maximum filter size of 72mm but bear in mind that the smaller filter size will cause
vignetting with very wide angle lenses.
Underwater Kit
Seven5
Adaptor
Rings
Green and Blue water filters give accurate colours. Includes push-on holder,
cleaning cloth and pouch.
LEBUG3UK Hero 3
45.00
LEBUG3PAu Hero 3+ 52.50
Seven5 Starter Kit

Contains one Seven5 Filter Holder and one
0.6ND (2 stop) hard grad. Requires an
adaptor ring to mount on lens (extra
item). LE75SK 109.00
Seven5 Holder
Lightweight, slimline aluminium holder
which locks on to the adaptor ring quickly
with a spring-loaded clamp. It can then be
easily rotated as required. Reference
markings for use with graduated filters on
cameras without direct viewing, are
moulded into the front. LE75HS 66.00
Seven5 Filter Sets
Black anodised
metal rings for
a wide variety
of still and
video cameras. These rings will also fit the
older RF75 Holder. All sizes are 17.95
LE75A37
37mm LE75A55
LE75A39
39mm LE75A58
LE75A40
40mm LE75A60
LE75A405 40.5mm LE75A62
LE75A43
43mm LE75A67
LE75A46
46mm LE75A72
LE75A49
49mm LE75AX100
LE75A52
52mm
55mm
58mm
60mm
62mm
67mm
72mm
Fuji X
All of the filters in these sets are complementary to the one included in the Starter
Kit, so they are a great
way to increase
your filter
collection and
save money over
the price of the
separate
items.
Out of Town Set

Good for landscape photography.
Contains:
0.6 (2 stops) Soft ND Grad
0.9 (3 stops) Hard ND Grad
Big Stopper 10 stop solid ND
LE75OTS 159.00
Seascape Set
Seven5 Lens Hood

Made from rubber,
mounts on to the
front of the
Seven5
Holder. The
Circular
Polariser
can be
fitted inside
and rotated.
LE75HOOD
79.00
The (almost) complete neutral density and

polarising package, with Filter Holder (the
adaptor ring is extra).
Seven5 Filter Holder
Circular Polariser
Big Stopper 10 Stop ND
0.6 (2 stop) soft grad
0.6 (2 stop) hard grad
0.9 (3 stop) hard grad
LE75DS 439.95
Seven5 Circular Polariser

Bayonets on to 4
studs on the front
of the Holder and
rotates independently of any grad
being used.
LE75CP 189.95
Both grads are hard cut, so better for

sharply delineated horizons. Contains:
0.3 (1 stop) Hard ND Grad
0.9 (3 stops) Hard ND Grad
LE75SS 159.00
Urban Set
Soft cut grads work better on flat or
textured areas. Contains:
LE75US 159.00
6 and 10 stop glass neutral

density filters which
enable either a
wide aperture to
be selected to
create shallower
depth of field, or a
long shutter speed to enhance the movement effects of water or remove moving
subjects from images. The Little Stopper
will give the same effects under reduced
lighting (e.g twilight) as the Big Stopper
in bright daytime light.
LE75ND06 Little Stopper 6 stops . . . 61.00
LE75ND10 Big Stopper 10 stops. . . . 61.00
Pro Glass ND
High quality neutral density filters with a
flat response from UV end to the IR end of
the spectrum.
LE75PGND6 ND0.6 (2 stops) . . . . . 124.50
LE75PGND9 ND0.9 (3 stops) . . . . . 124.50
ND Grad Sets
Contain 0.3, 0.6
and 0.9 (1, 2, and
3 stop) Graduated
neutral density
filters, in either
hard or soft cut
(transition).
145.60
LE75NDSH Hard Grad Set
LE75NDSS Soft Grad Set
Individual ND Graduated
All types 56.00
LE75NDG03S
0.3 Grad Soft
LE75NDG03H 0.3 Grad Hard
LE75NDG06S
0.6 Grad Soft
LE75NDG09S
0.9 Grad Soft
Black and White Set

Contrast filters for black and white
photography. Contains:
Yellow 8 (medium contrast for clouds)
Yellow Green 11 (as above but better
for scenes with foliage)
Red 23A (dramatic contrast between
clouds and sky; lightens brickwork)
LE75BWS 149.95
Seven5 Triple Filter Wrap
Microfibre folding wrap, to hold 3 filters in
individual
pockets.
LE75FW
5.80
57
Lee
Bellows Lens Hoods
Glass filters
100mm System
Lee is one of the worlds leading
manufacturers of filters for cinema
and professional use. The Lee
100mm size camera system enables
use of all but the very widest angle
lenses. Graduated filters are 150 x
100mm size, which gives a larger range
of adjustment for the line of graduation.
All resin filters are hand made from the
finest polymeric resin with stringent
quality control procedures guaranteeing
batch to batch consistency. The filter
holder is adjustable for 2mm or 4mm
filters, and can take Cokin P or Hitech

types with optional adaptors. Lee bellows
hoods are self-supporting, and do not
require the use of bulky and heavy rails.
Filter Holders
Digital SLR Starter Kit
Polarising
Universal Hood
175x145mm size allows use of wider angle
lenses without the bulk of the Wide Angle
Hood. Comes with two filter slots which
can be detached. LEBLHU 129.95
LEFK
Foundation Kit . . . . . . . . 55.00
LEPK
Professional Kit. . . . . . . 114.95
LEUK
Upgrade Kit. . . . . . . . . . . 72.50
LETA
Tandem Adaptor . . . . . . . 21.00
LEPUH
100mm Push-on holder. 114.95
Special versions of the push-on holder with
reducing doughnuts can be ordered.
Pro Glass ND filters
Adaptor Rings
Sturdy and long-lasting, with aluminium
screw thread. Wide-angle adaptors have a
recessed thread, and should be used when
the standard adaptor causes vignetting
with a wide-angle lens.
LEA49
49mm standard. . . . . . . . 18.95
LEA52
52mm standard. . . . . . . . 18.95
LEA55
55mm standard. . . . . . . . 18.95
LEA58
58mm standard. . . . . . . . 18.95
LEA62
62mm standard. . . . . . . . 18.95
LEA67
67mm standard. . . . . . . . 18.95
LEA72
72mm standard. . . . . . . . 18.95
LEA77
77mm standard. . . . . . . . 18.95
LEA82
82mm standard. . . . . . . . 41.00
LEA86
86mm standard. . . . . . . . 41.00
LEA93
93mm standard. . . . . . . . 57.50
LEA95
95mm standard. . . . . . . . 57.50
LEA96
96mm standard. . . . . . . . 57.50
LEA105 105mm standard. . . . . . . 57.50
LEACT17 Canon 17mm TS-E . . . . . 57.50
LEA50H Hasselblad Series 50 . . . . 41.00
LEW49
49mm wide-angle . . . . . . 37.50
LEW52
52mm wide-angle . . . . . . 37.50
LEW55
55mm wide-angle . . . . . . 37.50
LEW58
58mm wide-angle . . . . . . 37.50
LEW62
62mm wide-angle . . . . . . 37.50
LEW67
67mm wide-angle . . . . . . 37.50
LEW72
72mm wide-angle . . . . . . 37.50
LEW77
77mm wide-angle . . . . . . 37.50
LEW82
82mm wide-angle . . . . . . 42.50
58
The round 105mm polariser shown here

reduces vignetting problems and attaches to
the holder via an adaptor ring.
LEPL
Square Linear Polariser . 134.95
LEPLC
Square Circular Polariser 146.95
LEPL105 105mm Linear Polariser 139.95
LEPLC105 105mm Circular Polariser214.95
LEPLL105 105mm Landscape Pol . 174.00
LEPLRING 105mm Adaptor Ring . . . 33.50
Two 2-stop neutral density filters to give

improved lighting control, for the digital
photographer who plans to colour balance
on a computer. Comprises:
Pre-assembled Filter Holder
0.6 ND hard grad
ProGlass ND0.6 ND solid filter
Cleaning cloth
3 Filter Triple Pouch
LEDSTART 209.95
Wide Angle Hood

Large 210x160mm hood gives optimum
shading on ultra wide lenses. Comes with
two filter slots which can be used singly or
together, or not at all. LEBLHW 186.50
Holder accessories
Adaptor Ring Caps
can be used to
white balance or as
makeshift incident
meter! Pack of 3.
LECAPS 3.80
Filter Holder Starter Kit

The choice for a film or digital photographer requiring a warm up filter. The kit
contains a pre-assembled Filter Holder,
0.6 ND hard grad, Coral 3 grad with an
extended colour area so that it can also be
used as a warm-up, cleaning cloth, plus a
3 Filter Triple Pouch to keep it all in.
LESTART 149.95
Very high quality neutral density filters,

optimised for use with digital cameras,
but equally useful for film. The even
response through the visible, and into the
UV and IR spectra, ensures an absence of
the colour casts which can occur with
some DSLRs. Both types 119.95
LEPGND6 ProGlass ND0.6 (2 stops)
LEPGND9 ProGlass ND0.9 (3 stops)
Rangefinder Face Blades

Calibrated metal blades to allow
quick and consistent grad
positioning on non-TTL
cameras. LEBRF 12.60
LECPMTG
LECPMTS
LEPMT
LEPMT10
LEG1
LEG2
LEG4
LESS1
LESS2
LESS3
LESS4
Cokin P mounts x 3 (grad) 8.00

Cokin P mounts x 3 (sq) . . 8.00
Polyester filter mount (1) . 2.00
Polyester filter mts (10) . 16.00
1mm filter guides . . . . . . . 2.85
2mm filter guides . . . . . . . 2.85
4mm filter guides . . . . . . . 2.85
No.1 screw set (4 x 1/2) . 1.20
No.2 screw set (4 x 5/8) . 1.20
No.3 screw set (4 x 3/4) . 1.20
No.4 screw set (4 x 7/8) . 1.20
Little and Big Stoppers

Square, very dense glass ND filters allowing creative long exposures. The Little
Stopper is 6 stop density and is more practical in lower light levels than the 10 stop
Big Stopper which is preferable in normal
daylight conditions. Supplied in a robust
tin (see below). Both types 99.00
LEPGND06 Little Stopper (6 stops)
LEPGND10 Big Stopper (10 stops)
Big Stopper Tin
Foam-lined tin, as
supplied with Big and
Little Stoppers. Existing
owners may wish to
upgrade; also suits Pro
Glass NDs. LEBST 6.20
Resin filters
Tough, easy to handle and clean, and
hand made to exacting standards. Many
are available in kits, saving on separate
prices, in a handy folding wrap holder.
Graduated types are available in soft
(slow) transition, or hard (fast).
Resin sets are supplied in a microfibre folding wrap, also available separately. Single resins come in a padded
pouch.
Neutral density grad filter sets

ND Kits contain ND0.3 (1 stop) ND0.6 (2
stop) ND0.9 (3 stop) densities in either soft
or hard graduation, and are supplied in
soft 3-filter wrap.
LENDSETS Soft ND Grad Set . . . . . . 179.95
LENDSETH Hard ND Grad Set . . . . . 179.95
Neutral density graduated
Neutral density solid

LERND03 ND0.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81.00
LERND045 ND0.45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81.00
LERND06 ND0.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81.00
LERND075 ND0.75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81.00
LERND09 ND0.9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81.00
LERND12 ND1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121.50
Resin filter sets
LEATSET
LECOSET
LELANSET
LESKBSET
LESKSET
LESSET
LESUNSET
LETWSET
Autumn Tint Set . . . . . . . 99.95

Coral Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99.95
Landscape Set. . . . . . . . . 99.95
Sky Blue Set . . . . . . . . . . 99.95
Sky Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99.95
Stripe Set . . . . . . . . . . . . 99.95
Sunset Set. . . . . . . . . . . . 99.95
Twilight Set. . . . . . . . . . . 99.95
Polyester filters
Single filters, in padded pouch.

LENDG03S ND0.3 Grad Soft . . . . . . 76.00
LENDG045S ND0.45 Grad Soft . . . . . 76.00
LENDG03H ND0.3 Grad Hard . . . . . 76.00
LENDG045H ND0.45 Grad Hard . . . . 76.00
100x100mm. Can easily be cut to any

special size. Single filters supplied
unmounted.
LEPIR
87 infra-red . . . . . . . . . . 17.00
LEPND3 Neutral Density 0.3 . . . . . 22.50
Polyester sets
LEPBWS Black and White Set . . . . 34.00
LEPCTS
Colour Temperature Set . 34.00
LEPFCTS Fine CT Set . . . . . . . . . . . 34.00
LEPNDS Neutral Density Set . . . . . 34.00
LEPSFS Soft Focus Set . . . . . . . . . 34.00
LEPWUS Warm Up Set . . . . . . . . . . 34.00
Filter protection
Multi-filter pouch
Field Pouch
Holds 10 filters and
can be attached to a
belt or, with the
supplied strap, carried
over a shoulder or
slung from a
tripod. 36.50
LEFFPB black
LEFFPB sand
Filter Wrap
Toolroll style soft enclosure for 3 filters,
as supplied with resin sets. LEFW 5.80
SW150 150mm Filter System
Zip wallet style

taking 10
filters in
anti-static
sleeves.
LEFP 36.50
3 Filter Triple Pouch

Carry your favourite resin
set on location (or
holder and
rings). Has
belt loops.
LETP 26.50
See also Lowepro Filter Pouch 100 on
page 12 and MindShift Filter Hive on page 11
Developed for use with the Nikon

1424mm zoom, the SW150 system will be
adaptable to other similar superwide
lenses with a protruding front element.
The graduated filters are 150x170mm, and
the solid grads 150x150mm.
Note that there is no Big Stopper nor
Polariser for this system
SW150 System
Adaptor
Enables the SW150
Filter Holder to be used
with Lee 100mm System
adaptor rings, and thus
fit other super-wide
lenses. LE150SA 45.80
SW150 Starter Kit

Filter Holder
Adaptor Collar
0.6ND Grad Hard
Lens Cover
Cleaning Cloth LE150SK 299.95
Single neutral density graduates
LE150NDG3S ND Grad 0.3 Soft . . . . 89.30
LE150NDG3H ND Grad 0.3 Hard . . . . 89.30
LE150NDG6H ND Grad 0.6 Hard. . . . 89.30
LE150NDG9H ND Grad 0.9 Hard. . . . 89.30
Single neutral density solids
LE150ND3
ND Grad 0.3 . . . . . . . . 98.50
LE150ND6
ND Grad 0.6 . . . . . . . 98.50
LE150ND9
ND Grad 0.9 . . . . . . . 98.50
Lee books and DVDs

Inspiring Professionals
Inspriring Professionals 2
A wealth of inspiring
photography from
some of the worlds
leading professionals, including Joe
Cornish, Charlie
Waite, David Noton
and others, showing
how Lee filters will
enable you (with application and vision!)
to achieve stunning pictures. Hardback
132pp. LEBOOK 10.00
Complements the
first book, themed
around Buildings,
Coast, Handheld
and Travel,
Mountains, Sky,
Snow and Ice, and
Water. Also
features several
technical articles on colour, composition,
photo stitching, and unconventional uses
for an ND Grad. LEBOOK2 12.50
Chasing the Light
With Landscape in Mind
A DVD exploring the

essentials of landscape
photography. Acclaimed
international photographer David Noton examines the process of developing a photographic
vision with practical
hands-on demonstrations, insights, and
examples at inspiring UK locations, such
as a misty dawn at Glastonbury and
autumn in the New Forest. LEDVD 21.00
Top UK photographer
Joe Cornish takes a
photographic road trip
across the north of
England, from the
industrial mouth of the
River Tees, through the
Yorkshire Dales, to the
Lake District. Along the way he shows how
the contrasts between mans activity and
the natural landscape can be used to
create great images. LEDVD2 21.00
59
Lee Colour Magic
An inexpensive way to experiment with

colour filtration. Each set contains six to
twelve 10 x 12 polyester filters and cutting
tool. They can be used over any light
source. Some sets, like the Original Pack,
are designed for experimenting - this can
create 50 different colours from 12 filters.
Others give fine control over studio light
sources.
All packs priced at
Canon
filters
CAPR52
CACPOL52
CAPR58
CACPOL58
CAPR67
CACPOL67
CAPR72
CACPOL72
CAPR77
CACPOL77
CAPR82
52mm Protector . . . . . . . 20.00

52mm Circular Polarising . 94.50
58mm Protector . . . . . . . 25.00
58mm Circular Polarising . 99.95
67mm Protector . . . . . . . 48.00
67mm Circular Polarising 152.00
72mm Protector . . . . . . . 45.00
77mm Protector . . . . . . . 48.00
82mm Protector . . . . . . . 75.00
Nikon
filters
NKCP52 52mm Circ Polarising-II . 76.50

NKNC58 58mm Neutral Colour . . . 28.95
NKCPOL58 58mm Circ Polarising-II . 88.70
NKCP62 62mm Circular Polarising 99.95
NKCPOL67 67mm Circ Polarising-II 114.50
NKCPOL72 72mm Circ Polarising-II. 124.95
NKCPOL77 77mm Circ Polarising-II. 138.95
B+W Single Filter Cases
Op/tech Filter Pack
LECMST Studio Pack

Technical filters for basic light control:
201 Full CTB, 281 3/4 CTB, 204 Full CTO,
285 3/4 CTO, 298 0.15ND, 209 0.3ND, 210
O.6ND, 211 0.9ND.
CTB filters convert tungsten to daylight;
CTO filters convert daylight to tungsten.
As supplied with B+W filters, translucent
impact resistant plastic with high density
foam rubber insert. Three sizes:
BWFC52 Filters up to 52mm . . . . . . 5.00
BWFC77 Filters up to 77mm . . . . . . 6.00
BWFC105 Filters up to 105mm . . . . . 6.50
A secure way of carrying or protecting two

filters (up to 77mm). This neoprene case
contains two pockets and protects against
dust, moisture and impact. It can be
attached to clothing or equipment via a
snap hook. OPFP 8.95
B+W Filter Pouches
Filter wrenches
LECMO Original Pack

Creates 50 colours from 12:
101 Yellow, 116 Med. Blue Green, 118 Light
Blue, 122 Fern Green, 126 Mauve, 128
Bright Pink, 129 Heavy Frost, 144 No
Colour Blue, 179 Chrome Orange, 180 Dark
Lavender, 192 Flesh Pink, 228 Brushed Silk.
LECMARC
LECMLT
LECMSAT
LECMSTP
LECMT
60
Arc Correction
Light Tint
Saturates
Studio Plus
Tints
Buying a full set of filters for each lens

size can be a costly business.
Occasionally-used filters can be adapted
by means of one of these rings. Stepping
down by about 4mm on standard or tele
focal lengths is usually OK, but definitely
not for wide-angles. Its best therefore to
standardise on your largest lens size and
step up to this from smaller sizes.
All sizes listed below each 5.25
Branded
Schneider
Kreuznach: made
from durable
water and abrasion
resistant nylon fabric. Lined with foam
material, with Velcro closing and clear
plastic window for identification tag.
BWFPE1 11.5x11.5cm up to 77mm . 5.75
BWFPE2 14.5x14.5cm up to 105mm 8.50
Novoflex Zebra
with white and 18%

reflectance grey sides. Two sizes available.
NVZEBRA 20x15cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.00
NVZEBRAXL30x21cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.00
Unjamb filters which have become stuck

on a lens, or together. Supplied as a pair.
Two sizes available:
KDWRS Wrenches 48-58mm . . . . . 2.95
KDWRL
Wrenches 62-77mm . . . . . 3.95
Alternative filter removal method: press a
(clean) rubber shoe heel against the front
edge of the filter and twist hard.
Step-up
KDSU2749 2749
KDSU2837 2837
KDSU3037 3037
KSSU3046 3046
KDSU3049 3049
KDSU30546 30.5-46
KDSU30549 30.5-49
KDSU35537 35.5-37
KDSU35549 35.5-49
KDSU3746 3746
KDSU3749 3749
KDSU3752 3752
KDSU37546 37.546
KDSU37546 37.546
KDSU3949 3949
KDSU3952 3952
KDSU40543 40.543
KDSU40546 40.546
KDSU40549 40.549
KDSU40552 40.552
KDSU4346 4346
KDSU4349 4349
KDSU4352 4352
KDSU4649 4649
KDSU4652 4652
KDSU4655 4655
KDSU4658 4658
KDSU4952 4952
KDSU4955 4955
KDSU4958 4958
KDSU4962 4962
KDSU4967 4967
KDSU5255 5255
KDSU5258 5258
KDSU5262 5262
KDSU5267 5267
KDSU5558 5558
KDSU5562 5562
KDSU5567
KDSU5862
KDSU5867
KDSU5872
KDSU5877
KDSU6062
KDSU6267
KDSU6272
KDSU6277
KDSU6772
KDSU6777
KDSU6782
KDSU6972
KDSU6977
KDSU7277
KDSU7282
KDSU7286
KDSU7782
KDSU7786
KDSU8286
5567
5862
5867
5872
5877
6062
6267
6272
6277
6772
6777
6782
6972
6977
7277
7282
7286
7782
7786
8286
Step down
KDSD4946
KDSD5249
KDSD5549
KDSD5552
KDSD5849
KDSD5852
KDSD5855
KDSD6252
KDSD6255
KDSD6258
KDSD6762
KDSD7262
KDSD7267
KDSD7762
KDSD7772
KDSD8272
KDSD8277
4946
5249
5549
5552
5849
5852
5855
6252
6255
6258
6762
7262
7267
7762
7772
8272
8277
ExpoDisc 2.0 White Balance
ColorChecker Passport
Lastolite XpoBalance
Made
from
flexible
synthetic
material,
Lastolite Ezybalance
1850
Other Colour Magic Packs
Exposure/white balance aids
Filter accessories
LECMCOM Complementary Pack

Explore the basics of colour addition and
subtraction:
164 Flame Red, 124 Dark Green, 119 Dark
Blue, 176 Loving Amber, 174 Dark Steel
Blue, 138 Pale Green, 101 Yellow, 115
Peacock Blue, 128 Bright Pink, 007 Pale
Yellow, 117 Steel Blue, 035 Light Pink.
Stepping rings
Gives accurate colour or exposure rendition with either an 18% reflectance grey
or white surface. Small to store, quick to
pop up for use, the grey side includes a
target for autofocusing cameras. The 12%
reflectance version is optimised for use
with cameras (e.g. Nikon) with a factory
set-up which uses a 12% grey.
LABL1250 30cm (12) . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95
LABL1254 30cm 12% reflectance. . . 19.95
LABL2050 50cm (20) . . . . . . . . . . . 31.50
LABL3050 75cm (30) . . . . . . . . . . . 48.95
Enables digital camera users to set white

balance and achieve accurate exposure. It
can be used either pre- or post-capture.
The XpoBalance has two sides, each
with three sections. On one side white,
black and 18% reflectance grey; on the
other three tones of grey calculated to
give normal exposure, one stop under,
and one stop over.
For the photographer working under
pressure the XpoBalance can save valuable
time by allowing precise exposure adjustment to be made at the computer, rather
than at the time of taking the shot.
Just include a shot of the XpoBalance
in each lighting situation and then use the
black/white/grey side with the Photoshop
dropper tool to adjust for shadows, highlights or midtones as required in Levels, or
the three grey side to set exposure over or
under by one stop.
Save the settings, and then apply
these to all the other photos taken in the
same lighting to achieve consistent results
across all the shots.
The 38cm XpoBalance collapses into a
handy and lightweight 15cm diameter
bag. LA1558 35.50
The ExpoDisc eliminates the inconsistencies

of using white or grey cards, or timeconsuming post-shoot computer alterations. Its a neutral diffusion filter that
passively transmits 18% of the ambient
light to the cameras meter, effectively
producing a grey frame. 77mm in diameter, it can be used with any camera offering
custom white balance. Just hold in front of
the lens, follow the custom white balance
instructions for your camera, and in about
15 secs you have perfect colour balance,
elimiating the inconsistencies of the builtin white balance options. Complete with
test certificate, lanyard and case.
EXD2 39.95
Lastolite TriBalance
Using a grey card
At the point of exposure zoom in on
the card or
Ezybalance
so that it fills
the screen,
and then use
the cameras
custom
white balance setting, or to. . .
Process after the exposure include
the card in a reference shot. In
Photoshop open up the Levels control,
select the middle (grey) Eyedropper tool
and then click on the grey card.This will
set the white balance correctly for the

shot, and if there is a sequence of
pictures all taken under the same lighting
conditions, this setting can be automatically applied to those as well.
The same shape and size as a TriGrip, this

has a white/black/grey pattern as the
XpoBalance on one side, with a useful
silver reflector to fill in shadows on the
other. 75cm size. LA3658 79.95
The first standalone DNG and RAW profiling solution for use within any RAW file
editor. The Passport has three targets:
Creative Enhancement Target: evaluates highlight and shadow detail,
warming and cooling patches
Classic Target: a miniature version of
the 24-patch standard target
White Balance Target: get more accurate colour from the off
Target size 125x90mm. Includes camera
calibration software to create DNG profiling for your camera. CCXCCP 72.50
The
DEPSSI Card
Stands for Depth of Field, Sunrise and
Sunset Indicator. Its a totally waterproof
credit-card sized aid to determining where
the sun will rise and set (in the UK and in
European countries between 45-55 latitude N). Just align the card with True
North and read off the indication.
On the reverse is a guide to determining the hyperfocal focusing point for a
given lens focal length and aperture. By
selecting this point, maximum depth-offield is obtained.
There are two versions of the card to
cater for full-frame digital and 35mm
cameras, and the other for 1.5/1.6x multiplier APS-C sized digital sensors. 2.99
BPDCF
Green card (full-frame/35mm)
BPDCA
Blue card (1.5/1.6x sensor)
61
Ambient light meters
Dual-purpose flash and ambient
Ambient light refers to a continuous light source, usually daylight, but it could be a
studio or portable LED light as well. You might need a meter to use with an old camera,
or for use in a studio just using tungsten, fluorescent or LED illumination. Both photo
meters will measure incident light (you point the meter towards the light source) which
gives accurate results in tricky situations something a DSLR cant do.
Flash meters, as the name implies, measure the instantaneous light from flash, and this
function is combined with continuous (ambient) light metering as well. So for most
people, one of the sub-200 models is all they will ever need in a meter. More advanced
photographers will appreciate the extra sensitivity, spot metering, and ability to simultaneously measure flash and ambient lighting which some of the other models include.
Sekonic L-208 Twinmate
Sekonic L-398A
Sekonic L-308S
Gossen Sixtomat F2
Compact ambient meter for both incident

and reflected light, via a simple built-in
sliding diffuser. The red needle stays in
position for 15 seconds after the reading
is taken, and the green needle is matched
to it by rotating the dial. The reading can
then be read off the scale.
The L-398A Deluxe II is a

classic selenium cell
powered meter for
incident or
reflected light
readings. Its
robust construction and
battery-free
operation have
made it a
favourite for
college use. The
receptor swivels
180 so you can
point it at a light
source and take the
reading, and holding down the button
allows a continuous check of light levels
around a set or studio.
A very popular meter,

small enough to slip
into a shirt pocket.
The LCD display
shows the shutter
speed selected,
measured aperture,
ISO and battery
settings, and gives
a choice of 1/4 or
1/3 stop increments to match the
cameras setting.
A slim versatile
meter, which offers
aperture priority as
well as the more
usual shutter priority metering, and a
very good low light
capability, measuring incident or
reflected light.
Analogue contrast
display in flash
metering mode.
EV range 317 @ 100ISO

Speeds 30 secs1/8000th
Apertures f1.4f32 (in 1/2 stops)
ISO range 1212500
33 measuring angle
Uses 1 x CR2032 (supplied). Includes case.
SE208 82.50
EV range 417 @100ISO

Speeds 60sec1/8000th
Apertures f0.7f128
ISO range 612000
Cine speeds 8128fps
Includes case and strap.
SE398A 146.95
Ambient metering
019.9 @100ISO
Speeds 60 secs1/8000th
Apertures f0.5f90
ISO range 38000
1/10th stop accuracy. Last setting
retained in memory.
Flash metering
Speeds 1 sec1/500th
Apertures f1.4f90
Uses 1 x AA (supplied)
SE308S 139.95
Ambient metering
EV range -2.518
Speeds 60 mins1/8000th
Apertures f1f90
ISO range 38000
Cine speeds 8-64fps inc 25 and 30TV
Flash metering
Speeds 1 sec1/1000th, plus 1/90th
Apertures f1f90
Up to 10 multiple flash memory
Uses 1 x AA (supplied).
GSSF2 179.00
Polaris
Sekonic L-478DR
Similar spec to the

Sekonic L-308S
and a little
larger, but with
the benefit of a
bigger and
clearer digital
display.
Ambient
metering
019.9
@100ISO
Speeds 60
secs1/8000th
Apertures f0.7f45
ISO range 38000
Scale indicates 1/10th stop increments
Flash metering
Speeds 1 sec1/500th
Apertures f0.5f90
Multiple 9 flash memory
Uses 1 x AA (not supplied)
PM1 129.95
Designed for use in both

still image and video
photography, with
intuitive touchscreen control, builtin PocketWizard triggering, including
compatibility with
Control TL
transceivers.
Ambient metering
-222.9 @100ISO
Speeds 30
mins1/64000th
Apertures f0.5f161
ISO range 3409,600 in 1/3 stops
9 ambient, and an infinite number of
flash readings can be averaged
Flash metering
Apertures f0.5f161
Uses 2 x AAA batteries (supplied)
SE458DR 324.95
Colour meter
Professionals realise the importance of getting colour right at the taking stage, especially with digital capture, as hours saved in post-processing means money saved as
well. A colour meter will tell the user exactly which filtration is required to meet the
desired colour balance. Note that there is no exposure measurement built in.
Sekonic C-500 Pro Digi

Now the only readily available colour meter, the Pro Digi is also
the most modern, capable of compensating for the different
colour characteristics of film and digital camera sensors in the red
spectrum. To achieve this, the C-500 incorporates two red
sensors, one for film measurement, and one for digital.
Measures flash and ambient light simultaneously
Measures illuminance values in lux or foot-candle
Colour temperature can be displayed in Kelvin, or in light
balancing, or colour compensation values
19 preset white blanace/colour compensation values can be
stored for regularly used film types, camera sensors etc.
Memory function allows light sources to be compared
Uses 2 x AA batteries (supplied).
SEC500
C-500 Pro Digi 889.95
SEC500R
C-500R Pro Digi (with radio trigger) 969.95
62
Gossen Digisky
Gossen Starlite 2
With built-in Elinchrom Skyport compatible triggering, colour graphic display and
touch sensitive thumb ring controller, the
Digisky is a
truly cutting
edge modern
meter design.
The ring
controller
allows onehanded operation, and
two adjacent
buttons select
memory and
analysis functions. Up to 4
groups of
flashguns on
8 frequencies
can be
controlled via
the Skyport
triggering.
Gossens top of the range

meter, with
comprehensive
cine, zone
system and
photometric
metering
options as
well as for
photo applications . It
has 1 or 5
spot metering as well as
standard
incident/
reflective, a
water-resistant housing,
and auto
calculation of
Polaroid
exposure
value.
Ambient metering
EV range -2.518 @100ISO
Apertures f1f128 in full, 1/2 or 1/3
stops
ISO range 313000
Built-in rechargeable Li-ion battery
(charger included)
3 user-definable profiles
Rotatable diffuser with flat or 180
metering
Firmware updatable via USB
Flash metering
Speeds 1 sec-1/1000th
Apertures f1f90
With case and strap.
GSDSKY 299.95
Ambient metering
EV range -2.518 @100ISO
Apertures f0.5f128
ISO range 38000 in 1/3 stops
Cine speeds 2360fps
Photometric readings in lx, fc, cd/m2,
fL, lxs, cds/m2, fLs
Zone scale 0X
Ambient/flash ratio readout
9 memories for ambient or flash
Flash metering
Speeds 1 sec1/1000th
Apertures f1f128
Uses 1 x AA (supplied) Includes case and
strap.
GSSTAR 439.95
Meter accessories
Sekonic NP Degree Finder
Sekonic L-758D
METERS
Ambient metering
EV range -222.9 max @100ISO
Apertures f0.5f161 in 1/10th stops
Aperture or shutter-priority or EV
metering modes
ISO range 38000
Cine speeds from 2360fps
9 readings can be averaged
Mid-tone adjustment mode
Built-in dioptric adjustment
Flash metering
Speeds 30 mins 1/1000th
Apertures f0.5f161
Up to 9 repeat flash memory
Uses 1 x CR123A battery (included).
L-758D
SE758D 399.95
Gossen Battery Adaptor

Older meters like the Lunasix
take a now-unavailable
PX625 battery. You can use a
Wein cell (p65), or adapt the
readily available 1.5v PX76
(10L14) button cell to the correct 1.35v
using this accessory. GSBA 36.95
Sekonic T-style sync cord

5m long, interconnects camera, meter and
flash.
SESC 32.95
Fits L-478 and L-478DR

meters to give a 5 spot
reading area. Also
required if you are calibrating the meter using
the Sekonic Data
Transfer Software and
Exposure Profile Target. SENP2 94.95
Sekonic L-398 Slide Set

Set of 11 slides and case to provide an
instant readout
of aperture
against a set
shutter speed.
SESS 52.95
Grey cards are on page 61
A professional meter with 1 spot facility

which can be precisely matched to the
camera in use. Every digital camera or film
has its own limited tonal range which it
can capture (its dynamic range).
With digital cameras this varies depending
on the sensor type, processor and type of
file compression used. Using the Sekonic
Exposure Profile Target (not supplied) a
cameras exposure profile can be evaluated via a computer and then transferred
to the meter by USB cable. Data can also
be entered directly into the meter. Up to 3
profiles can be stored. In use, if highlights
or shadows fall out of the range of the
camera or film selected, warning indicators blink on the LCD scale.
Sekonic RT-32CTL Radio

Triggering Module
The RT-32CTL is a PocketWizard (Plus
series, MultiMax and Control TL) compatible transmitter which plugs into the rear
compartment of L-358 and L-758 meters.
Channels are selectable through the meter
menu, it can control mixed standard and
TTL receivers at the same time, and it
supports Control TL tri-zones.
SERT32 104.50
The L-758D can be upgraded when required

to L-758DR specification by adding the RT32CTL radio triggering module.
L-758DR
As the L-758, but includes 4-channel
PocketWizard compatible radio trigger.
SE758DR 439.95
L-758C
Specialist cine/video model offering the
photo specification plus a full range of
speeds, fps and shutter angles, contrast
evaluation etc for cine and video use.
SE758C 459.95
Exposure Profile Target II

This is used in conjunction with Sekonics
Data Transfer Software (available as a free
download at www.sekonic.com) to create
and edit camera exposure profiles and
then transfer them to the L-758. Along
with the sensors dynamic range, it
records the unique variations of your
particular camera, such as the effects of
shutter speed and aperture mechanisms,
and the lens in use. SEEPT2 112.95
63
Batteries
Lithium camera
IMPORTANT NOTICE
LITHIUM BATTERY POST RESTRICTIONS
Royal Mail will no longer transport
lithium batteries. Regrettably as a result
of this decision we will only accept
orders which include lithium batteries
where the order value is 30+. These
orders will be despatched by courier.
BA2CR5
BACR123A
BACR2
BADL13N
BAPX28L
BACR2032
BACR2430
Energiser 2CR5 6v . . . . . . 4.89

Kodak CR123A 3v . . . . . . . 2.79
Kodak CR2 3v . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99
Duracell DL1/3N 3v . . . . . . 4.99
Duracell PX28L 6v . . . . . . . 7.75
Kodak CR2032 3v . . . . . . . 0.99
Energiser CR2430 3v . . . . . 2.65
Silver oxide camera

BAKS28
BAD357
Energiser 544 (PX28) 6v . . 5.50

Duracell D357 (PX76) 1.5v
Twin Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
Wein Zinc-Air
Hahnel Extreme
Super-tough, temperature and shock
resistant batteries which match or exceed
the performance of the camera maker's
equivalent. Each battery is injected with
silicone giving them a very tough, shock
absorbing construction with superior
circuit protection and
additional electrical
insulation. Typically
produce 20%
more
shots
per
charge.
HLXE6
HLXE9
HLXE14
HLXE15
HLX-E6 (Canon LP-E6). . . 44.00

HLX-E8 (Canon LP-E8). . . 36.00
HLX-E14 (Nikon EN-EL14) 39.00
HLX-E15 (Nikon EN-EL15) 54.00
Nikon batteries
For D4
NKENEL18 EN-EL18A Li-Ion . . . . . . 114.95
For D700, D300, D200, D90, D80
NKENEL3E EN-EL3E Li-Ion . . . . . . . . 58.20
For D60, D40, D40X, D3000, D5000
NKENEL9A EN-EL9A NiMH. . . . . . . . . 46.80
For D3000, D5000 series
NKENEL14 EN-EL14A Li-Ion . . . . . . . 34.95
For D7000, D600, D800, D810
NKENEL15 EN-EL15 Li-ion battery . . 64.95
Ansmann chargers
Photocam III
Latest version features delta peak charging, so that you can top up batteries which
are part charged a feature never before
seen at this price. Takes approx 6 hours to
charge empty NiMH batteries.
Complete with 4 x AA MaxE readycharged NiMH batteries
ANPC3 15.00
Ansmann Powerline 4 Pro

LCD readout plus variable charging rates
Alkaline general purpose

BA4AA
BA4AAA
BAK9V
Kodak AA x 4. . . . . . . . . . . 1.49
Kodak AAA x 4. . . . . . . . . . 1.49
Kodak K9V 9v block . . . . . 1.99
Ansmann battery box 4 x AA

Extra protection for 4 x
AA batteries. Avoids
accidental shorting or
discharging.
ANBB4 1.00
3+ 0.85
64
For EOS550D, 600D, 650D

CALPE08 LP-E8 Li-Ion . . . . . . . . . . 41.50
For EOS300D, 10D, 20D, 30D, 40D, 50D
CABP511A BP511/A Li-Ion. . . . . . . . 79.95
For EOS 5D Mk2/3, EOS 7D, EOS 60D
CALPE06 LP-E6 Li-Ion . . . . . . . . . . 66.95
Batteries not
supplied
Think Tank DSLR Battery

Holders
Organise and keep
batteries clean and
protected.
For 2 batteries
TT968 7.50
For 4 batteries
TT969 12.50
For 2 large pro
batteries
TT967 14.00
Think Tank AA battery holder

Takes 8 x AA batteries, folds in half
to close with velcro tab.
TT970 7.50
Super-fast charger for 14 AA or AAA

batteries. Worldwide mains use.
Freeloader
POWER/CARDS
Memory cards
iSIS Solar Battery Park
Economical charger for AA or AAA batts

Microprocessor intelligent charging
Canon batteries
Mercury cell sale and production is now

outlawed in the EC, so there is a problem
for owners of older cameras using PX625
and PX675 mercury batteries. These
require a voltage of 1.35v, and any alkaline replacement will be 1.5v which will
lead to metering errors. These cells give
the correct voltage, are environmentally
safe, and have a 10 year shelf life.
Both types 5.95
WEB625
PX625
WEB675
PX675
Digispeed 4 Ultra+
Charges 1-4 AA or AAA batteries (not

included) in any combination. Each cell is
individually monitored, with the capacity
of each displayed on an LCD screen. The
charge current and rate can be separately
assigned to each cell to optimise battery
life, and it will also fully discharge and
test before recharge, so that faulty cells
can be detected and discarded. Will also
charge USB devices. Works on all voltages,
and comes supplied with UK and Euro
plugs and 12v car plug. ANPZ4 33.95
Ansmann NiMH batteries

AN4AA27
AN4AA28
ANM4AA21
AN4AAA10
AA 2700mAh x 4 . . . . . . 12.50
AA 2850mAh x 4 . . . . . 13.50
AA MaxE 2100mAh x 4 . . 8.50
AAA1000mAh x 4 . . . . . . 8.95
Super-fast charger for 14 AA or AAA

batteries. Worldwide mains use.
Microprocessor control using Delta peak
techniques and fan cooling ensures that
each cell is individually protected to
prevent damage. Automatic microprocessor control of charging for each cell.
Around 35 minutes charging time.
Externally switchable to voltages from
100-240v, plus car lighter adaptor.
Complete with 4 x NiMH batts
ANDS4U 53.95
Hahnel ProCube DSLR Twin

Fast charger for 2 Canon or Nikon
Li-Ion batteries, or 4 x AA
Charges 1 or 2 Canon E6/HL-E6 and
E8/HL-E8 and Nikon EL14/HL-EL14 and
EL15/HL-EL15 types simultaneously, or 4
x AA size. Its also a USB charger for most
smartphones and other mobile devices.
Intelligent fast IC charge control with LCD
display of charge status. Supplied with
interchangeable UK,
Euro and US plugs,
and 12v car lead.
HLPC 58.00
Uses a new class-leading solar charging

panel to deliver instant power for smartphones, tablets, cameras, MP3 players,
and in conjunction with the CamCaddy
below, will recharge most DSLR batteries.
4000mAh high density lithium polymer
cell will provide power even if only half
charged
Impact and water resistant case
Integrated lightning and micro USB
charging arms (charges 2 devices at
once), plus USB socket
LCD screen shows charging sources and
available power
Solar charging or via micro USB input
220mA output is enough to charge a
smartphone 3 times from full charge
2 year warranty
Dims: 25 x 76 x 137mm. Weight: 240g
FDI 64.95
Lexar is a subsidiary of Micron Technology,

one of the leading manufacturers of
memory in the world, and for over 15
years it has been the storage choice of
many professional photographers. Micron
makes all its memory chips at its Utah
plant, in rooms which are 100 times
cleaner than the average hospital surgery.
These are then assembled in its Asian
factories. To maintain its quality guaran-
tee, every single card and device is hand

assembled and tested before packing and
despatch.
All product designs undergo extensive
testing in the Lexar Quality Labs (above),
facilities with more than 1,100 digital
devices, to ensure performance, quality,
compatibility, and reliability.
So, whether you absolutely need the
incredible 300MB/s transfer speed of the
latest and fastest Lexar cards for your 4K

video shoot, or something less advanced
for regular photography, Lexar reliability
will give you peace of mind that your shots
are safe. And, if there is a problem, every
card comes with a free download of
Image Rescue software, which will
recover most photo and certain video
files, even if theyve been erased or the
card has been corrupted.
SDHC/SDXC
CompactFlash
Micro SDHC/SDXC
Pro UDMA 800x

Lexars UDMA 7 technology boosts transfer
speeds and
supports 1080p
full HD video.
Up to 120MBps
speed.
8GB, 16GB,
32GB, 64GB,
128GB
UHS-I 633x
95MBps transfer speed gives Class 10 speed
rating, suitable for sustained 1080p full HD
video. GoPro recommended card. Includes
USB reader.
16GB, 32GB, 64GB
Pro UHS-I 400x

Read transfer speed
of up to 60MBps.
Suitable for all photo
and 1080p HD video
applications.
8GB, 16GB, 32GB,
64GB, 128GB
Pro UHS-I 600x
Read transfer speed
of up to 90MBps.
Suitable for all photo
1080p HD video and
4K applications.
16GB, 32GB, 64GB,
128GB, 256GB
Twinpacks
Pro UDMA 1066x

Super-fast card for 4K and extended 1080p
full HD video.
Up to 160MBps
speed.
8GB, 16GB,
32GB, 64GB,
128GB
available in 8GB, 16GB and

32GB in 400x and 600x
SanDisk
Ansmann battery storage box
Store up to 8 x AA, or CR123A or memory
cards. Avoids accidental shorting or
discharging.
Charged and
uncharged sections
are marked.
ANBB 2.95
3+ 2.51
CamCaddy 2
A universal charger for all kinds of block
style digital camera batteries. Contacts
easily adjust to suit any size or shape, and
the charger automatically adjusts its
output to a safe rate and voltage to match
the battery. Supplied with USB/micro USB
cable, it can be powered from mains
adaptor plug, computer or the iSIS solar
charger above. FDCC 19.95
Ultra
CompactFlash / SDHC /
Micro SD
Economically priced but
high quality cards suitable for all digital compacts and most
DSLRs. Speeds are continually being
improved; SD cards now Class 10/30MBps;
CompactFlash version 50MBps.
Latest card prices

SEE WEBSITE OR CALL FOR INFO
Extreme
Extreme Pro
CompactFlash /
SDHC / SDXC
Designed to give
optimum performance with enthusiast DSLR cameras with
speeds up to write speeds up to 60MBps
and read speeds of 120MBps. The SD
version is a Class 10 card biased toward
giving sustained write speeds, plus read
speed of 45/60MBps (range in process of
change as we went to press).
CompactFlash /
SDHC /
SDXC UHS I
The fastest SanDisk card just got faster, with
transfer speeds of up to 160MBps for the CF
version (ideal if you are shooting RAW and
JPEG simultaneously), and 95MBps for the
SDHC/XC UHS-I cards. The new UHS-II
versions of these will deliver transfer speeds
up to 280MBps.
65
Card readers
Card storage
Lexar Professional Workflow Hub
Think Tank
SD Pixel
Pocket
Rocket
The HR series hubs dramatically increase

workflow speeds, allowing 14 card
readers (mixed or the same format) to
transfer files simultaneously, and can also
act as a convenient backup solution with
the appropriate SSD plugged in.
Transfer RAW images, high-res photos,
and HD, 3D, and 4K video files at USB
3.0 or Thunderbolt speeds
Add a flash-based storage drive to the
Hub and enjoy 245MBps write and
450MBps read speeds
Thunderbolt Hub has 2 ports to allow
daisychaining, plus a USB3.0 pne
Future-proof. Lexar will introduce
readers for new card formats as they
arrive on the market
Hubs
n.b. these prices do not include card readers,
which must be purchased separately
LXWHR1 HR-1 USB2.0 Hub. . . . . . . 44.00
LXWHR2 HR-2 Thunderbolt/USB . 199.00
Buy any Hub and 2 or more

Readers/Drives at the same time and
get 10% discount
Shown with card readers installed

Card Readers for HR-1 Hub
LXWCFR1 CompactFlash Reader . . . . 22.95
LXWSR1 SDHC/SDXC Reader. . . . . . 22.95
LXWCF1 CFast Reader . . . . . . . . . . 36.95
LXWXR1 XQD Reader . . . . . . . . . . . 39.95
Card Readers for HR-2 Hub
LXWCR2 CFast Reader . . . . . . . . . . 99.95
LXWSR2 SDHC/SDXC Reader. . . . . . . TBA
SS Data Drives
LXWD256 256GB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99.95
LXWD512 512GB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149.95
Lexar Pro UDMA Dual Slot reader

USB3.0/2.0 compatible. Reads both CF and
SD/SDHC/SDXC cards. Gives high read/write
speeds, especially with UDMA-enabled cards.
Compact and rugged, the top folds down to
protect the slots, so it can be stuffed safely in a
bag. LXUR 29.95
Lexar Multi-Card 25-in-1 reader

USB 3.0/2.0 compatible, with flip-down lid. 25 formats?
To wit: CompactFlash Type I/II, SD, SDHC, SDXC,
miniSD, miniSDHC, MMC, MMCplus, RS-MMC, microSD,
microSDHC, Memory Stick, MS (MagicGate), MS PRO, MS
PRO Duo, MS Duo (MagicGate), MS PRO Duo Mark 2,
MSPRO-HG Duo, MSPRO-HG Duo HX, MS Micro (M2), xD, xD
Type-M, xD Type-M+, xD- Type-H. So thats quite a lot of obsolete
Sony and Fuji formats then. LXMCR 24.95
For the heavy-duty Secure Digital card

user, there is an exclusive Pixel Pocket
Rocket. Accommodates 9 cards, and under
the flap theres space for a few business
cards too. Fabric (should you be interested) is 420D diamond rip-stop nylon, PU
coated under, DWR on the outside. They
do things properly at TT. TT211 11.95
Think Tank Pixel Pocket

Rocket Compact Flash version
Stores 10 CF
cards in a compact
package which fits easily in a
pocket, or which will attach to a belt or
bag with the (removeable) lanyard.
Includes a business card holder for easy
identification. TT209 12.50
All-weather protection. Takes 4 cards.

Clip-lock enclosure makes the Extreme
Safe dustproof and water-resistant
(can also float).
Shock resistant.
Viewing windows so you can see the
cards without opening the case.
Stainless steel reinforced hinge
Waterproof and crushproof.
Strap
connector
GP3861
Onyx grey
GP3862
Neon green
GP3861-02
Iceblue
GP3861-03 Red
Each 16.50
Lowepro S&F Memory

Wallet 20
A sturdy
zip-up
wallet to
take 12
CompactFlash
cards.
Detachable strap
allows attachment to belt loop
or key chain if required. LPSFMW 16.00
Think Tank Pee Wee Pixel

Pocket Rocket for CF and SD
Hama Compact Multi-Card reader

A handy pocketable USB2.0 reader with LED
status indicator which takes Compact Flash I/II,
all types of SD, micro SD, MMC type cards, and
older Smart media/XD cards. SDXC cards work
with latest Win XP/Vista/7 and Mac OS 10.5+.
USB lead folds neatly into a slot in the base.
HA94124 9.95
66
Accreditation wallet-style holder

for 6 x CF and 3 x SD cards.
Attaches to any belt, including
Think Tank Modular system ones,
or can be hung round the neck.
Size: 12x13x1.5cm.
TT216 17.75
Black and white
Colour negative
Holga 120
Back to basics with this plug ugly but
effective creative tool, which takes 120
roll film to give square format pictures
with excellent tonal quality. Youll definitely need a tripod, so theres a 1/4
socket in the base. The shutter stays open
as long as its depressed; about f192 aperture. Weight 170g. HG120PC 29.95
Low cost, but high quality single shot 4x5

format camera made in the UK from robust
expanded PVC. The front part of the
camera slides into the back to hold the
paper or film in place and create a stylish
black border to the image.
Pinhole is laser cut on a stainless steel
plate, giving high quality images with
even illumination (f128)
Shutter is held in place by magnets
Comes with light-proof box to hold up
to 25 sheets of exposed paper (you will
need a changing bag to transfer these
from the camera)
Supplied with 10 sheets of Delta 100
film and 20 sheets of Multigrade IV RC
paper and Exposure Calculator
HROK 69.00
Harman TiTAN 4x5
A long name for a small but handy object.

The Pee Wee takes 4 x CF and 3 x SD size
cards. Folds tool roll style to take up
12Lx1.3Dx7H cm space. TT210 10.50
Pinhole Cameras
Ilford Obscura by Harman
Think Tank Pixel Pocket Rocket Union

Flag Edition
Limited
edition of the
CF version
with embroidered flag on the outside. Fortunately still
valid, and not a piece of memorabilia.
TT946 18.50
Think Tank Modular Pixel

Pocket Rocket
FILM
Gepe Extreme Safe
Manufactured in the UK by Walker, makers

of large-format cameras, from injectionmoulded ABS finished with a durable nonslip coating. All the fittings are stainless
steel, so its made to withstand extreme
elements, rough handling, and in all
probability, life with photography
students.
The front cone is removeable. The
supplied 72mm wide-angle one can be
exchangeable with 110mm and 150mm
ones (the latter the standard focal
length of a 5x4 camera). It has two
tripod sockets, spirit levels and an accessory shoe. Users only need a 5x4 film
holder to get going. HRT4 165.00
FUJI Superia
200 135-36
FJCA36
400 135-36
FJCH36
FUJI professional negative
160 Pro S 120 x 5 FJPROS1205
400 Pro H 135-36 FJPROH36
400 Pro H 120 x 5 FJPROH1205
KODAK negative
100 Ektar 135-36 KKEK36
100 Ektar 120 x 5 KKEK1205
3.69
4.69
26.50
9.50
26.50
5.19
22.95
Colour slide (non process-paid)

FUJI
50
50
100
100
100
100
Velvia 50-36
FJRVP36
Velvia 50 120x5 FJRVP1205
Velvia 100-36 FJRVPN36
Velvia 100 120x5FJRVPN1205
Provia F 135-36 FJRDPF36
Provia F 120 x 5 FJRDPF1205
10.75
30.50
11.25
27.95
9.50
28.50
Film changing bag

For use in the
darkroom, but
also very useful
if your film is
jammed in the
camera. Light,
and infra-red
light proof black
material. 27x29
(68.5x73.7cm) KDCBL 25.00
FUJI
100 Acros 100-36
100 Acros 100 120x5
ILFORD
50
Pan F - 36
50
Pan F 120
125 FP4 -24
125 FP4 -36
125 FP4 120
125 FP4 5x4 (25)
400 HP5 -24
400 HP5 -36
400 HP5 120
100 Delta -36
100 Delta 120
400 Delta -36
400 Delta 120
3200 Delta -36
3200 Delta 120
400 XP2 -36
400 XP2 120
KENTMERE
100 135-36
400 135-36
KODAK
400 T-Max-36
400 T-Max 120 x 5
400 Tri-X -36
400 Tri-X 120 x5
FJN136
FJN11205
5.19
22.95
ILPANF36
4.69
ILPANF120
4.09
ILFP424
3.59
ILFP436
4.59
ILFP4120
3.89
ILFP44525 36.95
ILHP524
3.59
ILHP536
4.59
ILHP5120
3.89
ILD10036
5.49
ILD100120
4.59
ILD40036
5.49
ILD400120
4.59
ILD320036
6.89
ILD3200120 5.59
ILXP236
5.49
ILXP2120
4.59
HRK136
HRK436
3.39
3.39
KKTMY36
4.59
KKTMY1205 23.75
KKTX36
4.69
KKTX1205 23.95
Ilford HP5 Single Use Camera
Fotospeed Film Cleaner

A liquid cleaner suitable for all
photographic emulsions.
Removes greasy finger marks
and stuck dust, leaving the
film clean and less likely to
attract dust particles later. Apply with a
soft cloth, and allow to dry for 30
seconds. 125ml can. FSFC50 8.95
Cassette opener
Makes short work of
removing end caps from
metal cassettes, and
saves on fingernails.
APCO 9.95
An easy way to create 27 authentic black

and white pictures. A fun experience for
wedding guests, the camera has a switchable flash, an the ISO rating of 400
ensures good depth of field and shakefree pics in most conditions.
The price includes processing in
Harmans labs. Prints are 6x4 (can be
upgraded to 7x5 and/or scan to CD for an
extra charge), and are returned in a good
quality box. ILSUHP5 14.95
67
Metz
Phottix
36AF-5
36C-2
A compact medium power flash with zoom
and bounce head. Unlike the other flashguns on these pages, the 36C2 is not
specific to any camera make. Once the
flash sync speed on the camera has been
selected, the built-in sensor allows an fstop to be set on the lens to automatically
adjust output within a specific distance.
GN32 (m/100ISO); 36 @ 85mm
3 auto exposure stops plus manual
3-position (28/50/85mm) manually
adjustable zoom and bounce head
Correct exposure indicator
Accepts Metz 36-50/52 sync cords
MZ36C2 73.95
Built-in camera flashguns are often low

powered and inadequate for lighting large
groups of people for instance. The 36AF-5
is a compact bounce head gun which gives
a useful upgrade in power.
Manual 28-85mm zoom with an 18mm
wide-angle clip-on diffuser
GN30 @50mm (max 36@85mm)
LED display of settings
Auto fill-in flash
1st and 2nd shutter synchronisation
73.95
MZ36AFC Canon
MZ36AFN Nikon
MZ36AFO Olympus/Panasonic/Leica
MZ36AFP Pentax/Samsung
MZ36AFS Sony
64AF-1
24AF-1
An ideal companion for the new generation of MFT and similar DSLRs, the 24AF-1
is pocket-sized and fully dedicated to the
latest TTL flash functions.
GN 24@35mm (fixed angle output)
Reflector swivels 90 for bounce flash
Automatic fill-in flash
First/second curtain shutter sync
Flash ready/correct exposure display
on flash and in camera
57.50
MZ24AFC Canon
MZ24AFN Nikon
MZ24AFF Fuji
MZ24AFO Olympus
68
The new 64AF-1 has a specification which

rivals those of the top camera manufacturers flashguns, and as well as very high
power, has a colour touch LCD display and
intuitive operating system. A feature you
dont see on the other guns is a secondary
flash reflector, which gives the ability to
bounce light and still retain full TTL exposure control.
Fill-in flash with partial light control
GN 44@50mm (max 64@200mm)
24-200 auto zoom tilt/swivel reflector
plus 12mm super-wide diffuser and
flip-out reflector
Auto sensor flash with 12 apertures
Download firmware updates via USB
Metal shoe (Sony is latest MI type)
25-step manual partial light control
Second curtain sync etc supported
Auto-adapts to camera sensor size
Sync socket and external power sockets
Beep function . . . and much more.
309.95
MZ64AF1C Canon MZ64AF1P Pentax
MZ64AF1N Nikon MZ64AF1S Sony MI
MZ64AF1O Olympus/Panasonic
Canon
Nikon
FLASH
44AF-1
Designed to give a high performance for
the price, the 44AF-1 offers all the essential DSLR TTL features plus easy operation.
GN 32@50mm (max 44@105mm)
Reflector swivels 300 horizontally and
90 vertically
Motorised 24105mm zoom plus 12mm
wide-angle illumination
Flip-out reflector card
Manual flash mode with 4 stop variable
lighting levels
Slave remote mode
134.95
MZ44AFC Canon
MZ44AFA Panasonic
MZ44AFN Nikon
MZ44AFP Pentax
MZ44AFF Fuji
MZ44AFS Sony
MZ44AFO Olympus
Built-in radio triggering

Mitros Plus
The Mitros+ has all the power, build
quality and functionality of a top-line
system flash, but adds a built-in Phottix
Odin transmitter and receiver and Strato II
receiver. So theres no need to buy an
additional trigger system its all built in,
and two Mitro+ guns working as master
and slave have all the functionality of an
Odin trigger set costing well over 200!
GN 42@50mm (max 58@105mm)
24105mm auto zoom bounce and
swivel head with 14mm wide-angle
diffuser
Manual power control from full to
1/128th power
Full remote control of flash up to 100m
possible using Phottix Odin or Strato
As master allows TTL power adjustment
of up to 3 groups in 1/3 stop increments over a 3 stop range
Second curtain sync etc supported
Three memory locations enable flash
set up and custom function information
to be quickly recalled for repeated use
Stroboscopic flash 1-188Hz up to 100
repeats
Optical slave flash triggering option
External battery port; 3.5mm sync
socket
339.00
PHMPC Canon
PHMPN Nikon
Phottix triggers are on page 80
430EX II
600EX-RT
Canons mediumsized flash with a

comprehensive
specification ideal
for most photo
enthusiasts.
GN35 @ 50mm
(43 maximum)
6-position 24-105mm bounce auto
zoom head
Fast recycling time
E-TTL II/E-TTL metering
Partial metering flash exposure lock
Low light flash/ambient light balancing
Energy saving mode
Metal foot
9 custom functions
CA430EX2 235.00
The 600EX-RT incorporates (in addition to

the existing Canon IR remote triggering
facility), a new RF system using the
2.4GHz frequency.
Up to 5 groups with a maximum of 15
flashguns can be controlled, up to a
maximum distance of 30m. 15 channels
are available to avoid intereference from
other users nearby.
It has a new dot-matrix hi-res LCD
display, improved weather sealing, 18
custom functions and a colour filter
holder.
Metal flash foot reduces wear
Fast and silent recycling
PC cable socket
20200mm zoom with 14mm panel
GN 43 @ 50mm (60 maximum)
Bounce/swivel/tilt head which automatically adjusts to suit the frame size
of any film or digital EOS from 1DMk2
onwards
AF illuminator compatible with 45, 9, 7
or 3-point focusing
6 flash modes, including high-speed
sync, and 41
stroboscopic
frequency
and 31 firing
settings
E-TTL/E-TTL
II/TTL
metering
with postflash exposure confirmation
CA600EXRT
499.00
320EX
Dual-purpose light
with flash and
constant LED
options.
GN32 @50mm
(m/100ISO)
24 and 50mm
flash settings,
bounce/swivel
75 lux LED light
Flash control via
camera menus,
including colour temp and second
curtain sync
Fast, nearly silent recycling
Wireless slave control with compatible
Canon flash
CA320EX 209.95
Canon Off-Camera Shoe Cord 3 on p79
SB-910
SB-700
Upgrades on the successful SB-900 with

an improved control interface to give
more convenient and intuitive operation,
with three illumination patterns to bias
light centrally, standard or extra-wide.
Zoom coverage 17-200mm on FX
format; 12-200mm on DX format
GN 40 @ 50mm (maximum 50)
4-channel Wireless Commander mode
Rotary Selector dial makes accessing
functions quick and easy
High speed flash sync up to 1/4000th
Faster recycling times
Flash tube overheat protection
3-D multi-sensor TTL, auto sensor and
manual flash from 1/64thfull power
NKSB910 359.00
Powerful and highly-specified, but easy to

use gun for FX and DX format cameras:
GN 30 @ 50mm (maximum 38)
Functions as Master or Slave in Nikon
Advanced Wireless lighting set-up
Auto multi-step 24120mm zoom
Three illumination patterns for different shooting environments
Auto adjusts white balance when using
supplied filters
High speed recycling time of approx
2.5 secs from full discharge
Manual power control over 7 stop range
with 1/40,000th sec duration at lowest
setting
i-TTL, D-TTL and manual mode
NKSB700 239.00
SD-9 HP Battery Pack

For SB-910 and SB-900. Holds any type of
4 or 8 x AA batteries and boosts flash
capacity and
shortens
recycling
time. NKSD9
177.50
SB-300
A lightweight and compact iTTL flash ideal
for boosting flash power but with uncomplicated operation.
GN18 (m/100ISO)
Covers 27mm (full frame)lens angle
Front reflector swivels 120 to allow
light to be bounced off a ceiling
Powered by 2 x AAA batteries
NKSB300 129.95
AS-19 Speedlight Stand

Allows flash to be placed
on a flat surface,
and has a tripod
socket in base.
NKAS19 6.95
Nikon Off-Camera TTL Cords and SK-7
straight flash bracket on page 79
69
Cactus
RF-60
Nissin
LED lighting
i40
Manfrotto
Wireless master or slave flash

A groundbreaking new design which
packs lots of power into a diminutive
body, the i40 has received rave reviews
from the photo press.
Measuring just 85H x 65W x 85D mm,
its an ideal partner for CSC system
cameras or smaller body DSLRs. It also
breaks the current design mould by using
analogue rotary dials rather than pushbutton or touch screen control.
GN30 (m/100ISO); 40 @ 105mm
24105mm zoom with 16mm wideangle flip-out panel
2 selector dials for function and power,
which can be ratioed full to 1/256th
Built-in 9-step LED video light
Wireless and non-TTL slave modes
+/- 2EV compensation in 1/2EV steps
1st and 2nd curtain sync, high speed
and slow sync (depends on camera)
Soft box diffuser, stand and case with
carabiner included
169.95
The RF-60 offers tremendous versatility to

anyone wishing to use multiple flashguns,
but unlike most competing guns, it is not
designed to function within a TTL
controlled set-up. It can be used as a
master controller or slave, or in local
mode, as a single gun on a camera. Note
that power control is by manual adjustment, and not by auto sensor or TTL.
As Master, controls up to 4 groups,
with an unlimited number of guns in
each group (Canon, Nikon and Pentax
guns mounted on a V6 transceiver)
Power levels of an RF60 set in Slave
mode can be remotely adjusted from
1/128 to 1/1 full power in steps of
0.3EV. Zoom level can also be
controlled from 24mm to 105mm
Intuitive, non-numerical naming of
groups
Pre-flash optical sensor
Multi-flash; HSS up to 1/8000th sec
22 power levels from full to 1/128th
GN 45 (m/100ISO); 56 @ 105mm
Supplied with stand and case
Takes 4 x AA batteries
CSRF60 119.95
NFI40C Canon
NFI40N Nikon
NFI40F Fuji
NFI40S Sony MI
Cactus V6 transceiver is on p80
Rayflash Universal Ringflash Adaptor

The Rayflash Adaptor enables users of most bounce head
flashguns to emulate the desirable 3-D shadow-wrapped
look of expensive and bulky studio ringlights.
Because all the light emanates from around the lens,
the result is a virtually shadowless look on the front of the
subject, with a soft even shadow appearing around the
edges. It is ideally suited for fashion, portrait and beauty
images either as a main light or fill-in. It can also be used
for macro photography where a higher light output than a
typical ringflash gives is required.
The Rayflash Adaptor simply pushes into place on the
front of the flash, and uses a system of internal prisms and
reflectors to distribute the light evenly around the lens.
Two versions are available: the short neck version suits
most cameras, and the long neck version for taller pro body
cameras. There is 15mm of adjustment built-in to the unit.
Dimensions: Outer dia 21.5cm; inner dia 10cm; weight 540g.
Centre of ringflash to centre of flash unit: Short 160-175mm;
Long 175-190mm.
99.00
RFUS
Short neck version
RFUL
Long neck version
70
LED
ML360 Midi
A good partner for most DSLR uses, the
ML360 has 36 LEDs.
Continuously dimmable from 0100%
Small 3200K LED underneath illuminates camera controls at night
Takes 4 x AAA batteries (not supplied)
which give 4560 mins of runtime
depending on the type
Other ML lights can be attached to one
side to increase power
Colour temperature 5600K; 30 beam
angle; 420lux @1m
MAML360 73.95
Spectra 500S
ML240 Mini
With 24 LEDs, the Mini illuminates a larger
area, but still fits easily into a pocket.
Other ML lights can be attached to one
side to increase power
angle; 220lux @1m
MAML240 59.95
Spectra 900S
High output daylight balanced light with
96 LEDs and minimum CRI of 90.
Supplied with 1/4 CTO + Full CTO
warming and Opal diffusion filters
Attaches to 1/4 screw, with or without
supplied ballhead
angle; 900lux @1m
MAMLS900S 199.00
The Spectra 500S is a slim, lightweight,

high quality 48 LED light with a minimum
CRI of 90.
Supplied with 1/4 CTO + Full CTO
warming and Opal diffusion filters
Attaches to 1/4 screw, with or without
supplied ballhead
angle; 300lux @1m
MAMLS500S 127.50
Ball and socket support is

supplied with all Manfrotto
Spectra LED lights.
Metz
Mecalights
As LED lights became whiter and

brighter, the technology was first
adopted by the TV and movie industry
as an alternative to bulky and hot
lights. Digital cameras now offer high
quality video recording, so LED lights
have downsized to offer a lightweight
cool-working light source with a softer
light quality (although lower power)
than similar size tungsten lights. In
addition, most recent enthusiast and
professional cameras are capable of
excellent results at high ISO ratings,
and the output of even the smallest
lights may be more than adequate as a
fill-in light at typical working
distances, and could be less intrusive
for the subject than a sudden burst of
flash illumination.
Colour Rendering Index (CRI)
is a measure of the effect that a light
source has on the colour appearance of
an object. In the end, it is subjective as
we all perceive colour differently, but a
high CRI of over 90 is desirable in
photography and videography.
A family of robustly made lights which can
be used singly or in combination together.
FH-100 Arm
Two flexible arms with
1/4 connection at either
end. Pack of 2.
MZFH100
9.95
Spectra 900FT
See the difference:

(above) without ringflash an
ugly side shadow appears:
(below) with ringflash subtle
and flattering rim shadow.
High output daylight balanced light with

96 yellow and white LEDs and minimum
CRI of 90.
LED output can be blended to create
light output with colour temperatures
from 32005600K
Colour temperature 32005600K; 50
beam angle; 540lux @1m
MAMLS900FT 349.00
See also the Westcott IceLight on page 89
All the lights share these features:

Wide 65 angle beam, with CRI of
greater than 85
Diffuser and tungsten filter attach
magnetically to the front
1/4 socket for universal attachment
LED-320
48 LEDs, ideal for closer subjects.
Takes 4x AAA batteries (not supplied)
320lux @1m
MZLED320 61.00
LED-480
LED-160
With 72 LEDs, this is an ideal all-purpose

single camera light.
480lux @1m
MZLED480 78.50
24 LEDs, acts as centre light in multi-light

array. Ideal for macro work.
160lux @1m
MZLED160 37.00
71
Honl Flash Modifiers
Rogue FlashBenders
SpinLight 360
Lumiquest
A range of robust and extremely useful

accessories to modify and shape the
light output from shoe-mount flashguns.
Developed by David Honl, an American
professional photographer, it is based
around the Speed Strap which requires
no permanently attached tabs on the
flash head. Snoots and gobos are made
from tough ballistic nylon. You can get
more info and further links from
www.flaghead.co.uk and
www.strobist.com
The FlashBender design incorporates flexible rods which enable the user to bend
and shape the reflector and thus direct
the light. Made from top quality materials
including abrasion-resistant nylon fabric,
and having a wipeable reflector surface.
Made in the USA, SpinLight 360

is a unique system which allows
control of flash softening,
colouring, bouncing and blocking, rotatable over 360.
The basis of the system is
the Ring Module frame which fits
over the flash head and which is
secured by a velcro strap.
Bounce cards slot into the edge
of the Module, and diffusion
domes and gel holders bayonet
quickly in place in the centre.
You can change a diffuser
without moving a card.
The Ring Module pushes in
place on the majority of bounce head
flashguns from Canon, Nikon, Metz,
Sigma, Nissin and other manufacturers.
Pocket Bouncer
Speed Strap
Fits almost any flash,
and wraps and
removes in an instant.
Provides a large
surface to attach Honl
accessories.
HNSS 8.70
Snoot
Concentrates the light
to produce dramatic
cine style portraits or
a pool of background
light. Two sizes.
HNSN5 5 Shorty
26.20
HNSN8 8 regular
26.20
Gold/Silver Snoot
Gives a pleasing warm
skin tone to portraits.
HNSNG5 5 26.20
HNSNG8 8 26.20
Traveller8 Softbox
8 softbox which folds
flat (11x9). Attaches
to the Speed Strap
and creates attractive
round catchlights in
eyes.HNT8 53.50
Honl Starter Kit Mk2

Includes 2 Speed Straps, Snoot 8,
Snoot 5, 1/8 Grid, 1/4 Grid, Gobo,
Sampler filters, bag, saving over 10%
on separate prices. HNSK 149.95
72
XL Pro Kit
A 4-piece kit which allows you to create a variable width strip box, a low profile soft box, or
a multi-surface reflector. Two widths of diffuser create a large softbox or a striplight, and
the silver surface boosts output, or conversely, with the black surface creates a flag to cut
reflection. RGBXL 79.95
Baby Bounce
For the photo-journalist or wedding
photographer: kicks
just the right amount
of light on to the
subject.
HNBB 13.20
Also available in a kit
with a Speed Strap.
HNBBK 21.00
Speed
Gobo/Barndoor
Reversible: black
nylon on one side and
white polymer coated
on the other. Can be
used as a bounce card.
HNSG 13.00
Speed Grid
Narrow beam angle to
create a small pool of
light on the subject.
The 1/8 grid creates
a smaller pattern than
the 1/4.
HNGR4 1/4 26.20
HNGR8 1/8 26.20
Accessory Bag
Takes all Honl
accessories.
Water-resistant
nylon with nylon
end loop.
HNBAG 16.00
Honl Lighting Tutorial DVD
David Honl shows
how to achieve quick
and painless lighting
set-ups using the
Honl system. 2 CD
set. HNDVD 15.95
Large Reflector
28 x 25.4cm
nearly square
format to
give a large
reflective
surface.
Three
internal
flexible rods
allow considerable scope in
shaping the light
path. RGBL 29.30
Small Reflector
A horizontal format
25.4 x 17.8cm
reflector which
incorporates two
internal rods to allow
it to be wrapped into
a snoot shape.
RGBS 24.70
Also fits the Small

Reflector in snoot format
3 in 1 Honeycomb Grid
Comprises a 25 and 45 grid and holder
which when combined produce a 16 spot.
Supplied with flash head mounting strap
and storage pouch. RGHG 40.00
Rogue Universal Gel Filter Kit
Diffusion
Panels
Quickly attach
to the front of
the Large and
Small Reflectors
to further diffuse
the light. The Large
Panel measures 229x
203mm, and the
Small 229x114mm.
Either size 16.50
RGDPS Small
Event Kit shown above

Gives considerable scope in controlling
the direction and quality of the flash.
Kit contents:
Ring Module
Clear Full Dome
Velcro Attachment
4" (10cm) Black Bounce Card
4" (10cm) White Bounce Card
3 Clear Gel Disks
1 FULL CTO Gel
1 HALF CTO Gel
ST360EV 79.95
Gel Set
20 gels which can be used singly or in
combination to produce hundreds of
different colors. STGELS 42.50
RGDPL Large
Rosco Gels
14 colour effect filters, 5 colour correction

and 1 diffusion filter. Side tabs are held in
place with a gel-band. Size is 76 x 63mm,
and they come packed in a pouch with a
quick reference guide. RGUFK 26.90
A collection of
20 different
types of
3.25x1.5
gels for camera
flashguns, with
multiples of some types, making a total of
55 in all. Created in conjunction with Mr
Strobist David Hobby, it gives virtually
unlimited colour creativity. RSS 8.95
Think Tank Strobe Gel Wallet

A compact five pocket carrier for Rosco gels, or other filters
for on-camera flash. Sleeve opening is 3.9x1.6 (10x4cm).
Folds tool-roll style to overall dimensions 11.5x6.5x1.5cm.
TT215 12.00
Grid Set
One white and one black grid to produce
sharply defined pool of light. White one is
softer edged and lower contrast.
STGRIDS 42.50
Softens harsh flash with minimal light loss ( about 1 1/3

stops), where low ceilings are not available to bounce the
light. Folds flat to 11.4 x 18.4cm. Attached with supplied
Velcro pads or with optional UltraStrap. LQ101 21.95
80-20
Ideal for removing under-nose and eye socket shadows
when bouncing light off a ceiling, to give great results. 20%
of the light is directed forward. Folds flat for storage.
Attaches with supplied Velcro pads or with optional
UltraStrap. LQ102 22.50
UltraSoft
Combines the benefits of a 45 flash bouncer with a flash
diffuser in one handy unit. Light loss is approximately 2 1/3
stops. Folds flat for storage. Attaches with supplied Velcro
pads or with optional UltraStrap. LQ103 24.95
Extreme Kit
Includes a wide choice of SpinLight accessories, with a choice of 3 modifiers and 4
bounce cards, giving great versatility.
Kit contents:
Ring Module
Snoot
Half Dome
White Full Dome
Clear Full Dome
Velcro Attachment
6" (15.2cm) Black Bounce Card
6" (15.2cm) White Bounce Card
4" (10cm) Black Bounce Card
4" (10cm) White Bounce Card
3 Clear Gel Disks
FULL CTO Gel
HALF CTO Gell
ST360EX 149.95
Mini Softbox
If you need the smallest possible diffuser, this gives a useful
softening effect and packs flat to 8.3 x 11.4cm. Loses 1 stop
of light. Folds flat for storage. Attaches with supplied Velcro
Big Bounce
Redirects and softens the light in the same manner as the
UltraSoft (LQ-103), with even softer results, as it is roughly
20 times the size of the flash head itself. It attaches to any
standard SLR flash gun that has a tilting head. Attaches
with supplied Velcro pads or with optional UltraStrap.
LQ104 36.95
Softbox LTp
Large 25.4 x 35.6cm surface area is about 40x that of
the flash head, so creates a much larger and softer
light source. Fits in the laptop pocket of most bags.
Folds flat for storage. Attaches with supplied Velcro
Softbox III is a similar design, but with approx 20x
increase of area. LQ119 37.95
The Better Beamer

Formerly known as the Flash X-tender, this
is designed for lenses of 300mm or longer,
and concentrates a flashguns light via a
precision plastic Fresnel lens, gaining
three stops more light (compared to
50mm setting). Good for sport and nature.
The Beamer comprises two side
supports which are held in place on the
flash head by an elastic strap so no need
to stick anything on the flash and the
lens velcroes in place on the front. Its
quick to assemble, packs flat into a bag
pocket, and weighs less than 100g.
All versions, each 37.95
FX2 for Nikon SB25/SB26, Canon 540EZ,

550EX, Metz 54MZ3, Sigma EF500 and any
gun with a depth not exceeding 45mm
FX3 for Canon 580EX, 580EX II, 600EX,
Nikon SB700
FX4 for Nikon SB800, SB600
FX5 for Canon 430EX, 430EX II
FX6 for Nikon SB900, SB910
UltraStrap
If you dont want to stick anything on your flash head, this strap wraps
securely around it and provides a Velcro surface for any Lumiquest
diffuser. LQ126 7.50
Other Lumiquest accessories stocked; we can supply
anything imported within a few days.
73
Lastolite Ezybox Hotshoe
Lastolite
Westcott
Ezybox Speedlite
Rapid Box
22x22cm size mini softbox, folding flat in the same way as

the larger Ezyboxes. Theres no need to stick hook and loop
patches on to the flash head as the Ezybox
Speedlite push fits on to any typical flash
head, and is secured safely by a hook and
loop strap around the
back of the head. Two
(removeable) diffusion layers deliver an
unrivalled softness of
light from such a
small softbox.
LAEBS 44.95
The Rapid Box opens and closes extremely quickly,

just like an umbrella, so no separate rods or
speedring need to be fitted.
Flash and trigger are be fitted to the
adjustable bracket which the standard
lighting stand 5/8 spigot attachment.
A diffusion panel fits over the front,
and an optional Deflector can be fitted
internally to create a classic beauty
dish arrangement.
Made from lightweight, durable materials,
the Rapid Box is supplied in a handy carrybag.
Micro Apollo MkII

Fits any typical bounce head style gun to give wider
and softer diffusion than a push-on diffuser. No
stick-on velcro is required: it has an internal elasticated strap which holds it in place, so its very
quick to mount or detach. Packs flat into a supplied
pouch. Two sizes.
45 Panel size 20x13cm. LA2210 26.50
60 Panel size 25x18cm. LA2214 29.50
Joe McNally
Ezybox Speedlite Plus
A development of the standard Ezybox Speedlite,
featuring one outer, and three alternative inner
diffuser options which comprise: 1 Stop Diffuser,
Soft Silver Difflector, Soft Gold Difflector. In combination with the white interior of softbox, these give
unrivalled softness and distribution for a modifier
of this size, and the ability to control colour
temperature. LA2420JM 74.95
Converts any on-camera cobra style flash

to a soft light source, which can then be
mounted on a bracket or light stand with a
standard 5/8 spigot. There are three
sizes 38, 54 and 76cm. Each is square
format and folds flat into a circular bag.
Available in a kit with light stand, and
with or without flash bracket.
Ezybox Hotshoes: 76cm, 38cm and 54cm
Ezybox Hotshoe Kits
Ezybox Hotshoe accessories
Ezybox complete with shoe bracket

LAEBH3 38cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89.95
LAEBH5 54cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106.95
LAEBH7 76cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117.30
Ezybox without shoe bracket
LAEBHX5 54cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79.95
LAEBHX7 76cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99.95
All you need to convert an on-camera flash to

create a soft, large remote light source. Comprises
an umbrella, 4-section stand and locking tilthead
umbrella holder with flash shoe, and a padded
shoulder bag.
The All-in-One umbrella has removeable fabrics
which enable the umbrella to be used as a white,
white with silver or silver bounce, or shoot-through
white. Available in two sizes:
LAUK08 80cm Umbrella Kit . . . . . 97.50
LAUK10 100cm Umbrella Kit . . . 106.40
A hand held bracket which supports the

flashgun in horizontal position along the
shaft of an umbrella. A compact and quick
to assemble shoot-through solution,
it can be used handheld or on a stand,
with a suitable length TTL flash cable
(see Canon and
Nikon options
on p79 and the
Lastolite 3m TTL
cables also on
page 79).
Brolly Grip Kit
Brolly Grip only

LA2125 18.95
includes the Grip and a 50cm

(20) translucent umbrella in
protective cover. LA2126 27.95
Trifold Umbrella
A 90cm translucent white shoot-through
umbrella with a triple folding action and
telescopic 8mm centre shaft which folds to
just 26cm closed length, so that it will fit
easily in a camera bag.
NB for use with camera flash only
LA2127 13.95
74
Mask diffusers (set of three)

LAEBHM3 Mask diffusers 38cm . . . . 41.20
Strip Masks
for 54cm Ezybox Hotshoe. LAEBSM5 45.80
Fabric Grids
LAEBG54 Grid 54cm . . . . . . . . . . . . 57.00
LAEBG76 Grid 76cm . . . . . . . . . . . . 94.00
Not available for 38cm version
All-in-One Umbrellas are available separately

see page 93
Hotrod Strip
Perfect for lighting a full length figure with a Speedlight,
a Strip typically gives controlled side lighting. Available
in two widths, the Strip has an inner diffusion panel and
comes with an adaptor plate with rods.
LAHRS3 30x120cm Strip . . 106.40
LAHRS4 40x120cm Strip . . .117.00
Optional deflector
A versatile and robust accessory

for holding a flash and trigger
with an umbrella. The clampstyle coldshoes can be adjusted
and detached if required and
there is a 1/4 socket in base for
stand mounting. The tilted
design allows the flash to point
centrally into the brolly for
more even light dispersion.
WTPG 39.00
ProGrip
PocketBox Kit
Ezybox Hotshoe Kits contain:
Ezybox Hotshoe (38cm, 54cm or 76cm)
4-section lighting stand
Tilthead bracket 2401
Extending handle 2400
Padded shoulder case and Ezybox bag
LAEBHK3 38cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149.95
LAEBHK5 54cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168.50
LAEBHK7 76cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189.95
Hotrod Octa
An alternative to a square Ezybox, the Octa provides a larger
spread of light, and attractive catchlights in the subjects eyes.
LAHROC7 70cm Octa Softbox . . . . 133.00
LAHROC9 90cm Octa Softbox . . . . 149.00
Octagonal Mini 20 . . . . 149.00

Octagonal 26 . . . . . . . . 179.00
Strip 10 x 24 . . . . . . . . 179.00
Deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.00
Speedlite ProGrip
All-in-One Umbrella Kit

Brolly Grip
WTRBOM
WTRBO
WTRBS
WTRBD
2404 Clamp with brass spigot

With male and female 5/8
connections.
LAEBHC 22.95
Extending Handles
Short 24-48cm (2400)
LAEBHH 22.50
Medium* 70-176cm (2452)
LAEBHM 59.50
Long* 74-232cm (2453)
LAEBHNL 68.70
* Medium and Long versions
have non-rotating shaft and
come with waist holder.
ProGrip handle
PocketBox Max
8x12 (20x30.5cm)
mini softbox
Carrying case
WTPGPK 59.00
ProGrip Umbrella Kit

ProGrip handle
43 (109cm) White Satin collapsible umbrella
Carrying case
WTPGUK 59.00
75
General flash accessories
Flash supports
Flash shoes and adaptors
Novoflex M-NEIGER
Kaiser 1300
Kaiser mounting shoe
Creates a PC
socket for
cameras which
only have a hot
shoe flash
contact, so that a PC
extension cord, or studio flash
sync cord can be used. KA1300 8.95
Enables a flash,
or any item with
a standard
accessory shoe
to be mounted
on a 1/4 tripod
thread.
KA1216 5.95
Nikon AS-15 adaptor
Hama mounting shoe
Atttaches to hot
shoe and
provides a PC
sync terminal for
cameras without
one.
NKAS15 23.60
Allows a flash, or
any item with a
standard accessory shoe to be
mounted on a
1/4 tripod
thread. HA6959 9.95
Hama 6952
Kaiser Sony shoe adaptor
is for older
cameras with only
a plain accessory
shoe, but having
a PC flash socket.
Plug in the 20cm
cable, and the
adaptor creates a hot shoe. HA6952 7.50
Converts the
Sony/Minolta
shoe to standard flash
type. Has no
electrical connections. KA1215 4.95
Hama 3-way sync adaptor

Plugs into a camera
with a PC socket to
provide sockets for
leads to enable up to
3 flashguns to be fired
simultaneously.
HA6963 9.95
Lastolite 2434 screw adaptor

Allows a 1/4 socket base
to be fixed to standard
accessory shoe. Double
screw locks.
LA2434 4.50
Enlight Frio
A very small ball and socket

head with insulated flash
shoe (can be detached
to reveal a 1/4
screw), and which
is strong enough
to take most flashguns. As used on
Novoflex
brackets.
NVN 20.00
Lastolite multi-flash brackets

Kaiser 1200
TriFlash Bracket
Allows fixed head

guns to be tilted
up to bounce
light off a ceiling,
or down for closeup work. Standard
accessory shoe or 1/4
screw mounting.
KA1200 12.95
Attaches to a
standard 5/8
lighting stand
spigot. Umbrella
socket placed
centrally to the
three guns. Locking
foot gives security, and
will fit the Nikon
SB900/910.
LA2423 51.50
This is is a BALL
19 (see page 38)
but with a
detachable shoe
(the same as the
Kaiser 1216). Will
support a small
camera or any
flashgun via the
accessory shoe or
on a TTL cord.
NVN19 23.00
Lastolite 2402 tilthead with

flash shoe
Lastolite 2422 tilthead with

locking shoe
Fits on a 5/8 standard

flash stand spigot.
Ratcheted swivel. Umbrella
slot and non-metal shoe
insert.
LA2402 17.95
As the 2402 type but

with lockable shoe
which is suitable for
the Nikon SB900 and
other guns with
slightly non-standard fits.
LA2422 23.95
Manfrotto 262
Metal 1/4 socket to accessory shoe adaptor e.g.
for Nikon TTL cords
MA262 9.95
Wein Safe-Sync
Hot-shoe PC adaptor with a built-in
voltage regulator that will protect any of
the latest digital and conventional
cameras from the potentially damaging
trigger voltages
of older flash
heads, reducing
it to a safe 6v
maximum.
WESS 54.00
76
Buy 3+ and get 10% discount

Allows any flash or accessory item with a
standard hotshoe (including the Nikon
SB900) to be fitted to a light stand or
tripod with a 1/4 screw with the extra
security of a quick release lock. Its easy to
grasp the tab and depress the spring lock
to remove the flash, and a lanyard slot on
the front allows the Frio to be hung
securely. ENFCA 9.95
Tilthead with spigot

Standard studio 5/8
spigot fittings:
female on base, male
on the tilting top.
LAEBHB 22.50
Manfrotto 175F-1 clamp

A strong spring clamp which will attach to surfaces up
to 40mm thick, with a 492 ball head and flash shoe.
The shoe can be detached to reveal a 1/4 screw if
required, and alternative mounting is via a 5/8
spigot socket, which is standard on lighting stands.
Weight 420g, max load 2kg. MA175F 56.95
Nikon flash stands are on page 69
High power guns get through a lot of AA batteries, and you might not want the inconvenience of carrying multiple sets of rechargeables. Pro digital SLRs are also power-hungry,
especially when the review sceen is used a lot. A Quantum Turbo battery will dramatically
improve flash recycling and working times. They are adapted to a variety of equipment by
using specially designed cables, so you need to add this to the price of the battery. All
batteries come with UK plug charger which auto-adapts to 100240v.
Turbo battery for camera and flash together
Manfrotto 026 Lite Tite

Tilthead
A tilting mount
which allows a
brolly to be used
with a camera
flash. Fits on a
standard 5/8
flash stand
spigot, or 1/4
or 3/8 screw.
Has a 1/4 or
3/8 reversible
top screw, so a
TTL cord, shoe or trigger can be directly
attached. MA026 25.90
Novoflex NEIGER-19
Quantum batteries
The TriFlash bracket

allows up to three shoemount flashguns to be
used with a single
umbrella.
Triflash Sync
Identical to the Locking shoe version but
with built-in slave cell to trigger each
flash. Dummy cold shoe and PC connection
supplied for use with Pocket Wizard.
LA2455 88.95
Turbo 3
The most powerful Quantum battery ever
puts its power through the flashguns AC
or high voltage input socket (for this
reason some guns cant use them).
Dual sockets power two flashguns or
camera and flash. NiMH batteries give
between 1000 and 7500 flashes depend-
Lastolite Ezybox Quad Bracket

Whether you are looking for power to rival
a mains powered studio flash head, or a
faster recycling time, using up to four
flashguns could be the answer. The Ezybox
Quad bracket enables either umbrellas or
Ezybox Studio softboxes (see page 93) to
be fitted.
Guns are situated close to the centre of
the umbrella or softbox
Two umbrellas can be used (as shown);
there are twin 8mm and 10mm shaft
sockets
Accessory shoe allows triggering
receiver like PocketWizard to be fitted
Kit includes PC and 3.5mm cables
Strong, robust design
LA2530 97.50
Turbo 3 camera cables

2m coiled leads for belt mounting.
QUSD10 Nikon D200, D2X/H, D3
Fuji S5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.95
QUSD6
Canon EOS 1D/1D2/1DS . 36.95
QUSD7
Canon EOS 5D2,3/7D . . 105.70
QUCD30 Canon EOS 30D/50D/5D . . 68.90
Turbo batteries for flashguns

Turbo Slim Compact
Quad Bracket
The basic bracket is available on its own to
take just umbrellas, and comes with PC
and 3.5mm cables. LA2535 53.20
PCPC flash leads
Identifying PC plugs
Except 6938, have malefemale plugs.

HA6973 Hama 3m straight cord . . . 5.75
HA6975 Hama 5m straight cord . . . 6.50
HA6938 Hama female-female
coiled cord (useful for some Nikon guns
and other flash connections). . . . . . 10.95
The male PC plug has an outer casing

with small central signal
connector.The female socket
(usually found on the
camera body) looks like this
. . . and yet more flash accessories

Dedicated TTL flash leads and other
triggering devices are on pages 7981
ing on the combination, for all-day reliability. Recycling time from full power is
about 1 sec: virtually instantaneous from
partial. Supplied with a universal UK 3-pin
charger which works with all voltages.
New type 2 cables will lock in place, but all
other Turbo cables can be used.
QUT3 519.00
More Manfrotto lighting adaptors are

on page 95
Light and small NiMH high voltage pack

for flash. Weighs just 425g, and will fit in
a pocket or attach to a belt using the
supplied belt clip. Universal voltage
charger gives a fast 1.5hr charge time
from empty; will give around 400 flashes
per charge for a 6v gun. Compatible with
all Turbo C and CC cables. QUTSC 399.00
Turbo 3/Slim Compact long

flash cables
2m coiled leads for belt mounting.
QUCKE2 Nikon SB800/900/910 . . 49.00
QUCM5 Metz 54MZ3/4, 50/70MZ. 52.30
QUCZ2
Canon 550/580/600EX . . 49.00
QUT49
10/3m extension cable . 54.00
QUSD14 12v car adaptor. . . . . . . . 48.50
Turbo Blade
Compact and powerful battery which

attaches neatly to the base of most DSLR
cameras. Supplied with universal charger
which recharges from empty in 1.5 hours.
Powers 6v or 9v guns. A shoe mount flash
recycles in 1.4sec from full power; gives
400 flashes, or 250 for a hammerhead
gun. High strength polymer case weighing
just 420g. Compatible with all Turbo C and
CC cables. QUTB 399.00
Turbo Blade short cables

0.5m long, for under camera mounting.
QUCCKE Nikon SB800/900/910 . . 39.50
QUCCZ
Canon 550/580/600EX . . 39.50
Long cables can be used if belt mounted
77
Flash brackets
CB Digital-SB
Hama straight bracket
TTL cords
Custom Brackets
Flash-rotating
brackets
how they work
No matter how
powerful and
sophisticated the
flashgun, simply
mounting it on
the camera, or
on a small side
bracket,
produces harsh
and ugly
shadows behind
the subject.
For natural and
flattering results
you need your
flash centred
high above the
lens, eliminating red eye, and throwing
shadows down behind the subject, and
to do it whether the camera is mounted
horizontally or vertically.
The answer is to use a flash rotating
bracket.Theres one to suit most DSLR
and CSC cameras, and most photographers working styles.
There are two styles of bracket:
flash-flipping types like the Digital-T
and CB Junior, where an arm pivots
through 180, and the quadrant arm
type like the RF-Pro Rapid Fire.The
latter is compact and a bit handier to
use in certain situations, but the greater
height of the flash obtained on the
other brackets will give superior results
when shooting larger groups further
away from the camera position, as
shadows will be pushed further down.
For the most compact solution,
which will give some improvement by
removing ugly side shadows on portrait
format shots, the Mini-RC is a handy
and inexpensive answer.
78
160mm long metal bracket, with one fixed

and one sliding 1/4 screw. NKSK7 13.95
A lightweight, compact folding bracket which

allows the flash to be quickly repositioned
above the lens when the camera is horizontal
or vertical, thus avoiding harsh side shadows.
Takes largest pro-sized DSLR bodies
Side arm adjustable for different size lenses
Fold-out leg allows it to stand upright
Built-in camera and flash anti-twist mounts
Weight 292g. CTRFP 199.00
RF-Pro AS version
Simple, but high quality, fixed L-bracket

for all types of camera, with a locking shoe
mount on the handle. Ideal for video use.
Made from black anodised aluminium,
just like the more expensive Custom
Brackets, with a comfortable foam grip
Fixed standard accessory shoe mount
accepts lights, microphones etc.
1/4" base socket for tripod mounting
Weight 184g. CTDSB 32.95
CB Folding-T
RF Pro folded
A 1.5m coiled
cord which maintains TTL flash
operation off
camera, with
either digital or
film Nikon SLRs.
Also includes two
multiple flash
terminals.
NKSC28 58.50
Hama folding bracket
Canon Off Camera Shoe Cord

OC-E3
Nicely-finished bracket to allow sidemounting of flash or accessory. Has

woven hand strap, cable
release slot, and can be
tripod mounted.
HA6831 17.95
Allows one Speedlite (or an independent

make Canon dedicated gun) to be used off
camera up to 60cm away. The flash shoe
fits either a standard accessory shoe or
1/4 screw for tripod mounting.
CAOC3 58.95
CB Digital-T
A simple flash-rotating bracket
for pro-size SLRs, or cameras
with accessory battery grips
attached. As pictured, your
hand rotates anti-clockwise to
the vertical, bringing the
secondary grip and release in
the correct position, but it can
be used the other way around if
you prefer to use the grip for
extra support. Nominal lens to
flash distance 28cm; weight 397g.
CTDT 38.80
Nikon SC-29
TTL cord
As the SC-28 but
includes a switchable
AF illuminator
when used
SB600/700/
900/910.
Does not have multiple
flash terminals.
NKSC29 68.95
Manfrotto 233B
2-section black-anodised
aluminium. Height is adjustable
between 3045cm, and the arm
can be swivelled in two planes to
tilt forwards or back, or to move
TTL cords like the Nikon SC-28
can be mounted directly on the
1/4 thread, or you can use the
Hama 6959 shown on p76 to
create a mount for any flash.
MA233B 56.95
RF-Pro Manfrotto RC2 . . 219.00
Lastolite 3m TTL Cord

Where wireless is not an option, and the
camera makers leads cost an arm and a
leg, this 3 metre long cord fits the bill.
Compatible with current dedication levels.
LATTLC
LATTLN
LATTLP
LATTLO
LATTLS
The paparazzos favourite, the Mini-RC

keeps the flash close to the lens to create
a really compact setup and minimise side
shadows. The bracket offset allows full
access to a secondary shutter release.
Weight 170g. CTMRC 32.50
Based on the Digital-T design, this bracket

offers the same functionality, but with the
ability to fold to make it easier to store in
a bag. Finely engineered pivots do not
compromise the rigidity of the design.
Height 24.1cm, weight 377g. CTFT 67.40
Novoflex Flash Grip
Kaiser 1303 shoe adaptor
Custom Brackets accessories

CTAT
AT Camera Anti-twist Bar 11.00
CTCNJR CN-JR Canon/Nikon Mt . . 17.95
CTMC
MC Cold Shoe . . . . . . . . . 18.50
CTQRACK QRA-C Arca Adaptor . . . . 74.00
The FLASH-GRIFF is a very solid high

quality modular grip with an M-NEIGER
ball head. The shoe on the head can be
removed leaving a 1/4 screw, and the
head can be raised with the rods or arms
shown on p41. NVFG 89.00
Allows a standard camera flash to be triggered by PocketWizard or similar. Two

30cm adaptor leads are supplied, one for
3.5mm sockets, one for 2.5mm sockets
like FlashWave. The shoe has a 1/4
socket. KA1303 19.95
Wein Peanut Slave Trigger

Fire another flash
with this white
light sensitive
trigger. Attaches
to PC cord; weighs
under 15g. 30m
indoor range.
WEP 17.40
Trigger adaptors
The socket size on Elinchrom Skyport and
PocketWizard triggers is 3.5mm; on the
FlashWave its 2.5mm. Here are some
useful adaptors. If your hotshoe flash
doesnt have any socket, the Kaiser 1303
will allow triggering via the hotshoe.
PocketWizard 3.5mm plug

leads and adaptors
PC male to 3.5mm cable
30cm lockable. PWPC1N
10.95
PC female to 3.5 adaptor
(below) converts std malemale PC lead to a 3.5mm
jack at one end. Lockable.
PWMPCFL 8.95
Canon E-TTL . . . . . . . . . . 31.00

Nikon i-TTL . . . . . . . . . . . 31.00
Pentax P-TTL . . . . . . . . . . 31.00
Olympus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.00
Sony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.00
Trigger adaptor cords
CB Mini-RC
Nikon SC-28 TTL cord
Nikon SK-7
RF-Pro Rapid Fire
CTRFPM
Slave
180mm long plastic bracket, with sliding

camera screw to allow variable positioning of flash or accessory at the cameras
side. HA6811 4.95
Custom Brackets are precision engineered in the USA from

black anodised aluminium. The quadrant camera rotating
device runs on roller bearings and has click stop location at
each end of the travel. Tilting arms are spring loaded so that
they stay in place when the bracket is tilted. All the brackets
featured on this page will take the largest pro DSLR camera
bodies. Accessories, such as quick releases for camera or
bracket are available to enhance their operation.
RF-Pro AS Rapid Fire

Same as the standard
version, but with a builtin Arca-compatible
camera quick release.
CTRRFAS 219.00
Flash triggering
1/4 jack to 3.5mm cables

30cm. PWMP1 10.95
91cm. PWMP3 10.95
PocketWizard HSFM3 cable

Non-TTL sync lead for flashguns without a
socket, connects PocketWizard 3.5mm to a
standard hotshoe fitting (excluding
Sony/Minolta). Hotshoe has 1/4" female
socket on the underside to allow attachment to stands/tiltheads etc. Length
91cm (3). PWHSFM3 24.95
3.5mm to 3.5mm (Wizardplug) cable

30cm. PWMM1 9.95
2.53.5mm
adaptor
PWSMFMS 5.95
Non-TTL PC cords, adaptors are on p76
79
Wireless flash triggers

Phottix Strato II Multi
Provides radio triggering of one or more
remote flashguns, using the 2.4GHz
frequency, with a 150m range.
Four channels allow up to four groups
of guns to be independently
controlled, and avoid local interference
from other photographers
Transmitter has a pass-through facility
to allow an on-camera flash to be used
without triggering
Cables for Canon and Nikon cameras
are included to allow use for camera
triggering (with suitable socket)
Supports sync speeds up to 1/250th sec;
flash wake up with compatible units
PC and 3.5mm sockets on transmitter;
3.5/2.5mm on receiver, which has
accessory shoe or 1/4 socket.
Each unit takes 2 x AAA batteries
Cactus does not transmit TTL information,

although TTL signals will pass through the
hotshoe to a gun mounted on the
transceiver. It will control 4 groups of
guns, and allow +/- 3 stop adjustment of
power in up to 0.1EV increments to each
group.
More than 30 profiles from flashguns
from Canon, Nikon, Pentax and independent manufacturers are installed
Different power guns can be used in
each group, as Cactus benchmarks the
GN of each one and ensures that each
emits the same amount of light
Very easy and quick, using a selection
dial and a combination of group
buttons
2.4GHz; 16 channels; 4 groups.
Maximum range 100m+
Power input: 2 xAA, mini USB2.0, DC
5v, 500mA-1A
CSV6 49.95
Kit with Transmitter and 1 Receiver

PHSETC Canon PHSETN Nikon
99.00
Extra Receiver
PHSRC Canon
49.00
PHSRN Nikon
SMDV FlashWave III

A reliable radio slave system for use with
hotshoe or studio flashguns, or to trigger
compatible cameras. 16 channels can be
selected on the 2.4GHz frequency band.
As well as a built-in hotshoe, the
receiver unit has 3.5mm and PC sockets,
and comes with cables to connect to most
guns in common use. It can work at up to
8fps and up to 1/250th sync speeds, and
will withstand flash trigger voltages of up
to 300v, so is safe for use with older
heads. Its powered by 2 x AA batteries.
The transmitter is very compact, and
like the receiver, has a robust build
quality. A 2.5mm socket enables it to be
triggered via a PC terminal and it uses
a single CR2450 3v battery.
LAFWK 97.00
Feature

PHSRTC Canon PHSRTN Nikon
119.00
Extra Receiver
PHSRTRC Canon PHSRTRN Nikon
59.00
Cactus V6
Phottix Strato II
Phottix Strato TTL
Phottix Odin
PocketWizard TL
SMDV Flashwave
100m
150m
100m
100m
500m
500m
240m (TTL)
180m
No of channels
16
10
16/32
35
16
No of flash groups
Range
80
Comprehensive collection of
cables is supplied
PocketWizard PlusX PocketwizardPlus III
Max sync speed
1/1000th
1/250th
1/8000th HSS
1/8000th HSS
1/250th
1/250th
1/8000th
1/250th
Max triggering freq
not stated
not stated
not stated
3-4fps
14.5fps
14.5fps
511fps
8fps
Transmitter shoe
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Receiver terminal
3.5mm
3.5mm/PC
3.5mm
3.5mm
3.5mm
3.5mm
3.5mm
3.5mm/PC
Transmitter battery
2 x AA
2 x AAA
2 x AA
2 x AA
2 x AA
2 x AA
CR2450
CR2450
Receiver battery
2 x AA
2 x AAA
2 x AA
2 x AA
2 x AA
2 x AA
2 x AA
2 x AA
TTL control
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
EV adjustment
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Will trigger camera
No
Yes
No
No
Yes (extra cable)
Yes (extra cable)
Yes (extra cable)
Yes (extra cable)
Cactus
Phottix
V6 Odin TTL
A simplified triggering system with the

professional build quality of the other
PocketWizard transceivers. Also, an ideal
low cost addition to an existing
PocketWizard outfit.
Auto-senses whether it is acting as
transmitter or receiver
10 channels are selected by a rotary
dial with a permanently backlit number
All receivers operate in a single zone
43MHz frequency with 500m range
Max sync speed 1/250th (1/50th leaf
shutters); triggering frequency 14.5fps
Auto-relay can be used to trigger
camera (requires extre cable)
Tri-colour LED indicates battery life and
transmit/receive status
Powered by 2 x AA batteries
Includes 3.53.5mm, 3.5PC, stereo
3.56.3mm (1/4) cables
Independent output control of Canon, Nikon

and Pentax guns same make or mixed!
The Odin gives built-in control for up to
three groups of Canon or Nikon flashgun
up to 100m away, and can also trigger
Phottix Strato receivers.
Uses 2.4GHz frequency with a
choice of 4 channels
Groups can be set as TTL controlled
with +/-3 stop adjustment, TTL
Manual/Mixed, Manual only or Off
High Speed (1/8000th sec) and second
curtain sync supported
Zoom control can auto-follow lens or
can be set manually from transmitter
Units each use 2 x AA batts (supplied)
Kit includes Transmitter and Receiver,
3.5mm-PC, 3.5-3.5mm cables, 1/4 jack
adaptor, USB cable, lanyard.
Set of 2 x PlusX Transceivers

PWPXSET 139.95
Single PlusX Transceiver
PWPX 79.95
Class-leading trigger, renowned for its

reliable bomb-proof operation.
Auto-senses whether it is acting as
transmitter or receiver, and can be
manually over-ridden
32 selectable channels (16 standard
and 16 for quad-zone operation)
Four separate zones allow flashes to be
switched on and off
Durable sleek design with rubberised
buttons and internal antenna
Backlit display shows battery status,
selected zones, and channel and operation mode
433MHz frequency with 500m range
Max sync speed 1/250th (1/500th leaf
shutters); triggering frequency 14.5fps
Supplied with 3.5-3.5mm, 3.5mm-PC
and 3.5mm-1/4
Mini USB socket allows a compatible
mains adaptor to be connected, and
firmware updates
PocketWizard cables
Flash cables
See p79 for information. Many other types
are available (e.g. for Metz hammerhead).
To order, usually within a few days.
Nikon Power Cable PW-DC-N10
Powers a Mini TT1, Plus III or
Multimax from a Nikon 10pin socket. Keeps Mini TT1
awake. Hardly any
power drain.
PWDCN10 14.95

PHOSETC Canon PHOSETN Nikon
249.00
Kit with Transmitter and 2 Receivers
PHOSET2C Canon PHOSET2N Nikon
299.00
Extra Receiver
PHORC Canon
PHORN Nikon
99.00
PocketWizard ControlTL system
PocketWizard Plus III
Phottix Strato TTL

An easy to use 2.4GHz radio triggering
system, supporting key TTL flash features
including a maximum sync speed of
1/8000th second.
Four channels, and EV over a range of
+/- 3 stops in 1/3 stop increments
Compatible with Strato I and Strato II
units, and adaptable to studio lights
In-camera flash menu functions are
supported
USB port for firmware upgrades (USB
to mini USB cable is supplied)
Each unit uses 2 x AA batteries and has
5v external power socket
PocketWizard PlusX
TTL control for Canon or Nikon flashguns.

Mini TT1 Transmitter
Translates the digital information to RF
signals (433.42-434.42 MHz) and transmits to one or more external Speedlites,
each attached to a Flex TT5 transceiver.
Also allows another Speedlite to be
mounted on its hotshoe.
HyperSync mode allows sync speeds of
1/8000th or higher, even if this is beyond
the maximum of the camera.
Utlility Program allows all parameters
to be managed via USB connection from a
computer including future upgrades.
149.00
PWTT1C Canon
PWTT1N Nikon
Powered by 2 x AA batteries
Set of 2 x Plus III Transceivers
PWP3SET 219.00
Single Plus III Transceiver
PWP3 119.00
-ACC Camera cables
1m long pre-trigger compatible cables
which are supplied with a miniphone
adaptor for use with the PTMM pre-trigger
adaptor below. Also in 3 (91cm) lengths.
PWCME31 Canon CM-E3 . . . . . . . . . 17.95
PWCMN3 Canon CM-N3 . . . . . . . . . 22.95
PWMCC21 Nikon MC-DC2 . . . . . . . . . 21.95
PWN101 Nikon 10-pin. . . . . . . . . . 21.95
Pre-trigger Adaptor PTMM

Converts an -ACC cable. Pre-trigger switch
keeps camera awake. PWPTMM 17.95
FlexTT5 Transceiver
Two channel configuration settings, each
of which can be programmed with up to 20
TTL or 35 standard (manual flash) channels. 3 zone selector switch for use with
Canon zones and ratios.
Also acts as an auto-sensing trigger,
switching to Auto Relay Mode, so that as
well as controlling an attached flash it
could trigger any other PW receiver (e.g.
to fire a second camera simultaneously).
149.00
PWTT5C Canon
PWTT5N Nikon
AC3 Zone Controller
Allows you to control
three independent
groups of guns from
your camera position, in
either E-TTL or manual
modes. PWAC3 59.95
G-Wiz cases
for all types of PocketWizard units
G-Wiz 2x Case
A padded case to take 2 x TT5 and 1 x TT1
TL, or 2 x Plus II/Plus III/Multimax
transceivers. PWGWC 16.95
G-Wiz Trunk
Larger case for 3 x TT5s and 1 x TT1, plus
an AC3 and accessories. PWGWT 19.95
G-Wiz Squared
Cuboid case for 4 x PWIII size transceivers.
Black, blue or orange. 19.95
G-Wiz Vault
Takes 610 transceivers, or a pro-size
DSLR body. Black, blue or orange. 22.95
81
BRX To Go Kit
Elinchrom have redefined mid-price studio

flash with the hugely popular
D-Lite RX flash heads. All heads feature
reliable radio triggering.
Built-in EL-Skyport receiver means
there is no chance of misplacing a
plug-in accessory one
Intelligent slave cell works with oncamera guns with pre-flash
Intelligent fan turns on only when
needed
1/10th stop accurate digital control
within +/- 1.5% over a 5 stop range
5v trigger voltage: safe for any camera
Plug-in user changeable flash tube
Auto-adjusts to all voltages from
110240v, you just need to swap the
modelling lamp
Switchable slave cell and ready beep
Proportional/full/minimum/off
D-Lite RX heads
Include UK mains cable, modelling lamp,
head cover and sync cable. Please note
that reflectors are extra.
ELDL1
D-Lite RX One head . . . . 141.00
ELDL2
D-Lite RX 2 head . . . . . . 216.50
ELDL4
D-Lite RX 4 head . . . . . . 249.90
Triggers
82
modelling lamp control

Conforms to the most stringent
electrical safety standards
100w/secs
32.5
1/1200th sec
5 stops
0.44-1.5 secs
100w
No
18x19cm
0.9kg
200w/secs
45.3
1/1200th sec
5 stops
0.25-0.7 secs
100w
Yes
21x16cm
1.1kg
400w/secs
64.3
1/800th sec
5 stops
0.4-1.3 secs
100w
Yes
21x16cm
1.3kg
D-Lite RX Two-Head Softbox Kits
D-Lite RX One Umbrella Kit
2 x D-Lite heads with sync leads,

modelling lamps, mains cables
1 x Skyport Speed radio trigger
2 x 66cm square softboxes
1 x 16cm reflector
(not included in RX One Kit)
2 x Clip-lock stands
1 x Protective cap
1 x 2-head semi-hard carrying case
1 x Soft stand/brolly bag
D-Lite 1 ELDL1KIT 425.00
Includes two
heads, 2 x
83cm
white
translucent
brollies
and
reflectors, head
covers, stands,
leads, Skyport
Speed transmiter,
carrying bags.
ELDL1UKIT
369.00
Kits include a
Skyport Speed
Transmitter
Skyport Wi-fi
Allows control of up to 4 groups of heads
from iPhone or iPad, freeing you from the
need to carry a computer. ELSPW 149.95
Skyport USB Transceiver MkII
In conjunction with free downloadable
software, allows control of multiple RXequipped heads from a computer.
ELSPUSB 89.00
Skyport Universal Speed Set
Converts most makes of flash head to
radio triggering. Transmitter and receiver.
ELSPUSET 99.95
ELSPUR Universal Receiver . . . . . 79.95
Flash tubes
Stands
They do eventually wear out, or you might

have a nasty accident. Either way, they are
user replaceable, and we can supply one
usually within a few days.
ELTUBEDL D-Lite, Quadra S . . . . . . 59.00
ELTUBEBX BXRi, BRX, Quadra A . . . 99.00
ELTUBERX 300/600RX . . . . . . . . . . . 99.00
Cliplock Stand
Standard Elinchrom stand. Max height
235cm, closed 88cm. Load 5kg. Weight
1.45kg. EL30101 46.50
Air Cushioned Stand
Heavy duty stand with extra security. Max
height 264cm, closed 105cm. Load 9kg.
Weight 2.09kg. EL30143 68.95
Backlight Stand
Compact low level stand with detachable column. Height base only 9cm;
with column 48-85cm. Weight
1.32kg. EL30139B 55.00
Kit prices
250/250
ELBRX250/250
849.00
250/500
ELBRX250/500
899.00
500/500
ELBRX500/500
859.00
These 2-head kits include:

2 x Elinchrom BRX heads
2 x Portalite 66cm softbox
1 x Skyport Speed transmitter
2 x Protective caps
1 x 2-head soft case
2 x mains cables
D-Lite RX One D-Lite RX 2 D-Lite RX 4

Flash energy
f stop 1m/ISO100
Flash duration t0.5
Flash adjustment
Recycling time
Modelling lamp
Fan cooling
Dimensions
Weight
BXRi is Elinchroms entry-level professional range, suitable for all but the most
intensive use, and featuring built-in
wireless triggering.
Built-in EL-Skyport receiver
Proportional/full/off modelling lamp
Accurate 1/10th stop power adjustment over a 5 stop range
Programmable photo cell for auto
preflash detection and more
Modelling lamp can be set to turn off
while flash recharges.
Automatic temperature controlled ventilation fan operates when needed
Impact-resistant body; rubberised
handgrip with built-in fuse storage
Multivoltage, from 90270v
Heads only (include UK mains cable,

modelling lamp, head cover and sync cable.
Please note that reflectors are extra)
ELBXRH250 250 w/s. . . . . . . . . . . . 325.00
ELBXRH500 500 w/s. . . . . . . . . . . . 359.00
Flash energy
f stop 1m/ISO100
Flash duration t0.5
Flash adjustment
Recycling time
Modelling lamp
Fan cooling
Dimensions
Weight
Kits include a
Skyport Speed
Transmitter
BRX 250
BRX 500
250 w/secs
64
1/1272sec
5 stops
0.29-0.73secs
100w
Yes
26x19x14cm
1.85kg
500 w/secs
90
1/1558th
5 stops
0.36-1.13 secs
100w
Yes
26x19x14cm
2.05kg
ELC Pro HD
Latest state-of-the-art pro head offers a
range of creative modes offers the ability
to take stroboscopic images within a
single frame at up to 20 flashes per
second, delayed sync at any point between
first and second curtain, and sequential
triggering of up to 20 ELC heads.
Built-in RX Skyport radio triggering has
8 channels and 4 groups, and links to
optional USB Remote Controller for
comprehensive multi-unit control
Intuitive interface has a clear OLED
readout and combined rotary control
and test button
Continuous digitally-controlled power
adjustment over a 7 or 8 stop range
Programmable photo cell allows automatic pre-flash detection and more
Modelling lamp can be set to turn off
while the flash recharges
Automatic temperature controlled
ventilation - the low-noise fan only
operates when needed
Robust fire-retardant shell with
rubberised handle
Auto-detects voltage, from 90270v
STUDIO
BRX
ELC Pro HD To Go Kit

2-head kits include:
2 x Elinchrom ELC Pro HD heads
2 x Wide angle reflectors
1 x Skyport Speed transmitter
1 x Pro Tec Poly bag
2 x mains cables
5m sync cable
Heads only
Includes 16cm reflector as
well as cables etc.
ELC500 714.00
ELC1000 924.00
Kit prices
500/500
ELC500/500
1535.00
1000/1000
ELC1000/1000
1955.00
Pro HD 500 Pro HD 1000

Flash energy
f stop 1m/ISO100
Flash duration t0.5
Flash adjustment
Recycling time
Modelling lamp
Fan cooling
Dimensions
Weight
500 w/secs
64.8
1/2330th sec
7 stops
0.75 sec
300w GX6.35
Yes
31.5x21x14cm
2.35kg
1000 w/secs
90.8
1/1430th sec
8 stops
1.5 sec
300w GX6.35
Yes
31.5x21x14cm
2.9kg
83
Elinchrom accessories
Reflectors
Standard Reflector
21cm
Gives a high output,
with a 50 spread of
light. 21cm grids push
in to a recess at the front.
ELR21 28.80
GP Reflector 18cm
Has a wide 60
spread of light, and
takes push-in 18cm
grids. ELR18 27.80
Wide Reflector
16cm
Best for use with
umbrellas, its 90
light angle is also
good for copying.
ELR16 23.00
Softlite Reflectors
Often called Beauty Dishes, with slightly
harder lighting than a softbox giving
better definition of facial features. The
included Deflector Set can modify the
colour and softness. The light can be
further softened with the optional showercap diffuser. Two sizes available.
ELSL44S Softlite 44cm silver . . . . 102.70
ELSL44W Softlite 44cm white. . . . 102.70
ELSL70S Softlite 70cm silver . . . . 177.30
ELSL70W Softlite 70cm white. . . . 177.30
Previously known as Minisoft and Maxisoft
Portalite softboxes
Portalites are made out of
the same quality material
as Elinchrom uses for
Rotalux but with a
simplified construction to enable lower
prices. There are
two sizes of
square softbox,
and an octagonal box
(pictured) which
in conjunction with
a Deflector can be
used as a beauty dish.
ELPSB53 Portalite Square 53cm. . . 84.95

ELPSB66 Portalite Square 66cm. . 104.95
ELPSBO Portalite Octa 56cm . . . 106.95
Background reflector
Gives an oval pool of
evenly distributed
light for backgrounds
and still life. Rotates
360; 32x21cm.
ELRB 46.90
Elinchrom Ranger
Quadra Hybrid
Rotalux
softboxes are
quick to assemble, and fold
down like an
umbrella to
store in a convenient carrying case.
The lightweight speedring allows the box
to rotate 360.
The power of a studio

flash from a small
head which will fit
on a camera flash
bracket! The Quadra
Asymmetric takes
the battery power
concept of the existing
Ranger packs and shrinks
it to a size which can be
carried easily over the shoulder.
Hybrid means that heads and battery
control packs are compatible with both
lead gel and lithium-ion battery packs
(different chargers for these are still
required). There are two versions, which
offer different flash durations: the
Standard S Head, and A Fast Head.
S Head
A Head
A Outlet (100%) 1/1200s
1/2800s
B Outlet (33%)
1/3000s
1/5800s
With 2 heads
1/1500s
1/4000s
Square and rectangular softboxes

ELRS070 70x70cm . . . . . . . . . . . . 145.20
ELRS100 100x100cm . . . . . . . . . . 189.90
ELRS608 60x80cm . . . . . . . . . . . . 145.20
ELRS903 90x35cm . . . . . . . . . . . . 145.20
ELRS911 90x110cm . . . . . . . . . . . 189.90
ELRS1305 130x50cm . . . . . . . . . . . 189.90
Octagonal softboxes
ELRSO100 Octagonal 100cm . . . . . 189.90
ELRSD070 Deep Octagonal 70cm . . 189.90
ELRSD100 Deep Octagonal 100cm . 223.40
ELOCTA Octa Lightbank 197cm . 799.00
Snoot and Grid Set

The Snoot gives a 15 controlled spot of
light, with a hard edge shadow. The grid
sharpens this further.
ELSSET 46.90
14cm Translucent Deflector
Elinchrom is the only flash head with a
central umbrella slot. Deflectors are used
with reflectors or softboxes to shape,
soften or tone sharp shadow edges.
ELDEFT 19.00
ELDEFSET14 14cm Deflector Set . . . . 27.80
18cm Reflector & Grid Set

includes 30 honeycomb. ELRSET 44.90
Rotalite softboxes
Umbrellas
Hooded diffusers
ELRSH070 H/Diffuser 70cm . . . . . . . 52.40
ELRSH100 H/Diffuser 100cm . . . . . . 66.30
ELRSH608 H/Diffuser 60x80cm . . . . 52.40
ELRSH903 H/Diffuser 90x35cm . . . . 66.30
ELRSH911 H/Diffuser 90x100cm . . . 52.40
ELRSH1305 H/Diffuser 130x50cm . . . 66.30
ELRSHO100 H/Diffuser Octa 100 . . . . 66.30
Modelling lamps
EL100W
EL200W
EL205W
EL300W
21cm Barndoor Set

controls light spillage and direction; made
from matt black finish heat resistant
aluminium. Set includes barndoors and
21cm accessory holder. Gel filters shown
are extra. ELBS21 88.70
ELBS21PH 21cm Accessory holder . . 32.70
ELG2110 21cm coloured gels (10) . 27.50
ELG2120 21cm coloured gels (20) . 41.30
84
ECO Umbrella Set

A great value pair of 83cm brollies in
translucent white and silver. 7mm shaft
diameter. ELUSET 27.90
Professional umbrellas
Superior construction to cope with the
rigours of daily professional use. Super
white versions have black backing for
maximum reflectivity.
ELU83S 83cm silver . . . . . . . . . . . 23.00
ELU83T 83cm translucent white . 27.90
ELU85W 85cm super white . . . . . . 37.40
ELU105S 105cm silver . . . . . . . . . . 46.90
ELU105T 105cm translucent white 32.60
ELU105W 105cm super white . . . . . 42.20
100w tungsten . . . . . . . . . 6.50

200w GX6.35 halogen . . . 12.00
205w Halolux ECO . . . . . . 15.00
300w GX6.35 halogen . . . 12.00
Other accessories
ELCAP
Protective head cap . . . . 11,75
ELSGS3 Snoot Grids (3) . . . . . . . . 64.40
EL18HS 18cm Honeycomb Set (18cm
reflector plus 12, 20, 30 grids) . 158.70
EL21HSB 21cm Honeycomb Set Basic
(21cm reflector plus 20, 30 grids)102.60
ELSYNC 5m sync lead RX/Classic . 27.50
ELSYNCX 5m sync lead FX/BX/D. . . 27.50
ELADAP 1/4 6.5mm jack adaptor 44.00
Intelligent flash power options. Use as

a single outlet for high power and
superfast recycling, or both outlets for
an asymmetric 2:1 ratio.
Ranger Quadra Hybrid Kits

Two head Pro Kit
ELRQKGA A Kit Gel battery . . . . 1399.00
ELRQKLA A Kit Li-Ion battery . . 1679.00
ELRQKGS S Kit Gel battery . . . . 1349.00
ELRQKLS S Kit Li-Ion battery . . 1629.00
Single head Pro Kit
ELRQKWGA A Kit Gel battery . . . . . 999.00
ELRQKWLA A Kit Li-Ion battery . . 1199.00
Ranger Quadra
Ringflash ECO Set
Daylight balanced 50w LED modelling

light is bright enough to use as a
continuous fill useful for DSLRs with
video capability
Remote control of power settings and
flash triggering from Skyport transmitter: now also works with Skyport RX
computer software
Intelligent slave cell. Red-eye preflash
detection plus programmable and pre
set effect modes
Battery charges in 2 hours and gives
150 full power flashes on slow recycle
Low weight: battery 1.6kg, power unit
1.4kg. Head size is 9x8x11cm and
weight just 250g
Power output adjustable from 8.2400
w/secs; a 6.6 f-stop range
Recycle time 2.2sec, full power, fast
Colour temperature 5560K
Ranger Quadra Hybrid heads
ELRQHA A head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285.00
ELRQHS S head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258.00
A lightweight and relatively low cost proringflash which in conjunction with the
Ranger Quadra Hybrid power pack will
output 400w/s, so making it ideal for
many fashion, nature, medical and other
applications. Its supplied with a white
push-on diffuser cap, and is available with
either lead gel or lithium-ion battery.
ECO Ringflash Set includes:

Ranger Quadra RX Battery Pack with
multivoltage charger and strap
ECO Ringflash head with 2m cable
Skyport Speed Transmitter
ELRQRESETG ECO Set Gel battery . 1119.00
ELRQRESTL ECO Set Li-Ion batt . 1229.00
ELRQFE
ECO Ringflash head . . 335.00
Ranger Quadra accessories

RQ Portalite
40x40cm
Attaches directly
to the Quadra
head.
ELRQSB40
89.90
RQ Portalite Octa 56cm

A favourite light source for portrait and
beauty work as it gives attractive round
catchlights in the eyes. ELRQSB56 111.00
Ranger Q EL Adaptor
Allows standard Elinchrom
bayonet accessories to be
used with Ranger Q heads.
ELRQADAP 69.00
RQ Snappy
Gives some knock protection to the battery pack
and extra carrying
comfort. n.b. requires RQ
Shoulder Strap (supplied
with kits).
ELRQSANP 19.20
Diffuser Cap/Filter
Holder
Snaps on to 13.5cm
reflector. A gel holder,
diffuser and protective
cap all in one.
ELRQCAP 10.95
Grid reflector 18cm

Larger reflector which
will accept push-in 18cm
honeycombs.
ELRQG18 23.00
Head Cables
ELRQC15 Ranger Head Cable 1.5m. 57.00
Extension cables also available
Batteries
ELRQBL
ELRQBG
ELRQGC
Lithium battery . . . . . . . 214.50

Gel battery . . . . . . . . . . 105.40
Multivoltage Charger . . . 74.00
85
Bowens
Gemini 400Rx
Bowens entry-level flash head features

the same metal casings and solid and
dependable build quality of the other
Gemini units. Its straightforward controls
and ample power are all you need for most
studio and location work, and it can also
be powered from the optional Travelpak
battery as well as mains.
Built-in Pulsar radio receiver
5 stop power control via side-mounted
rotary dial
Proportional modelling light
5v sync voltage wont damage camera
Gemini Rx Flash Heads
Include modelling lamp and mains leads.
Do not include reflector
BS3970 200Rx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289.00
BS3980 400Rx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319.00
Gemini 500R
Accessories
Pulsar radio
triggering
included
Use as a spill
kill, or with
umbrellas.
Gives a wide,
even coverage. 15cm
diameter.
BS1885
41.00
Barndoors
Gemini 400Rx 2-Head Softbox Kit

65 Maxilite Reflector
2 x Gemini 400Rx heads with modelling

lamps, sync lead, mains cables
2 x Lumiair 60x80cm softboxes
2 x lighting stands
1 x sync lead
1 x rolling kit case
BS4770SB 639.00
Flash energy
GN/ISO100
Flash duration t0.5
Flash adjustment
Recycling time
Modelling lamp
Fan cooling
Dimensions
Weight
General-purpose
reflector giving
a high and
smooth light
output. 20cm
diameter.
BS1887
48.00
400Rx
500R
400w/secs
76
1/1000th sec
5 stops
1.2 secs (full)
205w E27
No
32Lx15D cm
2.7kg
500w/secs
85
1/900th sec
5 stops (1/10ths)
1.3 secs (full)
205w E27
No
36.5Lx17Wx13H cm
3.4kg
Gemini R Flash Heads

Include modelling lamp and mains leads.
Do not include reflector
BS3900 250R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349.00
BS3910 500R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399.00
86
Clip on to any of the direct reflectors to

control the spread of light.
BS1869 62.00
15 Snoot
Typically used to create
a splash of light on
hair without
spilling on to the
face or background.
BS1888
67.50
BS1862
Offers
digital 1/10th
stop power
control, but uses
speedy and precise
rotary control dials rather
than up and down push
buttons for input.
Pulsar triggering compatible (kit
includes transmitter and receiver)
Auto power dumping
Voltage stabilised
Switchable beep and ready light
Travelpak compatible
Illuminated test button
Buying studio flash
120 Wide-Angle Reflector
1/4 Snoot Honeycomb . 47.00
Compact Stand
(left) As supplied with
Gemini R kits. 4 sections.
Height 305cm max, 83cm
min. Closed length 86cm. Weight 1.7kg.
BS6610 37.00
Air Cushioned Heavy Duty

Stand
Made from larger section tubing, with
greater load capacity, for daily studio use.
Height 395cm, 112cm min. Closed length
115cm. Weight 2.5kg. BS6618 85.00
Gemini 500R
Pulsar Tx 2-Head Kit
2 x Gemini 500R heads with
modelling lamps, sync lead,
mains cables
Pulsar Tx transmitter and
receiver card
1 x Lumiair 60x80cm
softbox
1 x 90cm white/silver
umbrella
wide-angle reflector
2 x lighting stands
1 x rolling kit bag
BS4805TX 949.00
Backlight Stand
4 sections. Height 85cm max,
7cm min. Closed length 45cm.
Weight 1.3kg. BS6600 31.00
21 Beauty Dish
Provides a really soft and diffused directional light. Includes a fabric diffuser cap
to transform it into a softbox.
BS1900 White Beauty Dish. . . . . 115.00
BS1901 Silver Beauty Dish . . . . . 135.00
BS1905 Beauty Dish Grid . . . . . . 149.00
Light control
Umbrella
Excellence in photography is as much

about light control, as about composition,
subject matter and so forth, and many
photographers will invest in a studio flash
system when they wish to achieve this
degree of control for portraiture, still life
and many other purposes. Developing your
skill by using studio lighting equipment
will not only give great satisfaction but
enhance the ability to control light when
photographing out of doors.
Silver umbrellas give a harder light with

more sparkle. Great for groups, products
and sometimes portraits, but for most
subjects a white brolly gives a softer light
which causes less skin shine and is more
flattering. A translucent white umbrella can
be used close to the subject with the flash
shooting through, with an even softer
effect.
Selecting a flash head
For many photographers taking portraits, a

softbox is an essential tool. Like any light
modifier, the larger it is, the more the light
is diffused. More expensive softboxes will
have internal diffusion systems as well.The
size you choose may also be determined by
the sort of picture planned. Full-length
portraits will need a larger box quite
often a large striplight to one side of the
subject. A classic portrait look is a single
softbox positioned fairly high above the
camera position in front of the subject, and
supplemented by (our next essential accessory) a reflector positioned on the lap of
the sitter, sending light back up to remove
shadows under the chin and nose.
As with most things, the more you spend,

the more power, flexibility, sophistication,
and better build quality you will get.
Flash heads aimed at the amateur will
typically have a power output of 125300
joules, and will have a switchable or variable power output, and sometimes variable
modelling light output.These will be fine
for small studio use, and will give required
working apertures of f8/f11 at typical
distances. One of the things which differentiates a well made flash head is the accuracy of repeat flashes in other words, if
you have set 3/4 power and taken a
reading, a second burst after the flash has
recharged will deliver the same power.
Accurately controlled auto power dumping
helps when reducing power as well.
Moving up the scale will either get
greater output, with adjustable power
output over a 5 or even 6 stop range, or
precise digital power control, remote
control options, more powerful modelling
lamps, and typically the power (600
w/secs and above) to light groups of
people at 45m distances at small apertures even when bounced from an
umbrella.
One important thing for the aspiring
or semi-professional to consider is cooling.
Studio flash heads generate a large amount
of heat, especially when used at or near full
power, and fan cooling, plus high quality
components operating well below their
design limits are generally prerequisites of
reliable professional operation.You will
notice as a result, quite a gulf in price
between flash heads with very similar specifications.This is one reason.
However, for the typical amateur, or
for light professional use, bomb-proof
construction, whilst desirable, may be
beyond the budget. So far as can be
Softbox
predicted with any electrical appliance, all

the flash heads in this catalogue can be
recommended for good performance and
reliability.
Joules, w/sec, GN
A joule is an expression of electrical
power, and is also described as one wattsecond (w/sec). Guide numbers with
studio flash are a less reliable guide to
power, unlike on-camera flashguns, as the
choice of reflector will change the figure.
Manufacturers, of course, will tend to
choose the reflector which gives the
highest figure, so accurate comparison
between makes is not always possible.
Choosing accessories
The most popular way of starting with
studio flash is to buy a kit, including
popular accessories like umbrellas,
sofboxes, and of course, stands.The kits we
show on these pages all include several
light modifiers which will enable sophisticated lighting effects to be achieved
straight out of the box. Heres what some
of these accessories do.
Reflector (1)
Sometimes known as a spill kill A metal
dish which concentrates the light of the
flash, and prevents light spill. Gets
maximum efficiency of light output, but
the quality of light is rather harsh for
portraiture. Some manufacturers offer
reflectors designed to direct light efficiently into an umbrella.
Reflector (2)
A large square or disc of reflective material. Can be as simple as a painted sheet of
hardboard, but more convenient is one of
the collapsible types made by Lastolite, in
several different sizes. A white finish is
most suitable for portraits.
Sunlight/sunfire helps warm up complexions; gold reflectors should be used with
care, as results can appear unnatural.The
Lastolite Triflector is a popular accessory
for softbox portraits in the style described
above.
Snoot
Concentrates the light output to a narrow
area.Typical use is as a hair catchlight.
Honeycomb
Also called a grid. Allows parallel light rays
only to pass through, so generates a softedged pool of light, the size of which is
determined by the size of the grid. Ideal
for creating a splash of light on a background.
87
Continuous lighting
Paterson
Fluorescent lamps offer the benefits of daylight balanced 5400K light, virtually no heat
output, and long lamp life.They are ideal for use where heat might be a problem, like food
photography, or extended portraiture sessions. A 100w fluorescent lamp produces around
the same light output as a 500w tungsten.
High power fluorescent heads
Made in England at Patersons own West

Midlands factory, these aluminium body
heads are designed for years of troublefree use and abuse, which makes them
ideal for schools and colleges, and they
are guaranteed for 2 years. They feature
strong tilting mounts, and use the popular
S type bayonet mount which takes a wide
range of light-shaping accessories.
Fluorescent
FL500 2 Head Softbox Kit
2 x heads with leads and 60x80cm softboxes
2 x 4-section air-cushioned stands
1 x Carry bag
2 x 135w lamps
PTL111 325.00
FL500 Head
Supplied with UK mains cable and is available with a choice of reflector or softbox.
Takes lamps from 30135w.
Lamp not included
PTL109 with 30cm Reflector . . . . 89.00
PTL110 with 60x80 Softbox. . . . . 93.00
FL500 2 Head Reflector Kit
FL1400 Head with Softbox
FL2000 Head with Softbox
Uses four individually switchable 70w

lamps which give a maximum light output
equivalent to 1400w tungsten.
Includes 60x80cm softbox and mains
cable
4 x 70w lamps
PTL200 199.00
Uses three individually switchable 135w

lamps which give a maximum light output
equivalent to 2025w tungsten.
Includes 60x80cm softbox and mains
cable
3 x 135w lamps
PTL201 229.00
2 x heads with leads and 30cm reflectors

1 x Carry bag
2 x 70w lamps
PTL112 265.00
PTL310
PTL311
PTL313
Softbox
PTL319
Super Cool-Lite 5 Head

Complete with reflector and
softbox, 5 lamps and mains lead.
INH116 155.00
Super Cool-Lite 655 Head

Complete with reflector and softbox, 5
lamps and mains lead. INH218 255.00
Monstar 3 1 Head Kit
Carrying cases
INBAG437 For Cool-Lite 5 Kit . . . . . . 69.95
INBAG487 For Cool-Lite 655 Kit . . . . 89.95
Replacement lamps
INML034
INML042
INML041
INML040
36 translucent. . . . . . . . 17.50
36 white reflective. . . . . 19.50
36 silver/black . . . . . . . 19.50
28w fluorescent . . . . . . . 12.95

32w fluorescent . . . . . . . 13.95
55w fluorescent . . . . . . . 22.95
150w fluorescent . . . . . . 34.95
Built-in li-ion battery has 1 hour run

time and recharges in under 2.5 hours.
Can also run on DC/AC in puts
1/4 sockets at either end
allow stand mounting
Supplied with carrying case with
shoulder and belt straps, 100-240v
charger and adaptors, and two clips to
allow a gel to be attached to modify
the light colour temperature if required
WTIL 349.00
2-head Umbrella Kit

PTL101 225.00
2-Head Softbox/Umbrella Kit
PTL102 255.00
2-Head Twin Softbox Kit
PTL103 299.00
for 30cm Reflector . . . . . . 4.20
Light stand
PTL299
19cm size to throw

a small concentrated beam of
light. PTL306 18.50
60x90 heat resistant. . . . 42.90
Shower Cap Diffuser

PTL323
88
A popular kit with 5 x 28w 5200K lamps,

equivalent to 600w tungsten light, but
emitting far less heat and using around
1/4 of the energy. Each lamp can be individually switched. Choice of reflectors to
give a harder light, or softboxes for
portraiture.
Kit includes:
2 x Cool-Lite 5 heads with lamps
2 x 40cm reflectors
2 x 60cm softboxes
2 x Air-cushioned stands
2 x Mains leads
INK117 289.00
Narrow Beam
Reflector
Uses a 500 watt P2/1ES photoflood.

Reflector can be interchanged with a
heat resistant softbox to give a soft
diffused lighting.
Optional barn doors available. Tungsten
head including reflector, lamp and
mains cable.
PTL100 75.00
All include
2 x heads with leads and reflectors
2 x 500w lamps
1 x Carry bag
A six lamp head using high

power 55w daylight-balanced
fluorescent lamps, each head
giving the equivalent of
1320w of tungsten lighting.
Each lamp is switchable to
offer maximum flexibility.
Supplied with a choice of
reflectors or large octagonalboxes, which
produce attractive catchlights in the eyes
of a subject.
2 x Cool-Lite 655 heads with
lamps
2 x 40cm reflectors
2 x 80cm
octoboxes
2 x Air-cushioned
stands
2 x Mains leads
INK219 529.00
Super Cool-Lite 5 2 Head Kit
Umbrellas
Most digital cameras have a standard white

balance option which is designed for 3200K
tungsten lamps, thus enabling them to
produce perfectly colour balanced pictures.
Tungsten 2 Head Kits
Super Cool-Lite 655

2 Head Kit
A very high power fluorescent head using

3 x 150w tubes, giving the equivalent of a
massive 1800w of tungsten lighting. Ideal
for illuminating large sets or groups.
Lamps are individually switchable. Kit
includes:
1 x Head with lamps and mains cable
110cm Octobox
Air-cushioned stand
Carrying case
INK482 349.00
Accessories
Tungsten
Interfit
4-section air-cushioned . 33.90
2/3 Head Carring Bag

Holds up to 3 Paterson heads, plus stands
and accessories. PTL320 42.90
Replacement lamps, fuses

LMP2/1ES 500 watt photoflood . . . . . 8.95
PTL008 30w fluorescent lamp . . . 12.00
PTL007 70w fluorescent lamp . . . 22.00
PTL005 105w fluorescent lamp . . 45.00
PLT006 135w fluorescent lamp . . 40.00
PRL010 Pack of 6 3.15 amp fuses. . 3.00
PRL011 Pack of 6 6.3 amp fuses. . . 3.00
Westcott IceLight
Designed by photographer Jerry Ghionis,
the Icelight is a hand-held LED light source
which can be used in a variety of ways.
The LED array combined with the
diffused front face offers an extremely soft
and even wrap-around light source. This
eliminates the need for additional light

modifying tools. Lamps are true daylight
colour (nominal 5500K) with 1160 lumen
maximum output (dimmable, and equivalent to 150w halogen) and rated for over
50,000 hours of use.
IceLight
Barn Doors
Snaps into place to control spread of
light. All-metal. WTILBD 49.00
Other IceLight accessories

WTILB
Power Pack Battery . . . . 149.00
WTILCON 2-way Connector . . . . . . . 19.95
WTILCC Car Charger . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95
WTILTG Tungsten Gel . . . . . . . . . . 31.50
WTILAP Accessory Kit. . . . . . . . . 249.00
89
Product photography
Lastolite ePhotomaker Kit
Getting really good photos for publication
on the Internet, or for cataloguing
purposes, can be tricky, even with the
simplicity of todays point-and-shoot
digital cameras.
The ePhotomaker is designed to
ensure that product photographs are well
lit and professional looking, eliminating
the need for time consuming retouching.
It takes seconds to set up, and will soften
the light of an ordinary anglepoise-type
lamp set to one side. A built-in reflector
fills the light from the other side, and an
infinity curve provides a natural and
consistent background.
There are two sizes of kit (Small
35Dx60Wx45H cm and Large 60Dx80Wx
65H cm), and each is completed by a grey
card which has marks to lock the camera
AF, and a density which ensures a slight
increase in exposure to ensure a perfectly
white background and a small tripod.
LAEPKS Small Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56.95
LAEPKSB Small Kit, black bground 69.95
LAEPKL ePhotomaker Kit Large . . 89.95
Lastolite Cubelite
Provides shadowless, soft lighting for any item, and isolates
reflective objects from their
surroundings. The cube can be lit
from any side, and collapses into
a fraction of its full size, so is
equally at home in the studio or
on location. Inside there is a pair
of crocodile clips to support a
sheet of paper to make a gradient
curve background if required.
LACB1
Cubelite 45cm (1.5) . . . . 61.95
LACB2
Cubelite 58cm (2) . . . . . 86.95
LACB3
Cubelite 90cm (3) . . . . 114.95
LACB4
Cubelite 120cm (4) . . . 129.95
LA6687 Studio Cubelite (6). . . . 419.00
Interfit Portable LED Studio Table

A neat and compact solution for small
product photography, using a mains
powered 200 LED cool-running daylight
balanced light - ideal for eBay shots.
Enables you to create diffuse flat lighting on items with minimal shadows
Flexible arm allows side positioning as
well as overhead
Dimensions: 40W x 34D x 24H cm
INT399 129.95
Kaiser Dome Studio

Ideal for small product and eBay photography, the Dome Studios umbrella
construction makes it quick and easy to
erect. The white translucent material
provides soft and even illumination. It
comes complete with a reversible
blue/grey textile background, and a
carrying case.
Small Base size: 62x62cm. Height: 51cm.
KA5891 32.95
Large Base size: 75x75cm. Height:
64.5cm. KA5892 38.50
Large
Designed to offer an
easily portable solution
for small product
photography, the
robust and flexible
background is selfsupporting the
supporting plastic
chains quickly
detach to allow the
background to be stored
flat. There are two sizes,
each available in either
opaque or translucent
versions, with a table
support as an option.
Lastolite Posing Tubs
LACBSK100 100cm 665.00
The Kit allows anyone without special

photographic skills to create shots like
this quickly and without fuss.
Set of tub seats in four

sizes. They are nestable
Russian Doll style to
save space when
storing, have hard
wearing nylon covers,
and include a padded top
surface. LA8014 209.00
LA8015
LA8019
Washable white covers . . 66.50

Chromakey covers . . . . . . 89.95
Lastolite Baby Poser

The modular construction of this
support allows it to be positioned in a variety of ways to
safely anchor the child. An
interchangeable grey cover is
also supplied. LA8017 106.95
MagicStudio 50
Size 100 x 50cm, weight 600g. For objects
up to 40cm wide. An optional table is
available.
NVMS50 MagicStudio 50 opaque. . 55.00
NVMST50 MagicStudio 50 transl. . . 83.00
NVMSTB50MagicStudio table 50 . . . 89.00
MagicStudio 80
Size 120 x 80cm, weight 900g. For objects
up to 60cm wide. An optional table is
available.
NVMS80 MagicStudio 80 opaque . . . 79.00
NVMST80 MagicStudio 80 transl. . 105.00
NVMSTB80MagicStudio table 80 . . 105.00
For a more permanent location, but still

with the possibility of being readily
collapsible, this table is ideal. The translucent white board length is 130cm x
60cm wide, with the back height 60cm.
Comes complete with carry bag.
FEST0613 95.00
A large version which is 200 x 100cm is
available, also with carry bag.
FEST1020 329.00
If you have a suitable camera and tripod, the Cubelite kit contains
everything else required to get perfect product shots. Soft,
diffused lighting from two RayD8 500w tungsten heads sited above
and below allows you to quickly get either a totally white background, or one with an attractive subtle tonal graduation.
The kit contains:
Studio Cubelite in either 70cm square or 100cm square sizes
2 x 500w RayD8 tungsten heads and lamps
1 x Full height lighting stand
Softbox
1 x Backlight floor stand
2 x Reflectors
90
Studio accessories
Falcon Eyes
ST-0613T Mini Still Life Table
Lastolite Studio Cubelite Kit
LACBSK070 70cm 539.95
Cubelite backgrounds
Sheets of white vinyl .
LACBB2 To fit 2 Cubelite . . . . . . . 12.95
Novoflex MagicStudio
Manfrotto 027 Stand Holder
MagicStudio 80 Set
Includes opaque and translucent backgrounds, Table 80, 2 x MS-Lights.
NVMS80SET 599.00
Manfrotto 220
MagicStudio 50 Set
MagicStudio Light
A large free-standing high quality table,

utilising robust aluminium tubing as used
in the Manfrotto lighting range. It has a
200x125cm translucent perspex top, the
angle of which can be adjusted by sliding,
lockable support tubes, and two locking
rear castors enable the table to be easily
moved around a studio. Distance from the
floor to the flat surface is 83cm; height
with the back panel vertical, 193cm.
Usually same day despatch from
Manfrotto UK.
MA220 625.00
Includes opaque and translucent backgrounds to

allow objects
to be lit from
below, or as
the picture
shows, create
a light-softening tunnel to
give virtually shadowless lighting. The
Table 50 provides a convenient and secure
support, and the pair of MS-Lights are now
upgraded to the latest 18w flicker-free
version. NVMS50SET 549.00
Continuous
5400K 18w
daylight balanced
illumination using
a high-frequency
tube which is suitable for video.
This gives very
even illumination.
Includes a flexible
arm and 42mm
clamp.
NVMSL 209.00
Think Tank Red Whips
Keep stands out of way when not in use.

Holds 8 stands with standard 5/8 spigot
tops. 64mm distance between holes.
Width 115cm; depth 19cm. MA027 27.00
Elasticated loops with a sliding cinch to

adjust to different sizes of cables.
Pack of 10. TT965 6.50
Pony Clamps
Made in USA,
lightweight nickel-plated
heavy duty clamps with
poly-vinyl tips and
handles, for holding backgrounds and many other
uses in and out of the
studio.
PC1
PC2
Small 1 (25.4mm) jaw . . . 3.60

Medium 2 (51mm) jaw. . . 5.50
Bongo Ties
Ideal for keeping cables neatly coiled.
Strong, long-lasting rubber and wood
construction. Pack of 10. BT1 4.95
91
TriGrips
Lastolite
Reflectors
Lightweight, compact and convenient invaluable to lighten shadows, or to change the

quality of the light; for instance to warm up skin tones.
There are five types of surface available:
White 5600K. Soft clean light for general portrait use.
Silver 5600K. Crisp clear light for optimum clarity. Good for products.
Sunfire 4750K. Enhances flesh tones naturally.
Gold 3800K. Adds warmth and glow. Popular for portraits.
Diffuser Gives diffused illumination; used in front of a light source.
Most popular combinations and sizes stocked
To arrive at our code, add the letters and numbers shown under the reflector size to the
two numbers of the reflector surface; so a 50cm sunfire/silver would be LA2036
Sunfire/white (..06)
Sunfire/silver (..36)
Silver/white (..31)
Silver/gold (..34)
Gold/white (..41)
Translucent (..07)
30cm
(LA12)
11.95
11.95
11.95
11.95
11.95
Universal reflector
bracket 1100
Fits, 50,
76, 95
and
120cm
reflectors
to any
standard
lighting stand. Quick lock
swivel joint allows almost
any position. LA1100 49.00
50cm
(LA20)
22.95
22.95
22.95
22.95
22.95
22.95
76cm
(LA30)
36.50
36.50
36.50
36.50
36.50
36.50
95cm
(LA38)
57.50
57.50
57.50
57.50
57.50
57.50
120cm
(LA48)
69.95
69.95
69.95
1.8x1.2m
(LA72)
88.70
88.70
88.70
69.95
69.95
88.70
88.70
5 in 1 Bottletop
Several reflector surfaces in one
convenient package. The basis of the
package is a translucent diffuser
panel. Two reversible bottletops are
supplied, so you can get any combination of the surfaces.
Includes Diffuser Panel + Gold/White
and Sunfire/Silver covers
LABT220 2096 50cm (20). . . . . . . 32.95
LABT230 3096 75cm (30). . . . . . . 44.95
LABT238 3896 95cm (38). . . . . . . 66.50
LABT248 4896 120cm (48). . . . . . 79.95
92
Lastolite Ezybox II
The TriGrip allows a

solo photographer to
position a reflector in
comfort using just one
hand. The large
padded grip allows
accurate use without
the need for a stand or
assistant. Or, an assistant can hold two with
ease!
TriGrip
Large TriGrip
The original version, as shown in the

picture above is 75cm from handle to end,
and is ideal for most portraits and tabletop photography uses.
LA3631 Silver/White . . . . . . . . . . 59.95
LA3607 Translucent . . . . . . . . . . . 59.95
LA3641 Gold/White . . . . . . . . . . . 59.95
LA3636 Sunfire/Silver . . . . . . . . . 59.95
LA3651 Translucent 1 stop diff . . 59.95
LA3628 Sunlite/Soft silver. . . . . . 59.95
This 1.5m size version is suitable for full

body reflection and diffusion. Its still
light enough to be held in one hand, just
like the original version, and folds down
to a third of its full size.
LA3731 Silver/White . . . . . . . . . . 79.95
LA3736 Sunfire/Silver . . . . . . . . . 79.95
LA3741 Gold/White . . . . . . . . . . . 79.95
LA3751 1 Stop Diffuser . . . . . . . . 79.95
LA3707 2 Stop Diffuser . . . . . . . . 79.95
TriFlips 8:1 Kits

7 different surfaces in 2 reversible
sleeves black, gold, sunfire,
sunlite, silver, soft silver and white,
plus diffuser.
Triflips 8:1 Kit
includes a 75cm 2-stop 30 TriGrip
Diffuser complete with the Sleeves
Set.
LA3696 88.70
TriFlips Mini 8:1 Kit
includes a 45cm 2-stop
30 TriGrip Diffuser
complete with the
Sleeves Set.
LA3596 71.95
TriFlips 8:1 Deluxe Kit
75cm TriGrip 2-stop Diffuser complete with
TriFlip covers, air-cushioned light stand,
TriGrip Bracket and carry case.
LA3699 179.95
Triflector 2
Widely used in portrait and makeover
photography, the Triflector consists of
three reflective surfaces, two of which
can be angled. It wraps light around the
subject, reduces under chin and nose
shadows, and gives distinctive and
attractive catchlights in the eyes and
attaches to a standard lighting stand
spigot. The lightweight panels
(sunfire/silver reversible panels) fold like
Lastolite reflectors to fit into a compact
carrying bag. Complete with stand
LA2933SP 134.95
Lastolite umbrellas
TriGrip Bracket
Ideal for the photographer who
works alone, the bracket enables a
TriGrip to be attached to a stand or
tripod to allow hands-free working.
The ball joint connector allows very
flexible positioning. The extra arm
enables a flash to
be attached and light bounced off a
reflective TriGrip, or shot through a
diffusing panel.
LA2430 69.95
8 in 1 Umbrella
Essentials range
Good quality brollies with 8mm diameter
shafts, fitting the majority of flash heads
on the market (not Elinchrom).
LA3203 80cm silver . . . . . . . . . . . 26.60
LA4503 100cm silver . . . . . . . . . . 39.90
LA3207 80cm white translucent . 19.95
LA4507 100cm white translucent 23.40
LA3212 80cm white black backed 20.40
LA4512 100cm white black back . 31.80
Super versatile, this gives you 8 different

surface or softbox options.
White bounce
Silver bounce
Shoot through
Shoot through with square mask
Shoot through box
Shoot through box with square mask
Umbrella box (bounce); silver interior
Umbrella box (bounce); white interior
LA4538 88.95
The quick-folding Ezybox has been

completely redesigned, with a simpler
construction using tensioning wands as
well as spring frames. Best of all, it is now
adaptable to speedlights and Elinchrom
Ranger Quadra, as well as studio flash
heads. So you can invest in these softboxes knowing that they can be used with
most other types of flash you might
acquire (Lastolite will produce adaptors
for new types of head which may come on
the market).
Each softbox comes with the adaptor
frame you just need to select the adaptor
you will need to make it ready for use.
Square (pictured above)

LAEB2S45 45x45cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82.00
LAEB2S60 60x60cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88.00
LAEB2S90 90x90cm . . . . . . . . . . . . 120.00
Octa
Adaptor rings
Speedring to fit
studio flash heads.
36.00
LAEB2RB Bowens
LAEB2RE
Elinchrom
All in One Umbrella

75cm 8:1
Deluxe Kit
Removeable covers give translucent

bounce or shoot-through, white bounce
backed by silver, or silver. 8mm shaft
LA3237 80cm (30) . . . . . . . . . . . 31.00
LA4537 100cm (40) . . . . . . . . . . 48.80
Kits with stands available: see page 74
Westcott Collapsible
Umbrella Box
An umbrella which is also a softbox. The
front diffuser has a 3-way zip closure to fit
all sizes of flash head. The white inner
surface and diffuser panel provide a soft
even light. 100cm dia. 39.95
LA3226 8mm shaft size
LA3227 7mm shaft size
Just like the handy rain-protecting type, this is a

43/109cm umbrella with folding struts and telescoping
shaft so that it folds neatly into a 14.5/37cm long roll.
WTUC11 White Satin/black backed 25.00
LAEB3OM Medium 80cm . . . . . . . . 130.00

LAEB2OL Large 102cm . . . . . . . . . 150.00
Speedlight
Bracket
Attaches to
softbox frame to
mount 1 or 2
cobrahead flashguns. Also has a
mount for a
trigger as shown.
LA2701 34.95
Elinchrom
Quadra Spigot
Use in conjunction with the
Speedlight
Bracket.
LA2705 17.00
Switch
Unique design which allows the shape to
be quickly unzipped to change from a
square to a strip rectangle.
LAEB2SWL Large 89x89cm . . . . . 150.00
LAEB2SWXL Extra Large 117x90cm 165.00
93
Lighting stands
Lastolite
420B Combi
1159 Standard
4-section with metal collars. Max height
298cm, min 99cm. Closed length 84cm.
Footprint 120cm. Weight 1.33kg. Max load
5kg. LA1159 35.00
Manfrotto
1160 Heavy Duty

4-section with metal collars. Max height
6.5kg. LA1160 45.00
Manfrotto Light Stand Bags

1153 Backlight
Deisgned to take up to 3 Manfrotto Adapto

series flat pack stands clipped together,
but may suit other stands. Internal dimensions 16Wx11H cm. Two lengths:
MALBAG090 90cm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.00
MALBAG110 110cm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.50
4-section centre pole

gives 56145cm height
range. Detaches from
the base and has 5/8"
spigot at
either end
with 3/8" and 1/4"
screw ends. Footprint
50cm. Weight 1.82kg.
LA1153 37.00
Cable clips
1051BAC
1004BAC
Manfrottos latest stands use Adapto

technical polymer for collars and locks.
This is as strong as aluminium, and 50%
lighter, and does not corrode. The clever
staggered hinge design allows the legs to
fold flatter, and the stands lock together
for convenient storage.
1052BAC Compact
1051BAC Mini Compact
1004BAC Master
4 sections (25, 22, 19 and 16mm). Height

211cm max, 75cm min. Closed length
67cm. Footprint 70cm. Weight 1kg. Max
load 4kg.
MA1051BAC 61.95
MA1051BAC3 Pack of 3 176.00
4 sections (35, 30, 25 and 20mm). Height

366cm max, 124cm min. Closed 107cm.
9kg.
MA1004BAC 91.00
5001 Nano
Stand
MS049A Nanopole Stand
5-section
stand which folds to
a very compact length.
Height 190cm max,
49cm min. Closed
48cm. Footprint
100cm. Weight
0.93kg. Max load
1.5kg. Black.
MA5001B
43.95
MS049A
Nanopole Stand
version has
adjustable
levelling foot
94
1052BAC
3 sections (25, 22 and 19mm). Height

237cm max, 101cm min. Closed 86cm.
5kg.
MA1052BAC 66.30
Developed from the 5001 design, this has

a removeable column and levelling foot.
MAMS049A 57.95
Also available as the Nanopole Kit with
the Snap Tilthead for flash and carrying
bag to take all 3 items. MASTRO1 82.95
Nanopole Kit
Heavy duty 4-section lighting stand with a pivoting

collar which allows the top
two sections to be used either upright, or
as a telescopic boom arm. Supplied with a
sandbag (empty) to enable smooth counterbalanced operation when the head is
attached. Supports 9kg vertically; 2kg on
boom at maximum extension. Max height
vertical 3.92m; closes to 113cm. Max
boom extension 1.91m. Weight 2.7kg.
Black finish. MA420B 145.00
Sets of 4. Tube diameters

2528mm.
MA206 2.95
Tube diameters 1826mm.
MA064 2.95
Sand Bag
Strong canvas bag
(requires filling) to
stabilise
stands.
LA1592
11.50
Castor wheel sets

Sets of 3
017 for stands with leg
dia 19mm. MA017 31.90
018 for stands with leg
dia 22mm. MA018 35.00
012B Backlight Stand

Black steel base with
detachable 2section aluminium
centre column.
Height 85cm max,
9cm min. Closed
48cm. Footprint
60cm. Weight
1.32kg.
Max load
3kg, or 10kg without
column. Legs can be
nailed to floor or
hung on a wall.
MA012B 39.95
Bowens and Elinchrom stands are on pages 82 and 87
Interfit
Compact
024B Light Boom
Air-cushioned with 4 sections. Max height

Footprint 71cm. Weight 1.6kg. INST750
39.00
(left) Attaches to shaft of most

stands with diameters of 19,
20, 25 and 28mm. 3 sections:
max length 200cm. Closed
length 71cm. Weight 1.4kg.
Load 3kg at 170cm with counterweight attached.
MA024B 109.95
Standard
Taller version of same design. Max height
Footprint 80cm. Weight 1.65kg.
INST751 41.90
Heavy Duty
098B Wall Boom
(below) A 2-section arm which
fixes to a wall. The pivot point
allows 160 vertical and 180
horizontal movement. Max
extension 210cm; minimum
120cm. Max load at full extension 4.5kg. Weight 2.3kg.
Supplied with 013 spigot.
MA098B 114.50
Standard
Compact
(right) Max height 394cm, min

128cm. Closed length 113cm.
Footprint 130cm. Weight 2.3kg.
INST753 59.50
Boom Arm
2-section arm fits Standard
and Heavy Duty stands.
Counterbalance is
adjustable, and the head
mounting spigot is
reversible with 1/4" and
3/8" screws. Closed length
113cm: extends to 204cm.
INST757 40.50
Manfrotto lighting accessories

Lighting adaptors
Super Clamp inserts
013
036-14
Double 5/8 spigot connects

two 5/8 socket items
together. MA013 8.95
Super Clamp adaptor to create

5/8 stud with 1/4 screw.
MA036-14 5.50
036-38 is the same but with
3/8 thread. MA036-38 5.50
014-14
Creates a lockable
1/4 male thread
from 5/8 spigot.
MA01414 9.95
014-38 is the same
but with 3/8
thread. MA01438 9.95
015/088
015 converts a 3/8 lighting
stand spigot screw to 1/4.
MA015 4.95
088 is the reverse 1/4 to 3/8
MA088 4.95
118
Short spigot creates a 1/4 or
3/8 fixing from a 5/8 socket.
MA118 4.95
037
Super Clamp stud which creates
a flush 1/4 or 3/8 screw.
MA037 5.50
061
Joining stud for 2 Super Clamps.
MA061 4.95
066
Double female adpator for
Super Clamp providing 3/8 or
1/4 socket. MA066 3.95
264
119
Plugs into 035 Super Clamp to

provide a 10mm thread,
includes wing nut. MA264 9.95
Converts a 5/8 spigot socket to

either a 1/4 or 3/8 screw type.
MA119 4.95
175 Clamp
125/147
Join 2 items, or convert a
female socket to a male screw.
MA125 3/83/8 3.95
MA147 3/81/4 3.95
Strong spring clamps with 5/8 spigot

attachment for a wide range of studio
accessories. Handy for
lightweight items in difficult places. Jaw opening is
40mm. MA175 15.00
143S adaptor
Cold accessory shoe with a
male base screw to allow it
to be attached to a 1/4
socket. MA143S 11.50
151
275 Clamp
Converts a tripod with 3/8

screw to a 5/8 spigot to make a
lighting support. MA151 5.95
A smaller version of the above with jaw

opening of 35mm. MA275 14.20
158
Double socket connects
two 5/8 male spigot
items together, or creates
female socket from male.
MA158 12.95
More flash shoes are on page 76
375 Multiclip
Double clip, ideal for
holding gels or small
reflecting panels in
front of a light.
MA375 8.95
95
Manfrotto clamps, arms and hooks

035 Super Clamp
042 Extension Arm

A 19.5cm long arm which plugs
into the Super Clamp. Load
8kg. MA042 18.00
The studio standard. Beware cheap knockoffs; the real thing holds 15kg. Contains a
5/8 hex socket to plug in hooks and any
other item using this connection.
Standard version. MA035 19.95
035C is the same, but with a ratchet
handle to allow repositioning.
MA035C 24.95
B/P Triple Hooks

Set of two background paper holders for
three Expan 046. Can be fixed to a wall
with the supplied
studs and
screws, or
screwed to an
035 Super Clamp
for pole
mounting.
MA045
32.50
B/P Single Hooks

035WDG Wedges
Set of 4 shaped wedges to improve the
grip of an 035 on flat or irregular shaped
objects. MA035WDG 6.50
244N Variable
Friction Arm
Set of two background

paper hooks which fit
into the 035 Super
Clamp socket, taking the
046 Expan.
MA059 17.95
059WM Single Hooks
As above, but with bracket
for mounting direct to a wall. Complete
with screws. MA059WM 17.95
U Hooks
038 Double
Super Clamp
Two 035 Clamps set at right angles to each
other to enable a cross pole to be
attached to two Autopoles. MA038 43.00
Super Clamp connectors on page 95
Manfrotto DADO Rod Support System and
other Super Clamp camera accessories
are on page 20
A 53cm heavy-duty
articulated arm, with a
centre knob to lock all 3
movements. 5/8 spigot
at each end. Max load
3kg. MA244N 85.50
A pair of hooks with a

40mm wide channel
which attach to the
Super Clamp.
MA039 8.95
Interfit
Telescopic stands and cross pole pack
down into a compact carry bag, and have a
maximum size of 2.4m high x 2.5m wide.
Small size INBGS 79.95
Also available in a heavier duty form to
support a full width background cloth, or
half roll paper backgrounds.
2.6m high x 3.15m wide.
Large size INBGL 112.50
Lastolite 1108
Suitable for cloth curtain backgrounds, or half roll paper backgrounds. Consists of two
1159 stands (which can be used for lights on their own), with a maximum height of 3.12m
and a telescopic cross bar with a maximum extension of 2.96m. Supplied with a waterproof
case. Background cloth shown not included.
LA1108 129.95
Lastolite 1128 Heavy Duty

The same cross bar but with larger section 1160 stands instead. This is a better choice if
you are planning to use full width paper or vinyl rolls. LA1128 169.95
046MC Expan
143N
12mm diameter, 55cm long with 3/8

female thread and stud to fit Super Clamp
at one end, and 5/8 spigot and 1/4 male
thread at the other. Load 0.3kg.
MA237 18.00
237HD heavy-duty version has
18mm dia and load of 0.5kg.
MA237HD
25.00
043 Sky Hook

Gaffer grip for poles from 2565mm with
attachment points for 16mm accessories,
one with 013 double ended adaptor.
MA043 33.00
Manfrotto 1314B
A heavy-duty set comprising 272 cross pole, 2 x 1052BAC stands and 2 x 275 Mini Spring
clips and kit bag. Will cope with full width cloth or 11m length full roll paper. Black finish.
MA1314B 196.00
Manfrotto 272 cross pole

If you already have 2 suitable lighting stands with standard 5/8 spigot fitting, this telescopic pole will convert them into a background support. Minimum extension 1.1m;
maximum extension 2.98m. Weight 250g. MA272 49.95
Lastolite Solo
is the same but

with a lever
rather than
knob locking
action.
MA143N
73.60
237 Flex Arm
96
Background
supports
Used in conjunction with the B/P Hooks

shown above, the Expan inserts into the
ends of a paper roll, adjusting to core
diameters on 4676mm. A counterweighted metal chain allows a paper roll
to be conveniently raised or lowered.
MA046MC 77.50
Other background support accessories
MA047-2 Alu-Core for uncored paper.
Length 275cm; 50mm dia . . . . . . . . 41.95
MA062-2 B/P Counterweight . . . . . 26.00
MA081
Expan Baby Hooks. . . . . . 36.00
MA091MC Expan Chain 1m metal. . . 29.40
MA094
Expan chain weight. . . . . . 7.95
Background not
included
Lastolite Magnetic Background Support

Lastolite 1116
A robust stand which consists of 5
aluminium sections 4 tubes and a tripod
base. The tubes are screwed together, and
although this is slower to erect than the
1109 stand, it makes for a much stiffer
structure, and so we would recommend it
for use with 6x7 backgrounds with train.
LA1116 53.50
An innovative way of attaching a steel-banded collapsible background quickly to a stand

The two strong magnets in the Support allow a Lastolite collapsible background to be
instantly attached or detached. No moving parts means that it's less likely to break over
time than a traditional clip support. Available by itself to adapt a stand you already have,
or in a kit with stand and carrying bag.
Magnetic Background Support Kit
Includes tripod stand and carrying bag.
Packed weight 1.95kg. Length 94cm.
LA1121 99.95
Magnetic Background Support

Adapts any suitable lighting stand with
5/8 spigot attachment.
LA1120 57.00
Raising a heavy background on your own

usually means making several small lifts
on either side to reach the desired height.
The pivoting ends of this support mean
that you can extend the side stands by
much greater increments without making
the whole structure unstable saving time
and increasing safety. An ideal solution
for heavy paper rolls. Supplied with carrying case.
LA1105 3m width. . . . . . . . . . . . 189.95
LA1142 4m width heaavy duty . . 264.95
Bracket has wire cage safety lock (n.b.

paper roll holder not included)
97
Lastolite backgrounds
Plain collapsible
Black & White
Reversible Collapsible
Urban
With train version (left) A 1.8 x

2.1m background including 1.5m
detachable black and white trains
made from a knitted, creaseresistant, washable material which
velcroes in place. Attach to wall
hook or support with a stand.
LA6701 194.50
Without train version
1.5x 1.8m, ideal for head and shoulders portraits.
LA5621 99.95
An exciting and innovative range which

enables you to create an outdoor look in the
studio or at home, and avoid the need to go
scouting for locations! The effect of each
background can be varied by changing the
distance of the subject to the background, or
by choice of aperture.
All types 142.95
LA5711
LA5712
LA5713
LA5714
LA5715
LA5717
LA5718
Paper rolls
(1) Red Brick/Grey Stone

(2) Corrugated/Metal
(3) Rusty Metal/Plaster Wall
(4) Distressed Paper/Graffiti
(5) Derelict Wall/Wooden Fence
(6) Shutter/Distressed Door
(7) Tarnished Metal/Container
Plain collapsible no train

Ideal for passport, ID and other uses.
1.5 x 1.8m (5 x 6)
LA5620 White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79.95
LA56GB Black/Mid Grey . . . . . . . . 94.90
LA56GW White/Mid Grey . . . . . . . . 94.90
1.8 x 2.1m (6 x 7)
LA5921 Black/White . . . . . . . . . 128.60
LA67GB Black/Mid Grey . . . . . . . 144.95
LA67GW White/Mid Grey . . . . . . . 144.95
LA6751 Blue/Pink . . . . . . . . . . . 144.95
LA6752 Red/Purple . . . . . . . . . . 144.95
LA6753 Yellow/Orange . . . . . . . 144.95
1.8 x 2.75m (6 x 9)
LA6921 Black/White . . . . . . . . . 189.95
Now available
in six vibrant
colour
combinations!
HiLite
Delivered direct to you from the Lastolite distributor
Full roll 2.72m wide x 11m long

Crease-free; available in 32 colours we
show the most popular here.
All types, except Chromakey, each 47.95
LA9001
Super White
LA9002
Heaven
LA9012
Arctic Grey
LA9020
Black
LA9024
Marigold
LA9025
Sandstone
LA9027
Shadow Grey
LA9029
Amethyst
LA9030
Ocean
LA9031
Kingfisher
LA9038
Primrose
LA9046
Leaf Green
LA9051
Ivory
LA9054
Graphite
LA9058
Royal
LA9073
Chromakey Green
Half roll 1.37m wide x 11m long

37.50
available in these three colours only
LA9101
Super White
LA9120
Black
LA9127
Shadow Grey
9001
9002
9012
9020
9012
9025
9027
9029
9030
9031
9038
9046
9051
9054
9058
9073
The HiLite allows perfect high key

portraits to be created in tight spaces.
Because its illuminated internally, the
subject can be positioned right in front of
it with no shadow occuring.
One light positioned to the side is
enough to create a full white effect, as
theres only 1/2 stop difference in the
illumination, but two lights can be used.
There are four sizes: the small one is
designed for head and shoulders portraits.
All are rectangular, can be positioned
either way up, and are freestanding. For
extra support, they attach to any suitable
background stand.
Because the HiLite acts as a large
softbox, it adds illumination around the
subject, so often only one light in front is
required for superb results.
Four tensioning arms create the
shape, and it packs down easily in standard Lastolite fashion into a carrying bag.
An optional wipe-clean vinyl train can
be fixed to the base for full length shots.
HiLites
LA8843 1.07x1.37m (3.5 x 4.5) 145.00
LA8857 1.5 x 2.15m (5 x 7) . . . 289.00
LA8867 1.8 x 2.15m (6 x 7) . . . 319.00
LA8878 2.15 x 2.44m (7 x 8) . . 499.00
Vinyl trains
LA8858 for 1.5 x 2.15m HiLite. . . 79.95
LA8868 for 1.8 x 2.15m HiLite. . . 88.70
LA8879 for 2.15 x 2.44m HiLite. 128.50
HiLite Bottletops
No need to change to another type of
background; just add a different coloured
cover and train to your HiLite.
For 5 x7 version
LA8B703 Super Black . . . . . . . . . . . 70.95
LA8B770 Grey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57.60
LA8B788 Blue Chromakey . . . . . . . 70.95
LA8B781 Green Chromakey . . . . . . 70.95
For 6 x 7 version
LA8B803 Super Black . . . . . . . . . . . 79.95
LA8B870 Grey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.50
LA8B888 Blue Chromakey . . . . . . . 79.95
LA8B881 Green Chromakey . . . . . . 79.95
HILITE TRAINS CARRIAGE TO EUROPE AND THE CHANNEL ISLANDS

Please request a quotation; there will be a surcharge on our normal carriage cost.
n.b. colour accuracy is limited by the
reproduction process
Black Velvet
Out of Focus
Ideal for low-key portraits, the
velvet absorbs light to give a deep
rich black background.
Lastolite spent many months
sourcing a material which resists
wrinkling when folded, and which
wont require any steaming before
use.
Size is the standard 1.5x1.8m,
fitted with a top loop and side ties
to allow attachment to a stand or
hook.
Folds up to 1/3 of full size,
and is supplied with a carry bag.
LA5602 99.95
Panoramic
A collapsible 3-panel aluminium
frame with an easy clip-on textile
background, ideal for location
shots of larger groups.
Crease-free material
Packs neatly into the supplied
carrying bag, which will fit in a
car boot or seat
Different coloured background
covers are available
Overall size: 2.3m high x 4m wide. Packed
size: 1.0 x 0.3 x 0.35m. Weight: 9kg.
399.95
98
LA7BPB
LA7BPG
LA7BPW
Black (7621)
Chromakey Green (7622)
White (7623)
Lastolites latest backgrounds

enable you to create an instant
outdoor look in any location. Get a
lovely diffused look to the background achieved regardless of the
lens and aperture settings.
Available in double-sided 1.2 x
1.5m collapsible styles, with a
different effect on each side. Each
version 118.95
LA5730 Summer Foliage/City Lights
LA5731 Autumn Foliage/Seascape
Lastolite Posing Tubs and other studio
props are on page 91
99
Enlarging
Processing
MOD54 5x4
Film Holder
Changing bags
A countdown timer with

zero alarm, and time
preset up to 99 mins
and 9 secs. Timing can
be interrupted, and
start time retrieved.
Magnet attachment on
back. KA4218 24.95
Paterson Film Processing Kit

Enlargers
We can supply models
from Paterson and Kaiser.
Ask us for a quote.
Paterson Focus
Finders
Micro Focus Finder
Makes finding exact
focusing easy by
magnifying the grain
of the enlargement.
PTFF 29.95
Major Focus Finder

Larger design makes
for easier working
with bigger enlargements saves
fumbling for the focus
control.
PTFFM 57.95
Paterson proof printers

35mm Proof Printer
For 8 x 10 paper. Takes six strips of six
35mm negatives. Ideal for keeping a file
copy of each film. PTPP35 54.95
6x6 Proof Printer
As above but taking four strips of 120 roll
film. PTPP66 54.95
Pro Proofer
10x12 size with a plain glass top. Will
take four 4 x 5 format negs, or 120 size.
Also useful for keeping prints flat for
copying. PTPRO 54.95
Contains everything needed (except

chemicals) to process 1 or 2 x 35mm films
or 1 x 120 film.
Universal Tank with 2 reels
2 x 600ml graduates
150ml graduate
Thermometer
Film Squeegee
Set of 2 Film Clips
Full instructions for use
PTDEV1 52.95
10% DISCOUNT ON ANY FILM AND
PAPER PURCHASED WITH THESE KITS
Paterson Film and Print

Processing Kit
Ilford Multigrade filters
ILFDK
3 filter drawer kit . . . . . 23.95
Paterson Safelight
A general purpose red/orange filter which
can be stood on the bench or hung on a
wall or ceiling. Includes 15w bulb and UK
3-pin plug. 12cm diameter; 11cm high.
PTSLA 29.95
PTSLDA Replacement A dome . . . 13.00
LM15WES 15w spare bulb . . . . . . . . . 1.95
Paterson 2000D timer

A simple digital enlarger timer which can
be set from 0.1-9.9 secs on 0.1 sec increments, or from 1099 secs in 1 sec increments. Display brightness can be
adjusted. PT2000D 84.95
LPL easels
available to order.
Prices from 69.95
Negative filing is on page 111
100
An easy to use, economical way to process

up to 6 sheets of 5x4 film. This UKdesigned product fits the Paterson MultiReel 3 tank, which requires only 900ml of
liquid. HRMOD54 44.50
MOD54 Holder complete with Paterson
Multi-Reel 3 Tank
HRMOD54K 65.00
Kaiser Safelight
9x12cm for graded and multigrade b/w
papers which can be wall or table
mounted. Tiltable housing with 15w lamp.
KA4018 39.95
Contains all the essential equipment for

processing both film and photographic
paper, so is the ideal one box addition to
an enlarger purchase. You just need to buy
film, paper and chemistry to get going
and create a darkroom to develop the
paper, of course! Contains:
Universal Dev Tank with 1 spiral
Set of three 8x10 trays
Paterson Safelight
Three measuring graduates
Chemical mixer
Thermometer
Print tongs
Pair of film clips
Film squeegee
PTDEV 96.50
Paterson tanks
As used in thousands of darkrooms worldwide durable and easy to use. 35mm
model takes 1 x 35mm film; Universal
model 2x 35mm or 1 x 120 film.
PTTK35 35mm tank c/w 1 reel . . . 22.95
PTTKU
Universal tank c/w 2 rls . 24.60
PTTKM3 Multi-Reel 3 tank . . . . . . 25.60
Multi-reel tanks include a core, but do not
include reels.
PTALR
Auto-load reel. . . . . . . . . 14.95
PTALR6 Auto-load reel pack of 6 . 63.95
DARKROOM
Kaiser 4218 Process Timer
27 x 29 size is roomy enough to fit a

camera and a typical developing tank.
Super large version suits 5x4 etc.
KDCBL
27 x 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.00
KDCBXL 36 x 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.00
Film clips
Paterson Film
Clip Set
Durable plastic,
one weighted.
One pair.
PTFCS 11.50
Kaiser stainless
steel clips
One clip
weighted,
one pair.
KA4120 6.95
Film squeegee
Paterson Soft rubber blades rapidly
remove
water
from
the film
surface to aid
mark-free drying. PTFS 13.80
Paterson Triple Timer

Can be used as a clock,
stop-watch, or three stage
timer. The three countdown stages can run
simultaneously, or as
separately switched
timers. PTTT 19.20
Paterson Graduates
Accurate and high quality measures for
chemical mixing, made from transparent
polystyrene, which is very resistant to
staining.
PTG0045 45ml graduate . . . . . . . . . 6.60
PTG0150 150ml graduate . . . . . . . . 6.60
PTG0300 300ml graduate . . . . . . . . 7.90
PTG0600 600ml graduate . . . . . . . . 9.95
PTG1200 1200ml graduate . . . . . . 11.40
Paterson mixing accessories
Paterson developing dishes

Sets of three, for print developer, stop
bath and fixer, each dish in a different red
light friendly colour .
PTDD08 8x10 (20x25cm) . . . . . . 14.95
PTDD10 10x12 (24x30cm) . . . . . 19.50
PTDD12 12x16 (30x40cm) . . . . . 28.95
PTDD16 16x20 (40x50cm) . . . . . 36.95
PTDD20 20x24 (50.8x60cm)*. . . 69.95
* all white dishes
Thermometers
Water Filter
Used in
conjunction
with the
Force Film
Washer to
prevent any
mains-borne contaminants entering the tank.
PTWF 18.60
Washes resin-coated papers in 24

minutes. Two sizes available:
PTHSW08 for 8x10 prints . . . . . . . 29.95
PTHSW12 for 12x16 prints . . . . . . 48.95
Kaiser 4048 Drying Rack

For airdrying
of RC
papers.
Takes up
to 5
12x16
or 10 x
8x10
prints,
or more
of a smaller size. KA4048 29.00
Jugs and funnel are made from tough

polypropylene.
Funnel
PTF
11cm/4.25 funnel . . . . . . 6.60
Mixing jugs
PTJUG1 1 litre mixing jug . . . . . . . 9.95
PTJUG2 2 litre mixing jug . . . . . . 14.95
Chemical mixer
PTCM
Chemical mixer . . . . . . . . . 6.50
Paterson tank accessories

Force Film Washer
A hose which fits the core of
the tank to provide rapid
washing of films.
PTFFW 13.80
Paterson High Speed Print

Washer
AP Storage Bottles
Kaiser wide range tray thermometer
Angled stem and hook, 050C. 85mm
long. KA4083 10.95
Paterson colour thermometer
Dual scales +/- 1.4C. 12 long.
PTCOL 15.00
Paterson certified thermometer
1330C +/- 0.3C. 9 long. PTCERT 15.00
Nova Pocket Digital Thermometer
Pen-sized, with a range of 50C+150C. Display in F or
C. Stainless steel
probe.
NADIGT 18.95
Opaque accordion bottles

prevent
oxidation of chemicals
by collapsing to expel
any air.
Print tongs
Neither plastic nor bamboo react with the
chemicals.
Paterson Set of 2 plastic (above)
PTTONG 9.00
Kood Set of 3 three bamboo (below)
KDBPT 6.25
APAB1
APAB2
Paterson Rapid
Print Drying Rack
Holds up to ten 8x10 prints, and allows
air to circulate to allow resin-coated
papers to dry quickly. PTRACK 37.30
1 litre size . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.95

2 litre size . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95
Cotton gloves
Keep fingerprints off
slides and negs. 100%
cotton. One size fits
all but the largest
hands. HA8469 3.95
Paterson RC print squeegee

Large soft rubber blades. For prints up to
16x20. PTPS 27.95
101
Monochrome darkroom materials
Fixers
Film developers
Ilford Rapid Fixer
Ilford Ilfotec DD-X
A non-hardening fixer
where the dilution (either
1+4 or 1+9) determines
fixing time. Can be used
in dish or machine applications between 1840C.
Fine grain: liquid

A fine grain one-shot liquid developer
producing easy to print negatives at full
film speed. Recommended for Delta films,
especially the 3200. 1 litre.
ILDDX 16.40
Ilford ID-11
Fine grain: powder
The standard developer, similar to Kodak
D76, giving fine-grain results with all
films including T-grain types, without loss
of film speed. Can also push-process HP5
to ISO1600.
ILID10
ID-11 powder 1l . . . . . . . . 4.99
ILID50
ID-11 powder 5l . . . . . . . . 9.95
Ilford Microphen
Speed increasing: powder
Powder developer to make 1 litre which
gives an extra 1/2 stop without compromising fine grain. Allows pushing of HP5
up to ISO3200. ILMIC 4.99
Ilford Perceptol
Extra -fine grain: powder
Powder developer which gives extra-fine
grain with Pan F and FP4. Tames excessive
contrast on HP5. Small loss of speed.
Makes 1 litre. ILPER 4.99
Ilford Ilfosol 3
Fine grain: liquid
Universal and economical liquid developer
for all, but especially slower, films at standard dilution of 1+9. At 1+14 has small
compensating effect on high contrast
subjects. 500ml. ILSOL3 7.75
102
Fotospeed FD-10
Fine grain: liquid
A one-shot fine grain
developer giving full
rated film speed and
high edge sharpness.
Can be diluted 1+9 or
1+14.
FSFD1002 FD-10 250ml . . . . . . . . . . . 4.50
FSFD1010 FD-10 1l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.50
FSFD1050 FD-10 5l . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.30
Wetting solution
Ilford Ilfotol
Add to final rinse for films
to reduce streaking and
other drying marks, and
to also lower the static
charge on the negative. A
capful is enough for 4
litres on water, so the 1
litre bottle will last you
quite a long time.
ILTOL 11.80
Ilford Ilfotec LC-29
Fotospeed RA50 Rinse Aid
Fine grain: liquid

A highly concentrated developer suitable
for all films, giving fine grain and good
sharpness. One-shot or reusable processing with dilutions up to 1+29 make it also
very economical, and it has a long shelflife so its ideal for occasional use. 500ml.
ILTEC 16.95
Dilutes 1+200; does the

same job as Ilfotol, but
the smaller pack size will
suit most people better.
500ml. FSRA50 4.70
Paper size conversion
Ilford paper
Unlike inkjet papers, which are all based

on the metric A series, photo paper sizes
are still usually referred to in inches (at
least in the UK), and many of them
relate back to the sizes of glass plates
used in the Victorian era. If you have a
yen for it, Ilford MG is available still (to
order) in 8.5 x 6.5whole plate size!
4 x 6
10 x 15cm
5 x 7
12.7 x 17.8cm
8 x 10
20.3 x 25.4cm
8.25 x 11.75 (A4) 21 x 29.7cm
9.5 x 12
24 x 30.5cm
11 x 14
27.9 x 35.6cm
12 x 16
30.5 x 40.6cm
16 x 20
40.6 x 50.8cm
20 x 24
50.8 x 61cm
Ilford Washaid
You dont need to use fixer (hypo) clearers
with RC papers, but they reduce washing
times with fibre-based papers, and also
films. Dilutes 1+4. 1 litre. ILW 8.95
Fotospeed WA50 Wash Aid

Takes residual hypo out of fibre-based
papers faster than normal washing. Saves
water and time. 1 litre concentrate which
dilutes 1+9. FSWA50 6.50
Rodinal RO9
Extra-fine grain: liquid
A classic one-shot long-life
developer, first produced by
Agfa in 1891 and now made
by a&o in Germany. Suitable
for all types of film, giving
maximum sharpness and film speed.
Acutance and contrast can be varied by
dilution, generally 1+25 or 1+50. 500ml.
AGR 17.95
Fixer clearing
Can be used with films and all papers
ILRF05
ILRF10
ILRF50
Print developers
Ilford Multigrade
Standard developer: VC papers
Fast-working liquid developer, designed
specially for Ilford MG and other variablecontrast papers. Dilution 1+9.
ILMGD10 Multigrade 1l . . . . . . . . . . 9.95
ILMGD50 Multigrade 5l . . . . . . . . . 21.50
Fotospeed PD5
Standard developer: all paper types
Economical and universal liquid print
developer for resin-coated or fibre-base
papers. Can also be used for processing
sheet film.
FSPD10 PD5 liquid 1l . . . . . . . . . . 8.20
FSPD50 PD5 liquid 5l . . . . . . . . . . 24.95
Fotospeed WT10
Warmtone developer: all paper types
The warmth of this developer is controlled
through dilution the more diluted the
warmer the tone, but without affecting
the contrast or vibrancy of the image.
1 litre. FSWT10 8.95
Ilford Harman Warmtone

Warmtone developer: all paper types
Gives a warm look
to resin-coated or
fibre-base papers.
Three dilution
strengths with the
option of one-shot
or re-use within the
same session.
1 litre.
ILHWTD 9.95
Rapid Fixer liquid 500ml . . 7.25

Rapid Fixer liquid 1l . . . . 10.40
Rapid Fixer liquid 5l . . . . 28.00
Fotospeed FX30 Odourless

Longer fixing times, but
the less aggresive citric
acid base makes for a
more pleasant darkroom
environment. Standard
dilution is 1+9. Use of a
stop bath is recommended to extend
working life.
FSFX3010 1 litre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95
FSFX3050 5 litres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.95
Fotospeed Liquid
Emulsion
Print on to virtually
anything! This is a grade
2.5 paper emulsion
which spreads easily
after gentle warming in a
water bath. Use standard
multigrade filters, or on
a colour head use
magenta to increase contrast and yellow
to reduce. 250ml size. FSLE30 42.95
Toners
Stop baths
Fotospeed
Can be used with films and all papers
150ml kits make 1.5l of working solution.
Ilfostop
ST20 Vario Odourless Sepia Toner

FSST201 150ml (1.5l) . . . . . . . . . . 11.75
FSST205 500ml (5l). . . . . . . . . . . . 21.50
SLT20 Selenium Toner
Can be diluted 1+4 or 1+29 for archiving.
FSSLT20101 litre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.50
BT20 Blue Toner
FSBT201 150ml (1.5l) . . . . . . . . . . 17.95
RT20 Copper/Red Toner
FSRT201 150ml (1.5l) . . . . . . . . . . 10.95
AU20 Gold Toner
FSAU20 1 litre working solution. . 61.00
A low odour citric acid stop bath without

an indicator dye which ceases development immediately and prolongs the life of
the fixer. Dilutes 1+19. 500ml.
ILSTOP 5.30
Fotospeed SB50 Odourless

Indicator Stop Bath
Dilutes 1+19, and
changes colour when
the pH becomes too
high for the bath to
work effectively. 1
litre. FSSB5010 8.95
Data and safety sheets for all chemicals
can be downloaded from the manufacturers websites. If you need further

information or help, please ask.
Ilford Selenium Toner

Converts the residual
silver in the print to a
more stable
compound, and gives
a warmer tone to the
print. For dish toning
of all paper types.
Dilutes 1+3. 1 litre.
ILHST 27.95
Resin-coated
For regular print-making resin-coated
paper is the choice.The coated paper base
is sandwiched between layers of a
polyethylene coating which makes it
impervious to liquids. As a result, the
processing time to dry is under 30mins,
as against over an hour for fibre-based.
Variable contrast papers offer the same
contrast range as traditional fixed grade
papers, from 0 (the softest) to 5 (hardest
contrast). Most correctly exposed and
developed negatives will print ideally on
grade 2 or 3. In general, a glossy surface
print will give a perceived deeper black
than other surfaces.
Multigrade IV RC Deluxe
A mid-weight 190gsm resin-coated
variable contrast paper noted for its high
maximum density and excellent highlight
detail, with a cool to neutral balance.
Available in three surfaces.
GLOSSY (Ilford code MG4RC1M)
ILMG5100 5 x 7 100 sheets . . . . . 21.00
ILMG825 8 x 10 25 sheets . . . . . 16.00
ILMG850 8 x 10 50 sheets . . . . . 22.50
ILMG8100 8 x 10 100 sheets . . . . 42.00
ILMGA100 A4 100 sheets . . . . . . . 54.00
ILMG910 9.5 x 12 10 sheets . . . 10.00
ILMG950 9.5 x 12 50 sheets . . . 31.00
ILMG1210 12 x 16 10 sheets . . . . 18.50
ILMG1250 12 x 16 50 sheets . . . . 50.00
ILMG1610 16 x 20 10 sheets . . . . 29.50
ILMG1650 16 x 20 50 sheets . . . . 76.50
PEARL (Ilford code MG4RC44M)
ILMP5100 5 x 7 100 sheets . . . . . 21.00
ILMP825 8 x 10 25 sheets . . . . . 16.00
ILMP850 8x 10 50 sheets . . . . . 22.50
ILMP8100 8 x 10 100 sheets . . . . 42.00
ILMPA100 A4 100 sheets . . . . . . . 54.00

ILMP910 9.5 x 12 10 sheets . . . 10.00
ILMP950 9.5 x 12 50 sheets . . . 31.00
ILMP1210 12 x 16 10 sheets . . . . 18.50
ILMP1250 12 x 16 50 sheets . . . . 50.00
ILMP1610 16 x 20 10 sheets . . . . 29.50
ILMP1650 16 x 20 50 sheets . . . . 76.50
SATIN (Ilford code MGRC425M)
ILMS5100 5 x 7 100 sheets . . . . . 21.00
ILMS825 8 x 10 25 sheets . . . . . 16.00
ILMS8100 8 x 10 100 sheets . . . . 42.00
ILMS910 9.5 x12 10 sheets . . . . 10.00
ILMS950 9.5 x 12 50 sheets . . . 31.00
ILMS1210 12 x 16 10 sheets . . . . 18.50
ILMS1250 12 x 16 50 sheets . . . . 50.00
ILMS1610 16 x 20 10 sheets . . . . 29.50
ILMS1650 16 x 20 50 sheets . . . . 76.50
Multigrade IV Warmtone RC
A variable contrast 190gsm resin-coated
paper with a warm white base and image
tone, and which reacts extremely well to
further toning. Available in Glossy or Pearl
finishes.
GLOSSY (Ilford code MGRCWT1M)
ILMWG5100 5 x 7 100 sheets . . . . . 29.95
ILMWG825 8 x 10 25 sheets . . . . . 17.95
ILMWG8100 8 x 10 100 sheets . . . . 62.95
ILMWG910 9.5 x 12 10 sheets . . . 10.75
ILMWG950 9.5 x 12 50 sheets . . . 44.95
ILMWG1210 12 x 16 10 sheets . . . . 19.60
ILMWG1250 12 x 16 50 sheets . . . . 72.95
PEARL (Ilford code MGRCWT44M)
ILMWP5100 5 x 7 100 sheets . . . . . 29.95
ILMWP825 8 x 10 25 sheets . . . . . 17.95
ILMWP8100 8 x 10 100 sheets . . . . 62.95
ILMWP910 9.5 x 12 10 sheets . . . 10.75
ILMWP950 9.5 x 12 50 sheets . . . 44.95
ILMWP1210 12 x 16 10 sheets . . . . 19.60
ILMWP1250 12 x 16 50 sheets . . . . 72.95
ILMWP1610 16 x 20 10 sheets . . . . 31.20
ILMWP1650 16 x 20 50 sheets . . . 109.95
Fibre-based
Fibre-based papers have no plastic coating,
and as a result all processing solutions are
absorbed to an extent, so they require
careful washing, and ideally air-drying, to
achieve archival permanence (toning can
help this too).They wont dry flat either,
so a considerable effort in processing is
required. However, the baryta (barium
sulphate based) coating gives a lustrous
wide tonal range which make it the paper
type of choice for exhibition work.
Multigrade IV FB Classic
A premium variable contrast paper with a
heavy 255gsm baryta fibre base.
GLOSSY (Ilford code MG4FB1K)
ILMFG825 8 x 10 25 sheets . . . . . 26.30
ILMFG8100 8 x 10 100 sheets . . . . 82.95
ILMFG910 9.5 x 12 10 sheets . . . 14.70
ILMFG950 9.5 x 12 50 sheets . . . 62.40
ILMFG1110 11 x 14 10 sheets . . . . 22.30
ILMFG1150 11 x 14 50 sheets . . . . 81.95
ILMFG1210 12 x 16 10 sheets . . . . 27.80
ILMFG1250 12 x 16 50 sheets . . . . 99.95
ILMFG1610 16 x 20 10 sheets . . . . 43.95
ILMFG1650 16 x 20 50 sheets . . . 152.95
MATT to order at the same prices
Multigrade IV Warmtone FB
Variable contrast warmtone paper with a
heavy 225gsm baryta fibre base.
GLOSSY (Ilford code MGFBWT1K)
ILMFGW825 8 x 10 25 sheets . . . . . 31.50
ILMFGW8100 8 x 10 100 sheets . . . 102.30
ILMFGW910 9.5 x 10 10 sheets . . . 17.95
ILMFGW950 9.5 x 12 50 sheets . . . 73.30
ILMFGW1110 11 x 14 10 sheets . . . . 24.50
ILMFGW1210 12 x 16 10 sheets . . . . 30.95
ILMFGW1250 12 x 16 50 sheets . . . 123.95
SEMI-MATT to order at the same prices
103
Inkjet paper
Ilford Galerie
Prestige Smooth Pearl
310gsm. Fine art
paper with vivid
colour reproduction
and a heavyweight
traditional photo
paper base. For all
inkjet printer types.
ILGSP64100
ILGSP57100
ILGSPA4025
ILGSPA4100
ILGSPA4250
ILGSPA3025
ILGSPA3+25
ILGSPA225
ILGSP1727M
ILGSP2427M
6x4 (100 sheets) . . . 14.50

5x7 (100 sheets) . . . 17.50
A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 13.95
A4 (100 sheets) . . . . 38.50
A4 (250 sheets) . . . . 82.95
A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 25.50
A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 35.50
A2 (25 sheets) . . . . . 55.00
17 x 27m roll . . . . . . 69.00
24 x 27m roll . . . . . . 95.00
Prestige Smooth Gloss

310gsm. Heavyweight fine art resincoated paper for both dye and pigment ink
papers.
ILGSG64100 6x4 (100 sheets) . . . 14.50
ILGSG57100 5x7 (100 sheets) . . . 17.50
ILGSGA4025 A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 13.95
ILGSGA4100 A4 (100 sheets) . . . . 38.50
ILGSGA4250 A4 (250 sheets) . . . . 82.95
ILGSGA3025 A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 25.50
ILGSGA3+25 A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 35.50
ILGSGA225 A2 (25 sheets) . . . . . 55.00
ILGSG1727M 17 x 27m roll . . . . . . 69.00
ILGSG2427M 24 X 27M roll . . . . . . 95.00
Gold Fibre Silk

A luxury professional
paper with an
authentic barium
sulphate (baryta)
base, producing high
definition images
with an extended
tonal range. This
enhances the
surface, which gives
the cream whites and velvety blacks which
are the hallmark of a true fibre print.
This is a heavyweight 310gsm paper,
so is not suitable for front feeding printers, and is optimised for use with Epson
UltraChrome and Canon Lucia inks,
although it can be used with other types.
ILGFSA4025
ILGFSA4050
ILGFSA3+025
ILGFSA3+050
ILGFSA3025
ILGFSA2050
ILGFS1712M
ILGFS2412M
A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 22.95

A4 (50 sheets) . . . . . 37.50
A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 58.95
A3+ (50 sheets) . . . . 95.00
A2 (25 sheets) . . . . . 91.50
A2 (50 sheets) . . . . 149.00
17 x 12m roll . . . . . . 71.95
24 x 12m roll . . . . . . 99.95
Gold Mono Silk

270gsm. Designed to
achieve stunning
black and white
images, with seamless tonal transitions
and exceptional
DMax and DMin
values.
ILGMSA425
ILGMSA3+25
ILGMSA225
ILGMS1712
ILGMS2412
A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 16.50

A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 41.50
A2 (25 sheets) . . . . . 64.95
17 x 12m roll . . . . . . 60.50
24 x 12m roll . . . . . . 85.00
ILGPL64100 6x4 (100 sheets) . . . 11.95

ILGPL75100 7x5 (100 sheets) . . . 17.95
ILGPLA425 A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 11.95
ILGPLA325 A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 23.95
ILGPLA3+25 A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 31.00
Available in rolls, to order
104
Prestige Gloss
260gsm. High quality, good value gloss
paper for everyday printing.
ILGPL64100 6x4 (100 sheets) . . 11.95
ILGPL75100 7x5 (100 sheets) . . . 17.95
ILGPLA425 A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 11.95
ILGPLA325 A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 23.95
ILGPLA3+25 A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 31.00
Available in rolls, to order
Prestige Premium Matt Duo

200gsm double-sided high quality paper
for flyers, presentations and brochures.
ILPMDA450 A4 (50 sheets) . . . . . 12.95
ILPMDA3+50 A3+ (50 sheets) . . . . 34.50
A4 Test Packs
PF Lustre
275gsm.
Pigment
freindly
bright white
paper with real
photo lustre
finish for both
pigment and dye
inks.
FSPFL257100 5x7 (100 sheets) . . . 18.95
FSPFL2A4050 A4 (50 sheets) . . . . . 17.95
FSPFL2A4100 A4 (100 sheets) . . . . 33.30
FSPFL2A3050 A3 (50 sheets) . . . . . 36.00
FSPFL2A3100 A3 (100 sheets) . . . . 66.60
FSPFL2A3+050 A3+ (50 sheets) . . . . 45.90
FSPFL2A2050 A2 (50 sheets) . . . . . 79.95
FSPFL21730M 17 x 30m roll . . . . . . 79.95
FSPFL22430M 24 x 30m roll . . . . . . 99.95
FSPFL2A4P25 Panoramic (25 shts) . 26.95
A natural white heavyweight instant-dry

290gsm paper with subtle pearl finish. A
direct match for Ilford Galerie Smooth
Pearl, with identical print characteristics.
FSPSP6100
FSPPSP7100
FSPSPA4050
FSPSPA4100
FSPSPA3050
FSPSPA3100
FSPSPA3+25
FSPSPA225
FSPSP1730M
FSPSP2430M
FSPSPA4P25
6x4 (100 sheets) . . . 13.50

5x7 (100 sheets) . . . 17.95
A4 (50 sheets) . . . . . 17.95
A4 (100 sheets) . . . . 32.95
A3 (50 sheets) . . . . . 35.50
A3 (100 sheets) . . . . 66.50
A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 24.95
A2 (25 sheets) . . . . . 44.95
17 x 30m roll . . . . . . 79.95
24 x 30m roll . . . . . . 99.95
Panoramic (25 shts) . 26.95
Panoramic Papers
Now theres no need to have a roll feed

printer in order to make a panoramic
print. Any A4 or larger printer can now
create a 210x594mm picture. Available
in six Fotospeed paper types, and in a
Test Pack (4 sheets of each type).
FSPANOPT 26.95
Permajet
EG Papers Gloss (12) 3 sheets each of

4 different gloss papers FSEGTPG
8.00
EG Papers Matt (18) 3 sheets each of
6 different matt surface papers
FSEGTPM 10.00
240gsm. Smooth
bright
white
heavyweight matt
paper for all
purposes, with
excellent saturation and
contrast.
FSMUA4050
FSMUA4100
FSMUA3050
FSMUA3100
FSMUA3+050
FSMUA2050
FSMU1730M
FSMU2430M
A4 (50 sheets) . . . . . 13.90

A4 (100 sheets) . . . . 26.00
A3 (50 sheets) . . . . . 27.00
A3 (100 sheets) . . . . 51.30
A3+ (50 sheets) . . . . 36.90
A2 (50 sheets) . . . . . 60.30
17 x 30m roll . . . . . . 48.50
24 x 30m roll . . . . . . 67.90
EG Fine Art papers

Platinum
Baryta
300gsm. Gives
traditional
heavy weight
photo paper
feel and a
sumptuous
reproduction.
FSEPBA4020 A4 (20 sheets) . . . . . 21.00
FSEPBA4050 A4 (50 sheets) . . . . . 46.00
FSEPBA3020 A3 (20 sheets) . . . . . 39.95
FSEPBA3050 A3 (50 sheets) . . . . . 91.80
FSEPBA3+020 A3+ (20 sheets) . . . . 51.00
FSEPBA3+050 A3+ (50 sheets) . . . 119.70
FSEPBA2020 A2 (20 sheets) . . . . . 79.00
FSEPBA2050 A2 (50 sheets) . . . . 183.60
FSEPB1715M 17 x 15m roll . . . . . 112.95
FSEPB2415M 24 x 15m roll . . . . . 155.00
FSEPBA4P25 Panoramic (25 shts) . 53.95
Hahnemuhle
Digital Fine Art Collection
Fibre Base Baryta (12) 2 sheets each

of FB Gloss 295, FB Gloss Warmtone
295, FB Royal 325, FB Distinction 360,
FB Matt 285, FB Photo Art Pearl 290.
PJTPFB
Matt Ultra
Gloss 271
A high gloss heavyweight paper with a
very white base. Instant-dry and compatible with all inkjet printers. 271gsm.
PJG2A4025
PJG2A4100
PJG2A3050
PJG2A3050
PJG2A3+025
PJG2A3+050
PJG21730M
PJG22430M
A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 11.95

A4 (100 sheets) . . . . 32.50
A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 21.00
A3 (50 sheets) . . . . . 33.20
A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 26.50
A3+ (50 sheets) . . . . 45.60
17 x 30m roll . . . . . . 68.50
24 x 30m roll . . . . . . 92.50
Oyster 271
The same high white base as the Gloss 271
but with a pearl surface. 271gsm.
PJO2A4025
PJO2A4100
PJO2A3050
PJO2A3050
PJO2A3+025
PJO2A3+050
PJO21730M
PJO22430M
A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 11.95

A4 (100 sheets) . . . . 32.50
A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 21.00
A3 (50 sheets) . . . . . 33.20
A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 26.50
A3+ (50 sheets) . . . . 45.60
17 x 30m roll . . . . . . 68.50
24 x 30m roll . . . . . . 92.50
Smooth Pearl 280

Bright white fine
pearl finish paper
with identical printing characteristics to
Ilford Smooth Pearl.
280gsm.
PJSP64100
PJSP75100
PJSPA4050
PJSPA3050
PJSPA3+025
PJSPA2025
6x4 (100 sheets) . . . 12.50

7x5 (100 sheets) . . . 18.30
A4 (50 sheets) . . . . . 17.95
A3 (50 sheets) . . . . . 33.20
A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 26.50
A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 41.50
Textured Fine Art (12) 3

sheets each of Artist 210,
Museum 310, Parchment
285, Papyrus 300
PJTPTFA
All packs
1195
Manufacturers of fine art paper for

over 400 years, Hahnemuhle have
created a range of inkjet papers to
allow the photographer complete
consistency and accuracy,
together with archival permanence when the very highest
quality of presentation is demanded.
Matt Proofing 160

Single-sided mid-weight paper for proofing purposes, but delivering excellent
image quality (as used in the Speed
Graphic office for this catalogue). 160gsm
PJM1A4150
PJM1A3075
DIGITAL PROCESS
A4 Test Packs
Digital Photo (25)
5 sheets each of
Gloss 271, Oyster
271, Ultra Pearl 295,
Matt Plus 240, Matt
Proofing 160
PJTPDP
FS Papers (14) 2 sheets

each of PF Gloss, PF
Lustre, PF Satin, PF
Gloss Duo, Matt Ultra,
Matt Duo, Proofing
FSFSTP 9.95
FS Series
Photo Smooth Pearl 290
Prestige Lustre
260gsm. High quality
semi-gloss paper for
everyday printing
which is great value
Fotospeed
A4 (150 sheets) . . . . 19.95

A3 (75 sheets) . . . . . 21.95
Hahnemuhle A4 Test Packs

Try out different
finishes before
you commit to a
full pack. Each
version has two
sheets of each
type of paper.
1095
Fine Art Pearl 285

Photo Rag Satin 310
Photo Rag Baryta 315
A heavyweight
luxury baryta base
paper, with similar
qualities to Ilford
Gold Fibre Silk.
315gsm.
A heavy bright white 100% fibre paper

with an extra smooth surface for an ultra
glossy finish. 350gsm.
HUBFBA425 A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 28.60
HUBFBA325 A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 56.30
HUBFBA3+25 A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 71.40
Fine Art Baryta 325
Glossy Fine Art Pack
Gold Silk 315
Baryta FB 350
Baryta FB 350
Photo Rag Pearl 320
Fine Art Baryta 325
Leonardo Canvas 340
HUTPG
100% alpha-cellulose high gloss brilliant

white paper with large colour gamut and
superb definition for that extra wow
factor and feel. 325gsm.
HUFABA410 A4 (10 sheets) . . . . . 17.95
HUFABA425 A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 38.50
HUFABA325 A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 73.95
HUFABA3+25 A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 95.50
Matt Fine Art SmoothPack

Natural Art Duo 256
Bamboo 290
Photo Rag
Ultra Smooth 305
PJO2A4025 A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 23.50

PJO2A3025 A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 44.80
PJO2A3+025 A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 55.60
Fibre Base Distinction 360

Award-winning triple weight bright white
paper with a baryta base guaranteeing
archival stability. Very high D-Max, slight
gloss finish and cool tones. 360gsm.
Photo Rag 308

Photo Rag Bright
White 310
Daguerre Canvas 400
HUTPS
Matt Fine Art TexturedPack
Albrecht Durer 210
Torchon 285
Sugar Cane 300
German Etching 310
William Turner 310

Museum Etching 350
Monet Canvas 410
HUTPT
Photo Rag 308
Bamboo 290
The worlds first fine art inkjet paper to be
made from bamboo fibres is environmentally sound and has a warmer tone than
the photo rag papers. Matt finish 290gsm.
HUB3A425 A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 32.70
HUB3A325 A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 63.80
HUB3A3+25 A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 79.95
Monet Canvas 410

410gsm heavy cotton canvas perfect for
art repro or photo portraiture.
HUPR3A410 A4 (10 sheets) . . . . . 12.95
HUPR3A325 A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 53.50
Museum Classic 310
A smooth bright white 100% rag based

308gsm paper with a smooth calendered
top surface which picks up every detail.
HUPR3A425 A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 34.50
HUPR3A325 A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 68.95
HUPR3A3+25 A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 86.95
Fine art, off-white paper with a slightly

textured surface which is pH neutral and
which delivers gicle print quality. 310gsm
Photo Rag 188
Matt Protective Spray
188gsm lighter weight version of the

100% rag based paper above.
HUPR1A425 A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 28.50
HUPR1A325 A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 55.40
This odourless spray seals the

printed surface and protects it from
dirt, fingerprints, and fading
caused by UV rays. HUPS 20.50
PJFBDA425 A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 23.95

PJFBDA325 A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 44.80
PJFBDA3+25 A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 59.50
PJMCA425
PJMCA325
PJMCA3+25
A4 (25 sheets) . . . . . 24.95

A3 (25 sheets) . . . . . 46.00
A3+ (25 sheets) . . . . 61.50
Any paper not held in stock can be

despatched direct to you from our
supplier, usually the same day. If theres
a special paper you need, ask for quote!
105
Epson
Photo Paper
200gsm. Delivers
a smooth, glossy
finish for everyday pictures of
real photographic
quality.
Inkjet inks
Epson
Photo Paper 200gsm

EPP101550 10x15cm (50 sheets) . . 8.95
EPP131850 13x18cm (50 sheets) . . 9.50
EPPA4020
A4 (20 sheets) . . . . . . 11.50
EPPA4050
A4 (50 sheets) . . . . . . 23.60
EPPA4100
A4 (100 sheets) . . . . . 38.80
EPPA320
A3 (20 sheets) . . . . . . 21.95
EPPA3+20
A3+ (20 sheets) . . . . . 25.50
Epson Premium Glossy Photo paper has
been discontinued makes no sense to us
either.
Premium Semi Gloss Photo

251gsm. Similar
to pearl finish
conventional
photo paper.
R2100 Chameleon
EP0341
photo black. . . . . . . . 22.95
EP0342
cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.95
EP0343
magenta . . . . . . . . . . 22.95
EP0344
yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.95
EP0345
light cyan . . . . . . . . . 22.95
EP0346
light magenta . . . . . . 22.95
EP0347
light black. . . . . . . . . 22.95
EP0348
matt black. . . . . . . . . 22.95
Canon
Premium Semi Gloss 251gsm

EPPSG101550 10x15cm (50 sheets) . . 9.95
EPPSGA4020 A4 (20 sheets) . . . . . . 17.95
EPPSGA320 A3 (20 sheets) . . . . . . 33.50
Archival Matte
192gsm. Bright
white ultrasmooth finish
with archival
permanence
only for use
with pigment
printers.
EPAMA450 A4 (50 sheets) . . . . . . 17.95

EPAMA3+50 A3+ (50 sheets) . . . . . 46.95
106
S800, 820D, 900, 9000, i950, i9100

CABCI6BK
black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99
CABCI6C
cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99
CABCI6M
magenta . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99
CABCI6Y
yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99
CABCI6PC
photo cyan . . . . . . . . . 9.99
CABCI6PM
photo magenta . . . . . . 9.99
additional cartridges for iP8500, i9950
CABCI6R
red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99
CABCI6G
green . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99
Text black cartridge for Pixma
PGI-5BK type compatible with many Pixma
printer models
CAPGI5BK
black TWIN PACK . . . . 21.95
Monitor and printer profiling

R2400 Lily
EP0591
photo black. . . . . . . . 15.50
EP0592
cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.50
EP0593
magenta . . . . . . . . . . 15.50
EP0594
yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.50
EP0595
light cyan . . . . . . . . . 15.50
EP0596
light magenta . . . . . . 15.50
EP0597
light black. . . . . . . . . 15.50
EP0598
matt black. . . . . . . . . 15.50
EP0599
light light black . . . . 15.50
P50 Hummingbird
EP0801
black . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99
EP0802
cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99
EP0803
magenta . . . . . . . . . . 11.99
EP0804
yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99
EP0805
light cyan . . . . . . . . . 11.99
EP0806
light magenta . . . . . . 11.99
EP0807
set of 6 inks . . . . . . . 67.95
R1900 Flamingo
EP0870
gloss optimiser x 2 . . 11.95
EP0871
photo black. . . . . . . . 11.95
EP0872
cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.95
EP0873
magenta . . . . . . . . . . 11.95
EP0874
yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.95
EP0877
red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.95
EP0878
matte black. . . . . . . . 11.95
EP0879
orange . . . . . . . . . . . 11.95
R2880 Husky
EP0961
photo black. . . . . . . . 11.95
EP0962
cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.95
EP0963
vivid magenta . . . . . . 11.95
EP0964
yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.95
EP0965
light cyan . . . . . . . . . 11.95
EP0966
vivid light magenta. . 11.95
EP0967
light black. . . . . . . . . 11.95
EP0968
matt black. . . . . . . . . 11.95
EP0969
R2000 Kingfisher
EP1590
gloss optimiser . . . . . . 7.50
EP1591
photo black. . . . . . . . 17.70
EP1592
cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.70
EP1593
magenta . . . . . . . . . . 17.70
EP1594
yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.70
EP1597
red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.70
EP1598
matte black. . . . . . . . 17.70
EP1599
orange . . . . . . . . . . . 17.70
R3000 Turtle
EP1571
photo black. . . . . . . . 24.99
EP1572
cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.99
EP1573
vivid magenta . . . . . . 24.99
EP1574
yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.99
EP1575
light cyan . . . . . . . . . 24.99
EP1576
vivid light magenta. . 24.99
EP1577
light black. . . . . . . . . 24.99
EP1578
matt black. . . . . . . . . 24.99
EP1579
Pro 9000
CACLI8BK
CACLI8C
CACLI8M
CACLI8Y
CACLI8PC
CACLI8PM
CACLI8R
CACLI8G
Pro 9500
CAPGI9PBK
CAPGI9MBK
CAPGI9GY
CAPGI9C
CAPGI9M
CAPGI9Y
CAPGI9PC
CAPGI9PM
CAPGI9R
CAPGI9G
Pro 100
CACLI42BK
CACLI42C
CACLI42GY
CACLI42LGY
CACLI42M
CACLI42PC
CACLI42PM
CACLI42Y
Pro 10
CAPGI72C
CAPGI72CO
CAPGI72GY
CAPGI72M
CAPGI72MBK
CAPGI72PBK
CAPGI72PC
CAPGI72PM
CAPGI72R
CAPGI72Y
Pro 1
CAPGI29MPK
CAPGI29CPK
CAPGI29C
CAPGI29M
CAPGI29PC
CAPGI29PM
CAPGI29Y
CAPGI29R
CAPGI29MB
CAPGI29PB
CAPGI29DGY
CAPGI29GY
CAPGI29LGY
black . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.50
cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.50
magenta . . . . . . . . . . 12.50
yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.50
photo cyan . . . . . . . . 12.50
photo magenta . . . . . 12.50
red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.50
green . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.50
photo black. . . . . . . . 10.50
matte black. . . . . . . . 10.50
grey . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.50
cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.50
magenta . . . . . . . . . . 10.50
yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.50
photo cyan . . . . . . . . 10.50
red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.50
green . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.50
black . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.50
cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.50
grey . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.50
light grey . . . . . . . . . 12.50
magenta . . . . . . . . . . 12.50
photo cyan . . . . . . . . 12.50
Mono multipack . . . 107.95

Colour multipack. . . 129.95
Cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.95
magenta . . . . . . . . . . 23.95
photo cyan . . . . . . . . 23.95
yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.95
red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.95
matte black. . . . . . . . 23.95
photo black. . . . . . . . 23.95
dark grey. . . . . . . . . . 23.95
grey . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.95
light grey . . . . . . . . . 23.95
Similar in shape to the ColorMunki

Display, but offering 5x faster measuring
speed and more advanced professional
features.
Profiles all types of monitor, plus video
projectors, and can display monitor
changes over time
Basic and Advanced iProfiler interfaces allow flexible control from standard to total customised workflow
Pantone Colour Manager allows spot
colour optimising
Adjusts automatically to ambient lighting conditions
Future-proof upgradeable to new
monitor technologies
Windows XP 32-bit/Vista/7; Mac Intel
OSX 10.5+
CCE1P 169.95
The super-easy way to profile multiple monitors to a

preset standard, for consistent colour rendering on
your desktop and laptop computers.
No colour knowledge is required the on-screen
wizard makes set-up easy
Calibrates LCD and LED monitors so you can do
both your desktop and laptop computers to the
same standard
Compare before and after results side by side on
the screen
Calibration reminder notifies you when its time to
recalibrate
Online help videos available
Requires Win XP 32-bit, Vista, 7, 8: Mac 10.6+
with latest upgrades. Powered USB port
CCCMS 74.00
Datacolor Spyder4 Pro M

yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.50
cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.50
chroma optimiser . . . 11.50
grey . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.50
magenta . . . . . . . . . . 11.50
matte black. . . . . . . . 11.50
photo black. . . . . . . . 11.50
photo cyan . . . . . . . . 11.50
red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.50
yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.50
X-Rite i1 Display Pro M
X-Rite ColorMunki Smile M
The Spyder4 Pro is an ideal solution for

anyone requiring professional level colour
calibration for one or more monitors, or
iPad and iPhone.
X-Rite ColorMunki Display M

An easy to use, but technically advanced
profiler for all kinds of monitor including
wide gamut LED types for amateur or
professional use.
Intuitive wizard-driven interface with
easy or advanced modes allows you
to get accurate colour without a steep
learning curve
Calibrates all kinds of computer monitors and also projectors a rotating
stand for this is provided
Will be upgradeable to cope with
emerging monitor technologies
Windows XP 32-bit/Vista/7; Mac Intel
OSX 10.5+
CCCMD 114.00
Simple wizard-driven installation

Full-spectrum 7-colour sensor is
compatible with the latest wide-gamut
displays
Multiple displays (LCD, LED, OLED, CRT,
DLP and more) attached to a computer
can be individually calibrated
Ambient light sensor accurately monitors lighting conditions, giving you the
option to change studio lighting or
display profile if the ambient light
changes
Recalibration Assistant feature makes
it quick and easy to check and adjust
the display for the changes which occur
over time
Windows XP/Vista/7 ; Mac OSX 10.4+
CCS4P 129.00
X-Rite ColorMunki Photo

M P
A complete monitor-to-print solution for
professional and advanced amateur
photographers, with a uniquely simplified
approach.
All-in-one true spectral device for
monitor, print and projector profiling
Easily portable no cumbersome
accessories
Self-calibrating device with built-in
white calibration tile
RGB and CMYK printer profiling optimised for skin tones, black and white
and colour
Fast and accurate projector profiling.
Captures colour from any
surface, and automatically
extracts colours from
images
Adjusts to the ambient light in your
room or lightbox
Create and manage custom
colour palettes with the
unique PrintSafe feature
Easily set profiles in photo
applica-tions with AppSet program
DigitalPouch automatically checks
whether colleagues or clients will
receive images correctly.
Windows XP 32/64 bit, Vista 32/64 (needs
latest service packs installed)/7; Mac OS
10.4, 10.5 (with latest update installed);
512MB RAM; DVD-ROM drive.
CCCMP 339.95
Profiling software is available for monitors only, or to do both jobs. The

symbols below are used to denote the
applications.
M
P
Software for monitor calibration

Software for printer calibration
107
Film scanners
Reflecta
X7-Scan
A compact stand-alone scanner for 35mm,
126 and 110 slides and negatives using a
14MP sensor to digitise images in around
2 seconds.
No need to connect to a computer;
images are stored on an SD card (not
included)
Scans 35mm/126/110 colour neg and
black and white, and 35mm colour slide
2.4 LCD pre-scan review screen
Exposure can be adjusted
Plustek
OpticFilm 8100
A versatile scanner for 35mm film, with
easy-to-use Silverfast software for image
enhancement and repair.
7200dpi max optical resolution
48 bit colour depth
Approx 8 secs preview scan speed
113 secs scan speed at 7200dpi with
multi-sampling on
Hard drives
Scan resolution is equivalent to
3200dpi, and up to 2000 images can be
scanned in the approx 2.5 hour operating time of the rechargeable battery
(Euro/UK charger is included)
Full frame scans are 4416x2944 pixels
which resize to 37x25cm @ 300dpi
Scans can be transferred to computer
either from the SD card, on by connecting the scanner with the supplied USB
cable. ArcSoft MediaImpression is
included on CD
Includes TV-out cable, cleaning brush
and printed set-up instructions
RAX7 119.95
A high resolution 35mm scanner which

includes multi-sampling software which
boosts detail retrieval in highlights and
shadows. Also includes a suite of
SilverFast software.
7200dpi max optical resolution
48 bit colour depth
Approx 8 secs preview scan speed
13 secs scan speed at 7200dpi with
multi-sampling on
Supplied full version SilverFast SE Plus
software. This allows up to 4 passes of
OpticFilm 120
A professional-grade scanner for 35mm and
120/220 rollfilm up to 6x12cm image format.
Supplied with adjustable holders for 35mm
slides and 6x4.5, 6x6, 6x7 and 6x12cm sizes
Automated motorised film transport system
speeds up the scanning workflow
5300dpi optical resolution and stabilised light source
Effective dynamic range 4.01 (can be increased with Silverfast multiexposure to approach drum scanner levels)
Includes Silverfast Ai Studio 8 software, including dust and scratch
removal, colour retrieval and calibration, and more
Requires Windows XP/Vista/7; Mac 10.5+ (Intel processor only)
PK120 1750.00
108
d2 Quadra v3
LaCie
Popular drive ideal for backup and large

data volume interchange on the go
plugs into just about any computer
anywhere. Its scratch-protected
aluminium shell and shock-resistant
rubber bumper make it especially used to
harsh environments. Available in versions
for all popular connections.
Hard drive is protected by internal
anti-shock rubber bumpers, a protective aluminium shell and finally a
shock-resistant rubber sleeve
Requires no mains or battery power as
it is powered through the bus
5400rpm speed (7200rpm versions
available)
Size: 90x25x145mm
Weight: 250g
Win XP, Vista, 7, 8; Mac OS X 10.5+
Supplied with basic Silverfast SE Plus 8

software. This allows up to 4 passes of
the photo to enhance the dynamic
range of the scan, enable noise
removal, colour correction and smart
removal of defects
Includes 6 image holders for negatives
and mounted slides
Supplied with padded carrying bag
Requires Windows XP/Vista/7; Mac OS
10.5+ (Intel processor only). USB 2.0
PK8100 186.00
OpticFilm 8200i SE
STORAGE
Rugged
the photo to enhance the dynamic

range of the scan, enable noise
removal, colour correction and smart
removal of defects
Includes 6 image holders for negatives
and mounted slides
Supplied with padded carrying bag
Requires Windows XP/Vista/7; Mac
10.5+ (Intel processor only)
PK8200SE 239.00
OpticFilm 8200AI is the same as the SE,
but has full Silverfast software for greater
control. PK8200AI 343.00
Rugged Mini
Smaller version of the Rugged design. It
doesnt have all of the anti-shock layers,
but with drive stationary you can still drop
it from 1.2m without ill effect.
Top casing is rain-resistant and will
take a load of up to 1 ton
USB3.0 connection gives transfer
speeds 34x faster than USB2.0, but it
works with both
Bus-powered so it needs no mains or
battery power
LaCie Public-Private protection is built
in to keep your data private
Comes with 1 years free access to
LaCies WUALA cloud backup facility
Size: 86x19x135mm
Weight: 240g
Win XP, Vista, 7, 8; Mac 10.5+
LCRM05 500GB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62.95
LCRM05F 500GB (7200rpm) . . . . . . 67.95
LCRM10 1TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83.95
LCRM20 2TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124.95
Triple USB3.0
Triple interfaces FireWire 800,
USB3.0/2.0
LCR305 500GB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76.95
LCR305F 500GB (7200rpm). . . . . . 83.95
LCR310 1TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115.95
LCR320 2TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156.95
Triple interface version
Thunderbolt version
USB3.0 Thunderbolt
Dual interfaces Thunderbolt (integrated cable), USB3.0/2.0
Solid-state drive versions allow datatransfer speeds of up to 380MBps
Hard drive version speed 110MBps
(35% faster than Firewire 800)
LCRT02 256GB SSD . . . . . . . . . . 209.00
LCRT05 500GB SSD . . . . . . . . . . 349.00
LCRT10 1TB hard drive . . . . . . . 135.00
LCRT20 2TB hard drive. . . . . . . . 189.00
Porsche Design Mobile Drive P9223

reddot design winner in 2012, and
styled to match Mac laptops, this
has a 3mm thick aluminium case to
protect the drive, but is still only
15mm deep.
USB3.0/2.0 interface gives transfer speeds of up to 100MBps
Timeless classic design by
Porsche
Aluminium finish matches
MacBooks
Compatible with Time Machine;
includes LaCie Backup Assistant
Size: 77x130x15mm
Weight: 240g
Win XP, Vista, 7, 8; Mac OS X
10.5+
LCPDM10 1TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72.95
LCPDM20 2TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114.95
2big Quadra USB3.0
An all-in one professional hard disk for PC

and Mac users which is perfect for
audio/video editing, DVD authoring and
other data intensive tasks, and can be
daisychained by FireWire connection.
Currently available in two configurations.
3Gbits/sec max bandwidth via eSATA
Fanless aluminium heatsink design
means it is quiet and safe
Easy plug and play setup via LaCie
Assistant
7200rpm speed
Size: 44x160x173mm
Weight: 1.5kg
Includes cables for all interfaces,
external power supply, utilities software
3 year limited warranty
Requires Win XP, Vista, 7, 8; Mac OS10.5+
d2 Quadra USB3.0
Quadruple interfaces 2 x FireWire
800, USB3.0/2.0, eSATA
LCD2Q320 2TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144.95
LCD2Q330 3TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162.95
LCD2Q340 4TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209.95
LCD2Q350 5TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244.95
d2 Thunderbolt
Includes superfast
Thunderbolt and USB3.0
connections. You can use it
with USB2.0 and still get up
to 35MBps.
7200rpm disk speed
Up to 180MBps possible
with Thunderbolt connection (cable is supplied
with drive)
LCD2T30 3TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189.95
LCD2T40 4TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264.95
LCD2T50 5TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299.95
LCD2T60 6TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349.95
A 2-disk professional RAID drive with four

interface options, ideal for data intensive
photo, video or audio applications. Four
RAID modes are available:
SAFE100 (RAID 1) mirrors the data on
the first disk on the second. If one disk
goes down, it can be replaced and will
automatically rebuild the contents
FAST (RAID 0) uses both disks simultaneously to deliver data transfer rates of
up to 90MB/sec
BIG treats both drives as one large
drive for maximum capacity
JBOD allows each disk to be used as a
discrete drive
Two lockable 7200rpm drives are hot
swappable
Firewire 400, Firewire 800, USB2.0 and
eSATA interfaces
Size: 91x200x172mm
Weight: 2.6kg
Win 2000/XP/ Vista,7, 8; Mac OS10.5+
LC2BQ40 4TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269.00
LC2BQ50 5TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349.00
LC2BQ80 8TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449.00
2big Thunderbolt
For when really high speed transfer of
data is crucial, this version allows up to
325MBps transfer, and includes two
Thunderbolt sockets to allow daisychaining.
LC2BT40 4TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437.00
LC2BT60 6TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519.00
LC2BT80 8TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619.00
109
Medalight viewers/light boxes
Slide projection
Braun
Novamat E150
Reflecta tripod screens

A 150 watt projector manufactured in
Germany. Features include:
Infra-red wireless remote control
retracts into casing.
Autofocus 85/f2.8 multicoated lens.
Takes Universal, LKM, CS slide mags
Single slide preview lift.
Fan cooling, with overheat protection.
BNE150 255.00
Novamat E130
The same design as the E150, but with a
wired remote control. BN130 229.00
Novamat Monitor M330
White pearl screens with tensioner, tripod

support and built-in carry handle: easy to
transport.
RASS125 125x125cm (4) . . . . . . . 54.95
RASS150 150x150cm (5) . . . . . . . 69.95
RASS180 180x180cm (6) . . . . . . . 89.95
Table Viewer
Hand Viewer
Takes 35mm
mounted slides
and 135 filmstrips. Ejects slides
into the front tray. 3x
magnification.
Glass lens. Powered
by 4xAA alkaline
batteries.
SV-3 version uses a tungsten bulb.
MESV3 19.95
SV-3 LED has LED daylight balanced (nominally 5000K) illumination. MESV5000 31.50
2x magnification
hand-held 35mm
slide viewer with
tungsten bulb illumination. 2 x 1.5v
AA battery required.
MESV2 9.95
LP-400
Has a viewing surface of 20 x 30cm (8 x 12), which is
just larger than A4, with overall dimensions 28Dx37Wx2.5H cm.
The viewing angle is adjustable, and it can be wall mounted. Lamp has service
life of 10,000 hours. Comes with carrying bag and 12v adaptor MELP400 92.50
Braun projection table

A sturdy metal model with extra platform
for stacking slide
magazines. Top
platform measures
45x30cm; lower
35x20cm. The top
platform angle is
adjusted by means
of a crank, and one
leg foot is
adjustable to
compensate for
uneven floors.
BNPTL 79.95
Manfrotto projector platform
LP-200
LP-100
Mid-size cold
cathode 5000K
illuminated
light panel, for
46 35mm
slides at a
time. Viewing
surface 12.7 x 17.8cm (5 x 7).
Overall size 19Dx22Wx2H cm. Includes
pouch case. Uses 6 x AA batteries, or
optional 9v adaptor. MELP200 47.95
Compact and highly

portable, cold cathode
5000K illumination,
for 24 35mm slides
at a time. Viewing
surface 10 x 12.5cm (4 x 5).
Overall size 15Dx16Wx1.4H cm. Includes
pouch case. Uses 6 x AAA batteries, or
optional 9v adaptor. MELP100 39.50
Projector bulbs
LMA216
LMA223
110
A1/216 150w/24v . . . 3.95

A1/223 250w/24v . . . 3.95
7x7cm mounts for 120

Glass mounts
all Anti-Newton Ring glass, 3mm overall
thickness unless stated (limited stock)
GP2501 AN 60x45 x 20 . . . . . . . . 22.95
GP2601 AN 60x60 x 20 . . . . . . . . 22.95
GP2701 AN 54x68 x 10 . . . . . . . . 21.95
Glassless mounts
GP7030 60x45 + mask x 20 . . . . . 10.95
GP7031 60x60 + mask x 20 . . . . . 10.95
Gepe
Universal
type
Kenro Storage Binder
Reliable magazines which

wont warp. Each box
contains two 50-slide magazines, and can
be stacked. GP4302 12.75
Gepe CS type
Contains 2 x 100 slide magazines which
will only accept CS mounts. Stackable.
GP4309 21.50
Gepe Archiv-Box 5x5

A simple and robust plastic
storage box for 50
5x5cm slide mounts.
GP3502 8.50
AP Kodak Carousel type

APKC 80 slide (limited stock) . . . . . . . 9.95
AP slide filing tray
AP film cutter
For 35mm film. Has a shear-action cutter
which, unlike scissors, ensures a straight
cut. APSC 13.95
Shown with
the optional
matching
slip case, the
Kenro binder
has a capacity of around
30 pages,
and is
complete
with spine
data card
and reference pocket. Black. KRKEN127 9.50
Standard binder complete with slip case
KRKEN130 18.50
LP-818
(pictured) Viewing area 20x45.8cm
(8x18). MELP818 145.00
LP-1218
Viewing area 30.5x45.8cm (12x18).
MELP1218 175.00
An indelible anti-smear black pen with

fine point, ideal for writing on plastic slide
mounts, CDs, or glass.HA50479 1.00
5x4 negatives/slides
4 unmounted slides or
negatives. Fit Kenro and
similar binders. Pack of
10 pages
SLSP3510 6.95
Pack of 50 pages
SLSP3550 28.95
Stores approx 200 35mm slides (depends

on mount thickness), and includes plastic
dividers and index cards. Transparent
hinged lid. APSFT 16.95
8mm colour dots (540) . . . 1.55

35x5mm labels white (252). 1.55
36x8mm labels white (168). 1.55
8mm numbers white 1-540 . 1.55
35mm negatives
Translucent. 6 strips of
6. 25 pages.
KRKNF08 5.95
120 negatives
Translucent. 25 pages.
KRKNF07 5.95
35mm negatives
Acetate print-through.
25 pages.
KRKNF11 12.75
120 negatives
Acetate print-through.
25 pages.
KRKNF10 12.75
Ilford Archiva archival box-form

ringbinder storage overleaf
Grafilite
Herma slide titling labels

HX1831
HX3735
HX3724
HX4128
Glassine archival
pages.
Arrows on
the diagrams
show the
direction of
loading.
35mm mounted slides

20 mounts up to 2mm
thick. Fit Kenro and
similar binders
Pack of 10 pages
SLSP3510 6.95
Pack of 50 pages
SLSP3550 28.95
Keep fingerprints
off slides and negs!
100% cotton. One
size fits all but the
largest hands.
HA8469 3.95
Hama slide titling pen
Kenro negative storage pages
Secol archival slide pages
Cotton gloves
Hama LP-15 laser pointer
Glass mounts (boxes of 20)

Anti-Newton Ring glass, 2.5mm thickness
(limited stock).
GP6052 VR SMPTE AN 24x36 . . . . . 6.65
GP2004 AN 24x36 3mm thick . . . . .9.35
Glassless mounts (boxes of 100)
all suit LKM style trays.
GP7001 24x36 2mm . . . . . . . . . . 11.95
GP7011 24x36 metal mask . . . . . 21.95
Glassless CS mounts
GP7050 24x36 CS 1.8mm (100) . 10.95
GP7055 24x36 CS hinged (200) . 16.25
Binder filing
Medalight professional lightboxes
A solid 25x35cm aluminium base which

screws on to any 1/4 or 3/8 tripod
thread to turn it into a sturdy projector
platform (if you have a sturdy tripod).
Supports up to 20kg. MA183 42.95
Weighs just 26gm and is

60mm long, has a range of 50m.
Complete with keyring and snap
hook, and batteries. HA3531 11.95
5x5cm mounts for 35mm
Slide magazines
9v mains adaptor for LP-100 and LP-200

Slim Lights. ME9V 8.50
Brushed aluminium frames only 1.5 (3.8cm) thick with edge calibrations in inches and
cm. Use two 13w 5000K tubes with a 3000 hour life. Both units feature a front-mounted
on-off switch, and a base mounted prop to allow viewing at an angle. They can also be wall
mounted, and have built-in strips to hold film in this
position. An AC adaptor is included.
This projector converts to a 21.5cm square
monitor viewer, giving brilliant colours
without the need to darken a room. It may
also be used as a conventional projector.
85/f2.8 multi-coated autofocus lens
Takes Universal, LKM and CS type mags
Fan cooling, with overheat protection
150 watt lamp
Wired remote control
Built-in carrying handle
BNM330 299.00
Slide mounts
Spare Grafilite tube

Recommended annual replacement to
maintain accuracy. CCGLB 14.95
Colour is rendered more naturally to the

eye under daylight than under artificial
light. For simple or occasional requirements theres the blue coloured lightbulb
below, but now theres a much more accurate alternative!
Ideal for photographers or designers,
or anyone wishing to view colours or
photos in correct lighting conditions
A4 neutral coloured mat wont affect
colour perception
2000Lux 13w TrueColor technology
light tube
Folds into a compact 28.5x8x8cm
package
UK/EU universal plug supplied
CCGL 49.95
111
Ilford Archiva
Pre-scored cards, complete with

envelopes. Design and print your own
special occasion greetings cards for a
really personal touch.
There are now seven types of paper
and three formats to choose from.
Finished in burgundy buckram cloth. The portfolio style box is widely accepted as the best
method for storing prints, and opens flat to allow easy access to the material.
Code
Price
Paper is single-sided, but will take text on

the reverse (inner) side.
Matt Ultra Middleweight
240gsm matt finish; economical. Pack of
50. FSFCMU 17.95
NT Bright White Heavy
315gsm premium quallity matt finish. n.b.
check your printer can take this weight.
Pack of 20. FSFCNTW 19.95
8 x 10
20.3 x 25.4
267 x 216 x 50
ILAPP810
45.00
10 x 12
25.4 x 30.5
318 x 267 x 50
ILAPP1012
51.20
i3 format
Archiva Gallery Two Tray Box
11 x 14
27.9 x 35.6
369 x 292 x 50
ILAPP1114
58.20
Finished in black Wibalin paper. These are an exact copy of the Ilford product boxes used
for printing paper. Many people like to use them for storing prints, so this is a superior
version using acid- and lignin-free board for archival permanence.
21 x 7.4cm landscape format cards in the

same papers as the A6 type.
11 x 17
27.9 x 43.2
445 x 292 x 50
ILAPP1117
62.00
Content size
Content size cm Int. box size mm
12 x 16
30.5 x 40.6
419 x 318 x 50
ILAPP1216
62.00
Code
Price
13 x 19
33 x 48.3
496 x 343 x 50
ILAPP1319
69.00
8 x 10
20.3 x 25.4
267 x 216 x 37
ILAGT810
17.90
16 x 20
40.6 x 50.8
521 x 419 x 50
ILAPP1620
81.60
10 x 12
25.4 x 30.5
318 x 267 x 37
ILAGT1012
20.50
17 x 22
43.2 x 55.9
572 x 445 x 50
ILAPP1722
89.20
11 x 14
27.9 x 35.6
369 x 292 x 37
ILAGT1114
22.00
20 x 24
50.8 x 61
623 x 521 x 50
ILAPP2024
113.50
11 x 17
27.9 x 43.2
445 x 292 x 37
ILAGT1117
25.30
A4
21 x 29.7
310 x 223 x 50
ILAPPA4
46.30
12 x 16
30.5 x 40.6
419 x 318 x 37
ILAGT1216
26.90
A3
29.7 x 42
433 x 310 x 50
ILAPPA3
62.50
13 x 19
33 x 48.3
496 x 343 x 37
ILAGT1319
28.95
A3+
33 x 48.3
492 x 342 x 50
ILAPPA3+
69.00
16 x 20
40.6 x 50.8
521 x 419 x 37
ILAGT1620
35.40
A2
42 x 59.4
607 x 433 x 50
ILAPPA2
93.50
17 x 22
43.2 x 55.9
572 x 445 x 37
ILAGT1722
39.00
20 x 24
50.8 x 61
623 x 521 x 37
ILAGT2024
44.70
A4
21 x 29.7
310 x 223 x 37
ILAGTA4
18.80
A3
29.7 x 42
433 x 310 x 37
ILAGTA3
25.60
Content size
A3+
33 x 48.3
492 x 342 x 37
ILAGTA3+
28.95
4 x 6
10.5 x 14.8
A2
42 x 59.4
607 x 433 x 37
ILAGTA2
39.70
5 x 7
7 x 9.5
Archiva Gallery Shoe Box

Finished in black Wibalin paper. A lighter weight version of the Prestige shoe box, to store
smaller format prints vertically, or larger objects needing secure box protection.
Content size
112
Code
Price
Archiva Prestige Shoe Box

Finished in burgundy buckram cloth. Designed to store large numbers of smaller formatprints vertically in the box.
Code
Price
290 x 160 x 110
ILAPS46
31.50
12.7 x 17.8
290 x 190 x 135
ILAPS57
38.50
17.8 x 24
290 x 250 x 185
ILAPS79
53.50
Designed in Japan in 1956, the OLFA knife

was the first snap-off blade knife, and the
wheel lock on the latest design ensures
that the blade stays secure, unlike
cheaper copies.
ILAGS46
22.80
Content size
5 x 7
12.7 x 17.8
290 x 190 x 135
ILAGS57
26.00
A4
21 x 29.7
7 x 9.5
17.8 x 24
290 x 250 x 185
ILAGS79
34.70
A3
29.7 x 42
Stores anything which will potentially

degrade from exposure to light. The box
lid and one side open flat for easy access
to prints. Please note that these boxes are
designed as archive boxes and not as portfolios for a superior look and finish we
recommend Ilford Archiva.
Made from acid-free and age-resistant
card which is dove grey on the outside and
white inside. The E-Wave version has
1.6mm thick card, whilst the B-Wave type,
which absorbs more of the light wave radiation, is 3mm thick. Both types are 35mm
deep.
E-Wave
HUABEA4 A4 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.95
Olfa L-5 X-Design Cutter
290 x 160 x 110
Code
Price
337 x 293 x 50
ILAPNA4
53.50
477 x 378 x 50
ILAPNA3
79.50
A6 format
Double-sided paper in two types of
medium-weight stock.
Matt Duo
230gsm bright white. Pack of 25.
FSFCA6MD 11.95
Art Smooth Duo
220gsm warmtone high quality. Pack of 25
FSFCA6AD 19.95
OF001
OF003
X Design Snap-Off Knife . . 9.95

Blades for X Design (10) . . 7.95
A durable ring portfolio at a very

competitive price.
Padded nylon exterior
Shoulder strap included
Comfortable carrying handle
Two internal storage pockets
Reflective safety strips
Available in 3 sizes
Not supplied with pages
MCQA4
A4
12.50
MCQA3
A3
16.50
MCQA2
A2
27.50
Pages for Quartz portfolios

140 micron pages with black insert.
MCQPA4 A4 single page . . . . . . . . . 0.50
10% discount when you buy 10 or more
Secol Mini Portfolio
Hahnemuhle Print Archive Box
Finished in burgundy buckram cloth. Made to the same design and standard as the standard portfolio box, but supplied with a ringbinder for the storage of negatives or slides.
10.5 x 14.8
Mapac Quartz
Matt Duo
230gsm bright white. Pack of 25.
FSFCI3MD 11.95
Art Smooth Duo
220gsm warmtone high quality. Pack of 25
FSFCI36AD 19.95
Archiva Prestige Portfolio Ringbinder Box
4 x 6
Portfolios
A5 format
Archiva Prestige Portfolio Box
Content size
PRESENTATION
Fotospeed Fotocards
Hand made in England by G.Ryder & Co. from the finest quality
archival papers and boards, these boxes are made to the
highest standard in materials and construction and should be
the first choice for galleries and museums wanting secure
storage for prints and other suitable artefacts. Both the
Gallery and Prestige boxes use acid and lignin free board
and comply with Photo Activity Test (PAT) ISO 18916.
The Gallery series boxes are a simple two-part
construction with a black paper cover, while the Prestige
boxes use heavier stock, finished in top-quality
burgundy buckram cloth, and have a hinged portfolio
style construction.
Miniature 4-ring binder mechanism holds 10 glassclear polyester display pockets (for 20 A4 images
back-to-back). The superb quality of these pages
really gives pictures a lift, and the 3mm binder boards
will give years of service. Complete with 10 pockets.
SLMP 25.50
Secol Professional Archival Portfolio
B-Wave
HUABBA3 A3 format . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.95
HUABBA3+ A3+ format . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95
HUABBA2 A2 format . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.95
Cutting mats are on page 118
Include 25 pages
This deluxe portfolio is hand
made in hard wearing solid
board finished with black
Library Buckram cloth inside
and out, and trimmed with
tailored webbing edges and
anodised corner protectors.
A retracting carry handle
completes the presentation.
The portfolio comes with
25 Secol Display pages (for
displaying 50 images back to
back), and has a 4-ring mechanism. The
pages are welded on the three exposed
sides, so offer very secure storage of the
pictures when in the portfolio. As with the
Mini Portfolio the stunning clarity of the
polyester pages lets others view your work
at its very best.
SLPFA4 A4 (350x285x40mm) . . . 58.40

SLPFA3 A3 (465x360x40mm) . . . 67.50
SLPFA2 A2 (645x490x40mm) . . . 99.00
Packs of 10 pockets
SLPFPA41 A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.50
SLPFPA31 A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.70
SLPFPA21 A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.50
113
Kenro photo folders
Kenro frames
Kenro Bevel Edge Mounts
Frisco
Smarten up your picture frame presentation with these quality card mounts.
Second dimension is the picture size.
Brown folders gold border
Kenro strut mounts

Free-standing rectangular cardboard frames which can be used for view or portrait format,
with embossed finish and gold or silver border. Packs of 50 or 10.
114
Black mounts silver border
Brown mounts gold border
Packs of 50
KRMB129
KRMB130
KRMB131
KRMB133
KRMB145
KRMB134
KRMB501
Packs of 10
KRMB1291
KRMB1301
KRMB1311
KRMB1331
KRMB1451
KRMB1341
KRMB5011
Packs of 50
KRMBR099
KRMBR100
KRMBR101
KRMBR167
KRMBR102
KRMBR166
6x4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.50
7x5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.70
8x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.30
9x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.60
8x10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.40
8x12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.95
A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49.95
6x4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
7x5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.50
8x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.70
9x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.40
8x10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.30
8x12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.95
A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.25
6x4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.50
7x5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.70
8x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.30
9x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.60
8x10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.40
8x12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49.95
Packs of 10
KRMBR0991 6x4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.25
KRMBR1001 7x5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.50
KRMBR1011 8x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.70
KRMBR1671 9x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.40
KRMBR1021 8x10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.30
KRMBR1661 8x12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.95
Blue mounts gold border
Grey mounts silver border
Packs of 50
KRMBL120
KRMBL121
KRMBL122
KRMBL142
Packs of 10
KRMBL1201
KRMBL1211
KRMBL1221
KRMBL1421
Packs of 50
KRMGY123
KRMGY124
KRMGY125
KRMGY144
Packs of 10
KRMGY1231
KRMGY1241
KRMGY1251
KRMGY1441
6x4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.50
7x5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.70
8x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.30
8x10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.40
6x4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
7x5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.50
8x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.70
8x10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.40
6x4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.50
7x5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.70
8x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.30
8x10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.40
6x4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
7x5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.50
8x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.70
8x10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.40
Packs of 50
KRFBR017 6x4 upright. . . . . . . . . . . 31.40
KRFBR018 6x4 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.40
KRFBR020 7x5 upright. . . . . . . . . . . 37.30
KRFBR021 7x5 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.30
KRFBR022 8x6 upright. . . . . . . . . . . 48.60
KRFBR023 8x6 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48.60
KRFBR160 9x6 upright . . . . . . . . . . 56.70
KRFBR161 9x6 view. . . . . . . . . . . . . 56.70
KRFBR025 8x10 upright. . . . . . . . . . 66.30
KRFBR026 8x10 view . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.30
KRFBR058 8x12 upright (to order) . 74.90
KRFBR059 8x12 view (to order) . . . . 74.90
Packs of 10
KRFBR0171 6x4 upright. . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25
KRFBR0181 6x4 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25
KRFBR0201 7x5 upright. . . . . . . . . . . . 9.75
KRFBR0211 7x5 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.75
KRFBR0221 8x6 upright. . . . . . . . . . . 12.70
KRFBR0231 8x6 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.70
KRFBR1601 9x6 upright . . . . . . . . . . 14.95
KRFBR1611 9x6 view. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95
KRFBR0251 8x10 upright. . . . . . . . . . 17.40
KRFBR0261 8x10 view . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.40
KRFBR0581 8x12 upright (to order) . 19.60
KRFBR0591 8x12 view (to order). . . . 19.60
Black folders silver border

Packs of 50
KRFB078 6x4 upright . . . . . . . . . . 31.40
KRFB079 6x4 view . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.40
KRFB080 7x5 upright . . . . . . . . . . 37.30
KRFB081 7x5 view . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.30
KRFB082 8x6 upright . . . . . . . . . . 48.60
KRFB083 8x6 view . . . . . . . . . . . . 48.60
KRFB087 9x6 upright . . . . . . . . . . 56.70
KRFB088 9x6 view . . . . . . . . . . . . 56.70
Clear Fronted Print Bags
Board Backed Envelopes
Clear fronts and white Kraft paper backs.

Packs of 500. Bag sizes.
KRNB020 5x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.30
KRNB021 6x8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.30
KRNB022 7.5x10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.60
KRNB023 8.5x10.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.95
KRNB024 11x13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.40
KRNB025 12x17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56.00
Protect prints in transit. Marked with

Prints - do not bend.
KRBBE001 5.5x7.5 (125) . . . . . . . . 39.00
KRBBE002 7x9.5 (125) . . . . . . . . . . 38.00
KRBBE003 8.5x10.5 (125) . . . . . . . 44.50
KRBBE004 10.5x12.5 (125) . . . . . . 49.50
KRBBE005 14.5x17.5 (50) . . . . . . . 46.30
KRBBE020 18x12.75 (50) . . . . . . . . 47.90
KRFB150 8x10 upright . . . . . . . . . 66.30

KRFB151 8x10 view . . . . . . . . . . . 66.30
KRFB089 8x12 upright (to order). 74.90
KRFB090 8x12 view (to order) . . . 74.90
Packs of 10
KRFB0781 6x4 upright. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25
KRFB0791 6x4 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25
KRFB0801 7x5 upright . . . . . . . . . . . 9.75
KRFB0811 7x5 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.75
KRFB0821 8x6 upright . . . . . . . . . . 12.70
KRFB0831 8x6 view . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.70
KRFB0871 9x6 upright . . . . . . . . . . 14.95
KRFB0881 9x6 view . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95
KRFB1501 8x10 upright . . . . . . . . . 17.40
KRFB1511 8x10 view . . . . . . . . . . . 17.40
KRFB0891 8x12 upright (to order). 19.60
KRFB0901 8x12 view (to order) . . . 19.60
Ivory folders gold border

Packs of 50
KRFW029 6x4 upright . . . . . . . . . . 31.40
KRFW030 6x4 view . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.40
KRFW032 7x5 upright . . . . . . . . . . 37.30
KRFW033 7x5 view . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.30
KRFW034 8x6 upright . . . . . . . . . . 48.60
KRFW035 8x6 view . . . . . . . . . . . . 48.60
KRFW038 8x10 upright . . . . . . . . . 66.30
KRFW039 8x10 view . . . . . . . . . . . 66.30
Packs of 10
KRFW0291 6x4 upright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25
KRFW0301 6x4 view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25
KRFW0321 7x5 upright . . . . . . . . . . . 9.75
KRFW0331 7x5 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.75
KRFW0341 8x6 upright . . . . . . . . . . 12.70
KRFW0351 8x6 view . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.70
KRFW0381 8x10 upright . . . . . . . . . 17.40
KRFW0391 8x10 view . . . . . . . . . . . 17.40
Modestly-priced black plastic frames a smart alternative to clip frames.

Ideal for certificates, photos, posters etc
Frame sizes up to A4 have strut backs and hooks for
table top or wall mounting. Larger sizes have hooks
on long and short sides for wall mounting
Code
KRFR2025
KRFR2130
KRFR2835
KRFRA3
Photo size
8x10/20x25cm . . . . . . . 5.00
A4/20x30cm . . . . . . . . . . 5.70
11x14/28x35cm . . . . . . 8.35
A3/30x42cm . . . . . . . . . 11.60
BLACK
KRBVB01
KRBVB02
KRBVB03
KRBVB04
KRBVB05
KRBVB06
KRBVB07
KRBVB08
KRBVB09
KRBVB10
KRBVB11
KRBVB12
KRBVB13
KRBVB14
KRBVB15
Ext size
5x7
6x8
6x8
8x10
8x10
8x12
8x12
10x12
10x12
10x12
11x14
11x14
11x14
12x16
16x20
Int size
4x6
4x6
5x7
5x7
6x8
5x7
6x8
7x10
8x10
6x9
8x10
8x12
A4
8x12
A3
Price
1.65
1.85
1.85
2.25
2.25
2.55
2.55
2.85
2.85
2.85
3.50
3.50
3.50
3.70
4.80
WHITE
KRBVW01
KRBVW02
KRBVW03
KRBVW04
KRBVW05
KRBVW06
KRBVW07
KRBVW08
KRBVW09
KRBVW10
KRBVW11
KRBVW12
KRBVW13
KRBVW14
KRBVW15
Ext size
5x7
6x8
6x8
8x10
8x10
8x12
8x12
10x12
10x12
10x12
11x14
11x14
11x14
12x16
16x20
Int size
4x6
4x6
5x7
5x7
6x8
5x7
6x8
7x10
8x10
6x9
8x10
8x12
A4
8x12
A3
Price
1.65
1.85
1.85
2.25
2.25
2.55
2.55
2.85
2.85
2.85
3.50
3.50
3.50
3.70
4.80
Rio
IVORY
KRBVIV01
KRBVIV02
KRBVIV03
KRBVIV04
KRBVIV05
KRBVIV06
KRBVIV07
KRBVIV08
KRBVIV09
KRBVIV10
KRBVIV11
KRBVIV12
KRBVIV13
KRBVIV14
KRBVIV15
Ext size
5x7
6x8
6x8
8x10
8x10
8x12
8x12
10x12
10x12
10x12
11x14
11x14
11x14
12x16
16x20
Int size
4x6
4x6
5x7
5x7
6x8
5x7
6x8
7x10
8x10
6x9
8x10
8x12
A4
8x12
A3
Price
1.65
1.85
1.85
2.25
2.25
2.55
2.55
2.85
2.85
2.85
3.50
3.50
3.50
3.70
4.80
Modern style, luxury look frames with a

generous black border set behind glass.
Corners and edges are bevelled for a
smooth finish. These frames can be
displayed either free standing or wall
hung, and have a smart velour backing.
Frisco Wood
Similar to the standard style, with natural or whitebrush limed look wood frames.
Code
Photo size
Whitebrush finish
Natural finish
KRFR2025WD 8x10/20x25cm . . . . . . 5.00
KRFR2025N 8x10/20x25cm . . . . . . . 5.00
KRFR2130WD A4/20x30cm . . . . . . . . . 5.70
KRFR2130N A4/20x30cm . . . . . . . . . . 5.70
KRFR2835WD 11x14/28x35cm . . . . . 8.35
KRFR2835N 11x14/28x35cm . . . . . . 8.35
KRFRA3WD A3/30x42cm . . . . . . . . 11.60
KRFRA3N A3/30x42cm . . . . . . . . . 11.60
High quality picture frame handcrafted in solid blackfinished rubberwood. The frames have a generous 30mm
wide x 17mm deep flat profile with free standing strut or
wall hanging options. Frames up to 12x10 have free
standing easels, 30x40cm and larger are wall hanging.
Code
Photo size
KRRFR2025 8x10/20x25cm . . . . . . 13.95
KRRFB2130 A4/20x30cm . . . . . . . . . 15.95
KRRFB2835 11x14/28x35cm . . . . . 21.50
KRRFBA3 A3/30x42cm . . . . . . . . . 25.95
BUY 6 AND SAVE

15%
Just buy any 6 frames at the
same time (can be mixed
between types)
Black Glass
Code
KRBG1015
KRBG1318
KRBG1520
KRBG2025
KRBG2030
KRBG2530
Photo size
6x4/10x15cm . . . . . . . 10.95
7x5/13x18cm . . . . . . . 12.95
8x6/15x20cm . . . . . . . 16.50
8x10/20x25cm . . . . . . 19.50
8x12/20x30cm . . . . . . 22.50
10x12/25x30cm . . . . . 23.95
115
Pearl Classic
Kenro photo albums

Grace
White Satin
Finished in a textured white satin material, to give a simple touch of
luxury, these albums are ideal for storing photos of special occasions,
or for presenting proofs of wedding photos to clients. These traditionally styled albums have acid-free tissue interleaved white pages, and
the Memo albums have white slip-in pages plus a large memo write-up
space beside each photo to record personal details.
Bookbound
wedding albums
featuring a high
quality cover with a
fine grain white
simulated leather
finish, and decorative edge stitching.
These albums are
ideal for weddings,
christenings,
confirmations or
any event requiring
a special album.
Good quality bookbound

albums with grained and gold
blocked leather effect covers
and white pages.
Traditional Album
White photoboard pages
interleaved with pergamin
paper for long-term protection
of photos. 100 32x29cm pages
hold up to 500 6x4 prints, or
200 7x5.
15.95 3+ 14.36
KRKDG103R red
KRKDG103BL blue
White Satin Memo

6x4 takes up to 100 6x4
prints on 100 pages. Cover size
16.5Wx18H cm.
KRKDW119 7.95 3+ 7.16
9x6 takes up to 100 9x6
prints on 100 pages. Cover size
21Wx26H cm.
KRKDW147 13.50 3+ 12.15
Traditional Album
Black photoboard pages interleaved with
pergamin paper for long-term protection of
photos. 100 32x29cm pages hold up to 500
6x4 prints, or 200 7x5.
KRPL305 19.95 3+ 17.96
Slip-in Memo Album

Hold 200 prints; next to each page is a space to write a
caption.
for 6x4 prints
for 7x5 prints
10.95 3+ 9.86
14.95 3+ 13.46
KRKDG101R red
KRKDG105R red
KRKDG101BL blue
KRKDG105BL blue
Self-adhesive Album
Photos are attached by clear
film over thick board pages.
40 33x32cm post-bound pages
store up to 200 6x4 prints.
15.95 3+ 14.36
KRKDG104R red
KRKDG104BL blue
Self-adhesive Album
Photos are attached by clear film over thick
board pages. 60 post-bound pages store up
to 240 6x4 prints. 12x12 cover size.
KRPL301 23.50 3+ 21.15
Slip-in Memo Album

6x4 size holds 200 prints; 9x6 size 100
prints. Next to each page is a space to
write a caption.
for 200 6x4 prints
KRPL302 12.95 3+ 11.66
for 200 7x5 prints
KRPL303 15.95 3+ 14.36
for 100 9x6 prints
KRPL304 14.50 3+ 13.05
BUY 3 AND SAVE 10%

Just buy any 3 albums at the same time (can be mixed between types)
Like the Classic type this is a bookbound wedding album which has a
finely embossed filigree design and
a window with a ring design which
can be replaced if required by a
favourite photo. There is a
commemorative front page and the
album is tastefully presented in a
crystal top gift box.
116
for 7x5 prints

15.95 3+ 14.36
KRAZ103B black
KRAZ103G green
KRAZ103R red
KRAZ103P purple
The fastest and cleanest way of mounting

prints and suitable for many other jobs
around home and office. Simply press the
glue roll dispenser down and roll it backwards. The dispenser is reloadable.
Available in either removeable (glue can
be rubbed off), or the permanent versions.
Removeable
Just buy any 3 albums at the same time (can be mixed

between types)
Removeable Hermafix Transfer

HX1060 5.50
HX1061 Glue refill for 1060 . . . . . . 2.75
HX10615 Glue refill 5 pack . . . . . . . 12.75
Fleur
Permanent
Permanent Hermafix Transfer
HX1014 5.50
HX1011 Glue refill for 1014 . . . . . . 2.75
HX10115 Glue refill 5 pack . . . . . . . 12.75
Book-bound albums featuring a delicate silver-white

finish, with a lightly embossed title and design on
the front cover. There is a commemorative front page
for recording wedding information in each type, and
they are supplied in a clear top gift box.
Photo corners
Herma photo corners are of
museum grade archival
quality, and are self-adhesive and virtually invisible.
Pictures can be removed and replaced
when required.
HX1380 20mm edge 250pcs . . . . . . 2.95
HX1383 20mm edge 500pcs . . . . . . 4.95
Traditional Album
White photoboard pages interleaved
with pergamin paper for long-term
protection of the photos.
Large page size 29x32cm
KRFLR101 18.95 3+ 17.06
Small page size 22.5x23.5cm
KRFLR105 10.95 3+ 9.86
Photo stickers
Professional CD Folio
CDs not
included
CD not
included
Traditional Album
White photoboard pages interleaved with
white tissue paper for long-term protection
of photos. 60 pages hold up to 300 6x4
prints, or a proportionally smaller number
of larger sizes. Cover size 32x27.5cm.
KRPL204 18.50 3+ 16.65
Transfer
BUY 3 AND SAVE 10%
Guest Book
with 60 pages and space for 120 messages
KRFLR102 9.50 3+ 8.55
Book bound albums with a fine linen finish and a frame on the front cover for a favourite
photo (window measures 90x90mm). They have white memo pages for either 6x4 or 7x5
prints with clear slip-in pockets and a writing area next to the photos, and are held closed
with a co-ordinated elastic strip around the covers.
for 6x4 prints
11.95 3+ 10.76
KRAZ101B black
KRAZ101G green
KRAZ101R red
KRAZ101P purple
White Satin Traditional

Small takes up to 120 6x4
prints on 60 pages. Page size
22.5x23.5cm.
KRKDW145 9.95 3+ 8.96
Large takes up to 500 6x4
prints on 100 pages. Page size
32x27.5cm.
KRKDW108 19.95 3+ 17.96
Slip-in memo style for 200 6x4 prints

KRFLR103 12.95 3+ 11.66
Slip-in memo style for 200 7x5 prints
KRFLR104 15.95 3+ 14.36
Pearl Rings
Aztec
Hermafix
Slip-in Memo Album

Each size holds 200 prints. Next to each
page is a space to write a caption.
for 200 6x4 prints
KRPL203 13.95 3+ 12.56
for 200 7x5 prints
KRPL202 18.50 3+ 16.65
Adhesive Tape
Simulated leather CD/DVD wallet with a

frame for a picture or legend on the front,
and magnetic closure. Supplied in a
presentation box. Single size available in
white or black.
Single CD/DVD
Black KRCDF101B 10.70 3+ 9.63
White KDCDF101W 10.70 3+ 9.63
Free from solvents or acids, these

12x17mm stickers attachon the back of
the print and give permanent adhesion.
HX1070 500 stickers . . . . . . . . . . . 1.95
HX1071 1000 stickers . . . . . . . . . . 2.95
Double CD/DVD
Front cover has an insert like the single CD
version.
Black only KDCDF02B 11.20 3+ 10.08
An easy way to glue many items. Simply

unroll and place in position. 12mm wide
glue surface is covered by tape
until ready for use. Free from
solvents; can be repositioned
for a short time after positioning on subject. 12m
long roll.
HX1081 3.95
117
Longridge Mount Cutting System
HOW TO PLACE YOUR ORDER
Kaiser Easy Cut Trimmer
Autograph Series
A versatile cutter with self-sharpening

covered blade, steel baseboard and guide
bar, designed for paper (up to 4 x 80gsm
sheets 0.4mm) or thin card. A transparent clamping bar keeps the paper
secure during the cut. Picture
formats and angle lines printed on
the baseboard. Two cutting lengths
available.
Enables the hobbyist or light professional

user to make good clean cuts through
mountboard. The cutter can be used left or
right-handed, thus removing stress on
thumb or fingers. All kits include:
Bevel cutter with variable depth
control, retractable blade and start and
stop indicator
Vertical mountboard cutter
Non-slip guide rail, with cutter stops
Base with integral squaring facility
Marker gauge and 4 marker pencils
Retractable measure and screwdriver
2 x SprintMat cutting boards
Packet of 50 blades
Visual/audio instruction DVD for
PC/Mac and instruction leaflet
UK customers
Trimmers
KA4306
KA4307
Easy Cut 1 32cm . . . . . . . 24.95

Easy Cut 2 46cm . . . . . . . 29.95
Rotatrim Professional
With over 300,000 in use worldwide, the
Professional is the standard by which
other trimmers are judged. Each model
features twin chromed guide
rails, silent glide action and all
metal cutting head and end
frames. Professional cutters are
designed for high volume use and
will cleanly cut virtually all flexible
materials up to 3mm thickness.
Guaranteed for 5 years. Base is printed
with 10mm grid A sizes, and two additional metric/imperial scale bars.
RTM18
RTM24
RTM30
RTM36
18 (45.5cm) cut . . . . . 174.50

24 (61cm) cut . . . . . . . 209.95
30 (76.3cm) cut . . . . . 259.00
36 (91.4cm) cut . . . . . 295.00
Rotatrim Mastercut
A size trimmers for medium volume
applications, each Mastercut features a
chromed steel rail, unbreakable mouldings, an adjustable backstop for
precise repeat cutting, and an MDF
baseboard with 10mm grid. Up to 20
sheets/2mm cut capacity.
RTMCA4
RTMCA3
RTMCA2
A4 (34cm) cut . . . . . . . . . 83.95

A3 (46cm) cut . . . . . . . . 105.95
A2 (66.5cm) cut . . . . . . 142.95
Autograph Midi
Maximum mountboard size: A1 sideways
and A2 lengthways.
Maximum mount size: 620mm (24)
Maximum window size: 520mm (20)
LG040 245.00
By phone
Phone your order through to us on
01420 560066
Autograph Plus
Maximum mountboard size: A0 sideways
and A1 lengthways.
Maximum mount size: 865mm (34)
Maximum window size: 765mm (30)
LG041 295.00
Developed from the Autograph, this

design is aimed at professionals wishing
to make multiple copies of the same size
mount. After creating a master, the
unique parallelogram action allows accurate repetition of the mount, so its easy
to quickly produce a run on demand by
just setting up from the master.
By post
Send your cheque or postal orders, made
payable to Speed Graphic, or quote your
credit/debit card number and expiry date.
Please include a daytime telephone
number in case of enquiry.
You do not need a stamp when using
our Freepost address (orders usually
received 3 days after posting). Send to:
By fax
Signature Plus
Has the same dimesions as the Autograph
Plus, taking the same size board.
LG065 435.00
LG024/4 Border Marker pencils (4) . 4.00

LG030/50 Mount Cutter blades (50) 17.00
from Monday to Friday 8.30am 5.30pm.

Please have your order details, credit
card number and expiry date ready.
There is an out of hours answerphone.
All orders and enquiries placed on this will
be acknowledged the next working day.
FREEPOST
RRRJ-AYTA-URJS
Speed Graphic
ALTON
GU34 5AZ
Signature Midi
Has the same dimesions as the Autograph
Midi, taking the same size board.
LG064 375.00
Rotatrim Cutting Mats
118
Signature Series
Longridge accessories
Virtually indestructible, these self-healing (on both
sides) mats have a 3mm thick 5-ply construction.
They have metric markings on one side, and imperial on the other. Wont blunt your knife, but will
permanently protect your work surface!
RTCMA3 A3 (30x45cm) . . . . . . . . . . 9.00
RTCMA2 A2 (45x60cm) . . . . . . . . . 17.00
RTCMA1 A1 (60x90cm) . . . . . . . . . 30.00
Online at
You can fax your order to us at
01420 563942
SprintMats
Cutter protection strips which, unlike
scrap boards, make for easier cutting,
because the fibres all run lengthways in
the direction of the cut. Result cleaner
edges and longer blade life. Pack of 20.
LG203 SprintMat Midi 25.00
LG204 SprintMat Plus 30.00
Burnishing Bone
Settles the mount edge
after cutting.
LG025 10.00
Please ensure that you give full delivery

address and card details and a phone or
fax number in case of enquiry.
E-mail
Cards accepted
Mastercard, Visa, Visa Debit,
Maestro/Solo, American Express.
and via our
website only
Overseas customers
Delivery charges
UK (up to 30kg: exclusions below)
Orders up to 30 value 3.50
All other orders over 30 5.00
Parcels weighing over 2kg to
Channel Islands, Northern
Ireland, Isle of Wight and other
offshore destinations, and some
Scottish Highlands* 20.00
Next Day Guaranteed Delivery
for delivery Monday to Friday
extra 3.00 on standard rates
(e.g. any order over 30 and
under 30kg to most parts of
the UK for just 8.00).
for delivery on Saturday
By courier delivery before
midday. Prices 17.00 or 21
according to weight.
Next Day timed deliveries
for delivery Monday to Friday
Before Noon, 10.30 and 9.00
services available from 12.00
* a list of postcodes is on our website in
the Delivery information section
Help us to help you. .

To ensure that we process your order
accurately and speedily it helps if you
can quote the following:
Cardholder postcode
We search for your details using this, so

please quote this postcode when
prompted. We will take a different
delivery address after this point.
By phone
Phone your order through to us on
+44 1420 560066

from Monday to Friday 8.30am to 5.30pm
Please have your order details, credit
card number and expiry date ready.
By fax
You can fax your order to us at
+44 1420 563942

Please ensure that you give full delivery
address and card details and (especially
important) a fax number or e-mail address
in case of enquiry.
Cardholder postcode
for larger parcels where a courier

delivery is required, an address which
will be occupied in working hours.
Europe
by post up to 2kg (inc Eire)
Orders up to 30 value 8.00
All other orders over 30
and up to 2kg weight 15.00
Europe orders 2kg20kg
Austria, Belgium, Eire, France, Germany,
Netherlands 20
Denmark, Italy, Luxembourg, Portugal,
Spain 25
Andorra, Canary Islands, Czech
Republic, Finland, Gibraltar, Greece,
Hungary, Norway, Poland, San Marino,
Slovakia, Slovenia, Sweden,
Switzerland, Turkey 40
Other European destinations: carriage
at cost (please request quotation)
Rest of world
E-mail
Orders and enquiries to:
Carriage at cost (fax or e-mail quotation sent before despatch on request).
Express services
Payment
Cards accepted
Mastercard, Visa, American Express.
Paypal
for orders via our website only
EC VAT-registered customers
Note that is you are VAT-registered you will
be charged the full VAT-inclusive amount
when using Paypal. To avoid this, please
use a debit or credit card our our sales staff
will adjust the prices when processing your
order.
Bank transfers
by arrangement. Please pay all bank
charges. If not, there will be a charge of
15 to cover our banks fees.
Cardholder postcode
shown before the price / description of

each product
Delivery charges
Online at
OUR DESPATCH
GUARANTEE
Place your order by 4pm and if goods
are in stock they will be sent that day.
UPS or DHL courier service

Available to most destinations. Next
day delivery to most European and
major world destinations; 2-3 days
elsewhere. Avoids long customs delays.
not available to PO Box addresses.
Tax-free prices
All products in this catalogue, except
books, include 20% VAT.
Are you eligible?

You live in any non-EC country
You live in the EC and can supply a
valid VAT registration number at
the time of ordering
You live in the Channel Islands
How to calculate the

tax-free price
To arrive at the price net of VAT,
multiply the amount by 0.8333, so for
example, 29.95 would be 24.96. If
you need help, please get in touch.
ORDER FORM OVERLEAF
119
Speed Graphic
MAIL TO
FREEPOST
RRRJ-AYTA-URJS
Speed Graphic
Alton GU34 5AZ
Your details including

billing address
Delivery address if different

(If left blank, goods will be sent to billing address)
Name
Name
Billing address
Address
By Brand
FAX TO
01420 563942
outside UK +44 1420 563942
Post code
OR PHONE US ON
01420 560066
Post code
Daytime tel number
E-mail address
outside UK +44 1420 560066

Product Code
Description
Price
Quantity
Total
Carriage charge
(see p119 overleaf for details)
Payment method
Next day delivery required?

Please tick this box
I enclose a cheque/postal order made payable to Speed Graphic Mail Order Ltd
TOTAL
Please charge my credit/debit card
Mastercard Visa American Express Maestro/Solo (state issue no, or if none, valid from date
Card number
Expiry date
Cardholders signature
Validation code*
INDEX
ORDER FORM
Thank you for your order!
*3 digit number on reverse of card

4 digit number on front (Amex)
2014-15
1901 Fotographie straps . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Ansmann batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
B+W
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Benbo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Benro
video tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
gimbal heads . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Better Beamer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Billingham . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Black Rapid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Bowens lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6667
Braun
slide projectors . . . . . . . . . 110
Cactus
flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Camranger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Canon
camera accessories. . . . . . . . 48
flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
macro accessories . . . . . . . . 42
inks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Cokin
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
ColorChecker white balance aids . . . . . . 61
Cotton Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617
Custom Brackets gimbal heads . . . . . . . 41
flash brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Datacolor profiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
DEPSSI depth of field card . . . . . . . . 61
Eckla
Eagle support/Camdisk . . . . . 23
chair/trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Elinchrom lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8285
Epson
inks and papers . . . . . . . . . 106
ExpoAperture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Flash X-tender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
FLM
levelling bases . . . . . . . . . . . 22
quick releases . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
monopods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
tripods and heads . . . . . . . . . 31
Fotospeeddarkroom . . . . . . . . . . 102103
inkjet paper . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Frio
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fuji
films. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Gepe
slide accessories . . . . . . . . 111
card storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Gitzo
monopods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
tripods and heads . . . . . 3941
Gossen meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6263
Hahnel remote controls . . . . . . . . . . 48
Hahnemuhle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Hama
cleaning accessories . . . . . . 53
flash accessories . . . . . . . . . 76
Herma
adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Holga
pinhole camera . . . . . . . . . . 67
SLR pinhole lens . . . . . . . . . . 47
Honl
flash modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Hoodman monitor accessories . . . . . . . 52
Hoya
filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
By Category
Ilford
darkroom materials . . 102103

Archiva storage boxes. . . . . 112
films. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
inkjet papers . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Interfit lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
lighting stands. . . . . . . . . . . 95
Joby
smartphone supports . . . . . . 21
Kaiser
camera accessories . . . . 47, 51
copy stands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
darkroom . . . . . . . . . . 100101
flash accessories . . . . . . . . . 76
Kenko
teleconverter . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
extension tubes . . . . . . . . . . 42
Kenro
albums . . . . . . . . . . . . 116117
air duster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
filing accessories . . . . . . . . 111
frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
mounts and folders . . 114115
Kodak
films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
LaCie
hard drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Lastolite backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . 9799
flash accessories . . . . . . . 7479
light modifiers . . . . . . . . 9293
product photography . . . . . . 90
Lee
filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5660
Lens Pens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Lenskirt light hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Linpix
mat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Longridge cutters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Lowepro camera bags/lens cases . 1213
Lumiquest flash accessories . . . . . . . . . 73
Macwet gloves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Manfrotto bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 13, 15
clamps, small tripods . . . 2123
flash bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
lighting stands etc . . . . . 9495
monopods . . . . . . . . . . . 2829
quick releases . . . . . . . . . . . 24
tripods and heads . . . . . 3237
LED lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Medalight lightboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Metz
flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
MOD54 5x4 developing tank. . . . . 100
Nikon
camera accessories . 4849, 51
filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
macro flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Nissin
flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Novagrade digiscoping adaptor. . . . . . . 37
Novoflex adaptors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ball heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
clamps, small tripods . . . 2122
Triopod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
macro accessories . . . . . 4244
panoramic adaptors . . . . . . . 27
product photography . . . . . . 91
quick releases . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Op/tech camera pouches . . . . . . . . . . 14
Hood Hats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
ORDERING DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Panosaurus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Paterson lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
darkroom . . . . . . . . . . 100101
Phottix remote controls . . . . . . . . . . 48
flashgun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8081
Plustek scanners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
PocketWizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Polaris meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Pony Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Quantum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Rayflash Ringflash Adaptor . . . . . . . . 70
Reflecta screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Rode
microphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Rogue
flash reflectors . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Rotatrim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Sandisk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Secol
portfolios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Seagull anglefinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
LED ringlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Sekonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6263
SMDV
trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Spider
camera holsters . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Spinlight flash modifier . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Sun Sniper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Syrp
video accessories . . . . . . . . . 37
Tamrac camera bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Tascam DLSR recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
ThinkTank camera bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
camera strap . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
card wallets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
waterproof covers . . . . . . . . 15
Tiffen
filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Velbon tripods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Visible Dust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Walkstool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Wein
batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Westcott softbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
IceLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
WWS
beanbags/covers . . . . . . 1819
X-rite
colour profiling . . . . . . . . . . 107
Albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116117
Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112113
Backgrounds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9799
Bags
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6465, 77
Body adaptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Caps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Clamps and supports. . . . . . . . . . . . 2023
Cleaning and maintenance . . . . . . . 5253
Close-up accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . 4244
Clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9192
Copy stands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Darkroom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100103
Digiscope adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Films
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Filters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5460
Flashguns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6870
Flash accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7279
Flash studio lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . 8287
Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Gimbal heads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Hard drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Hide, mat, seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1819
Inkjet materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104106
LED lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Lens hoods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Lighting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9199
Light meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6263
Macro equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4244
Memory cards etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6566
Microphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Monopods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2829
Panoramic adaptors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2627
Photo mounts and folders . . . . . . . . . 114
Pinhole accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 67
Portfolios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Profiling equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Product photography . . . . . . . . . . . 9091
Quick releases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2425
Reflectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4849
Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Sensor cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Slide projection and storage. . . . 110111
Smartphone supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Spirit levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Stepping rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Straps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618
Studio lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8299
Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7981
Trimmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Tripods and heads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3041
Tungsten studio lighting . . . . . . . . 8889
Viewfinder accessories. . . . . . . . . . . 5152
White balance accessories . . . . . . . . . . 61
Speed Graphic

Web Catalogue 2014 - 15

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Web Catalogue 2014 - 15

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Speed Graphic

Prices in this catalogue

Same day despatch

Form follows function or not

INDEX & ORDER FORM

One of the most gratifying statistics for

INSIDE BACK COVER

Something for the weekend, Sir

Lovely meters Rita made?

Spreading the light

What goes around

You had to imagine the red eye of course,

tion to do this for you and how about

Ah yes, the Hama Filmsafe and

CLOSE-UP & MACRO

Waterproofed canvas or highly

Strong 8mm zips

Solid brass fittings

335 (shown above)

The slimline styling of the

These bags feature a large

Ideal for a Leica or CSC-size outfit of a

The Hadley Pro Original has an internal size of

Hadley Pro Original

speedgraphic.co.uk / 01420 560066

Big front tabs make them easier to

Takes 2-3 bodies plus 3-4 lenses. Internal

Back Pack Harness

Internal dims: 19Wx7Dx21H cm. Weight 0.53kg.

Deluxe, foam padded alternative to the

Internal dims: 15Wx6.5Dx24H cm. Weight .052kg.

Takes 1-2 bodies plus 2-4 lenses. Internal

Hadley Large Pro

The perfect travelling companions, to keep a pocket camera,

AVEA 3 (left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49.50

Prices may change: check our website before ordering

Complying with BAA and all international

T477 Streetwalker Pro

T498 Airport TakeOff

The largest Think Tank rolling case is big enough for

Upsized version, designed around a pro

A rolling backpack with straps designed to

T540 Airport Navigator

T559 Airport International 2.0

T550 Airport Airstream

T571 Airport Security

Artificial Intelligence 3.0

speedgraphic.co.uk / 01420 560066

Styled on the classic pilots briefcase, this rolling bag

T514 Airport Roller Derby

T470 Shape Shifter

T483 Airport Essentials

Large lens backpacks

T486 Airport Commuter

T409 Speed Racer 2.0

T406 Speed Freak 2.0

T489 Airport Accelerator

T401 Speed Demon 2.0

Takes a standard DSLR body and 23 small

Prices may change: check our website before ordering

Think Tank Modular Belt System

T321 Modular Set v2.0 (above)

T189 Lens Drop